高三英语语法总复习课件 人教版[全套]

(共23张PPT)
南莫中学 黄耀春
主谓一致
练习
历年高考题
例题
(4) 用 连接的并列主语被each,every或no修饰时，谓语动词 用单数。
(5) each of + 复数代词，谓语动用单数。复数代词+each，谓语动词用单数。如
语法一致
语法一致
语法一致
语法一致
语法一致
语法一致
内容 一致
内容 一致
内容 一致
内容 一致
内容 一致
就近一致
就近 一致
Example
E-mail, as well as telephones, ____ an important part in
daily communication. (99 上海2)
A. is playing B. have played
C. are playing D. play
答案及分析
答案是C。当有as well as 引导时，谓语与第一个主语一致，既与E-mail 单数一致，故选C.
90题21 A library with five thousand books____ to the nation as a gift.
A. is offered B. has offered C. are offered D. have offered
2. 89题27 Not only I but also Jane and Mary ____ tired of having one examination after another.
A. is B. are C. am D. be
3. 87题15 All but one ____ here just now.
A. is B.was C. has been D. were
答案
Multiple choice:
1. On the wall______ two large portraits.
A. hangs B. hang C. hanged D. hanging (C85)
2. “News of victories _____ pouring in as our army advances,”
the company commander said.
A. keep B. keeps C. kept D. have kept (C85)
3. There _____ a lot of milk in the bottle.
A. are B. is C. were D. has (C86)
4. Zhang’s family ____ rather big, with twelve people in all.
A. is B. are C. being D. was (C85)
5. Nobody but Jane ____ the secret.
A. know B. knows C. have known D. is known (C86 )
Multiple choice:
6. All but one _____ here just now.
A. is B. was C. has been D. were (C87 NO.45)
7. A library with five thousand books ____ to the nation as a gift.
A. is offered B. has offered C. are offered D. have offered
(C90 NO.20)
8. Not only I but also Jane and Mary __ tired of having one exam
after another.
A. is B. are C. am D. be (C89 NO.27)
9. The number of people invited ____ fifty, but a number of them
____ absent for different reasons.
A. were; was B. was; was C. was; were D. were; were
(C 96 NO.14)
10. When and where to build the new factory _____ yet.
A. is not decided B. are not decided
C. has not decided D. have not decided
Have a rest(共13张PPT)
常见的后缀—动词、副词
By James Cai
Beijing NO.9 Middle School
动词后缀
1) -ize, ise, 表示"做成，变成，……化“ modernize, mechanize, democratize, organize
2) -en, 表示"使成为，引起，使有” quicken, weaken, soften, harden
3) -fy, 表示"使……化, 使成” beautify, purify, intensify, signify, simplify
4) -ish, 表示"使，令” finish, abolish, diminish, establish
5) -ate, 表示“成为……，处理，作用” separate, operate, indicate
副词后缀
1) -ly, possibly, swiftly, simply
2) -ward, -wards, downward, inwards, upward
3) -ways, always, sideways
4) -wise, otherwise, clockwise(共17张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
英语的时态
（1）
南莫中学高三英语备课组
一、一般现在时的用法
1) 经常性或习惯性的动作，常与表示频度的时间状语连用。
　 时间状语： every…, sometimes,　at…, on Sunday
　 I leave home for school at 7 every morning.
He cycles to work every day.
2) 客观真理，客观存在，科学事实。
　 The earth moves around the sun.
　 Shanghai lies in the east of China.
Water boils at 100 centigrade degrees.
3) 表示格言或警句中。
　 Pride goes before a fall.　骄者必败。
注意：此用法如果出现在宾语从句中，即使主句是过去时，从句谓语也要用一般现在时。例如：
Columbus proved that the earth is round.
4) 现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。
　 I don't want so much.
　 Ann Wang writes good English but does not speak well.
比较：Now I put the sugar in the cup.
I am doing my homework now.
第一句用一般现在时，用于操作演示或指导说明的示范性动作，表示言行的瞬间动作。再如：Now watch me, I switch on the current and stand back. 第二句中的now是进行时的标志，表示正在进行的动作的客观状况。
知识扩展：一般现在时表将来
1）下列动词：come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return的一般现在时表将来。这主要用来表示在时间上已确定或安排好的事情。
The train leaves at six tomorrow morning.
When does the bus star It stars in ten minutes.
2）倒装句，表示动作正在进行，如：
Here comes the bus. = The bus is coming.
There goes the bell. = The bell is ringing.
3）在时间或条件句中。
When Bill comes (不是will come), ask him to wait for me.
I'll write to you as soon as I arrive there.
4）在动词hope, take care that, make sure that等后。
I hope they have a nice time next week.
Make sure that the windows are closed before you leave the room.
二、一般过去时的用法
1）在确定的过去时间里所发生的动作或存在的状态。
　 时间状语有：yesterday, last week, an hour ago, the other day, in 1982等。
　 Where did you go just now
I saw Tom in the street yesterday.
I bought this TV set in Beijing last year.
2）表示在过去一段时间内，经常性或习惯性的动作。
　 When I was a child, I often played football in the street.
　 He always went to work by bus.
He used to act like that.
3）用过去时表示现在，表示语气委婉礼貌。
（1）动词want, hope, wonder, think, intend 等。例如：
Did you want anything else
I wanted to ask you about that.
Did you want to speak to me now
I wondered if you could help me.
（2）情态动词 could, would，例如：
　Could you lend me your bike
4）用在条件句中表示与现在或将来事实不符的虚拟语气。
If I were a bird, I would fly to Beijing.
If he were here now, we could turn to him for help.
注意比较下列句型：
◎ It is time for sb. to do sth　 “到……时间了；该……了”，例如：
It is time for you to go to bed.　你该睡觉了。
◎ It is time sb. did sth. “时间已迟了；早该……了”，例如：
　 It is time you went to bed.　你早该睡觉了。
◎ would (had) rather sb. did sth.　表示“宁愿某人做某事”，例如：
I'd rather you came tomorrow.
一般过去时表示的动作或状态都已成为过去，现已不复存在。
Christine was an invalid all her life.　(含义：她已不在人间。)
Christine has been an invalid all her life.　(含义：她现在还活着)
Mrs. Darby lived in Kentucky for seven years. (含义：达比太太已不再住在肯塔基州。)
Mrs. Darby has lived in Kentucky for seven years. ( 含义：现在还住在肯塔基州，有可能指刚离去)
三、一般将来时
1) shall用于第一人称，常被will 所代替。
will 在陈述句中用于各人称，在征求意见时常用于第二人称。
Which paragraph shall I read first？
Will you be at home at seven this evening
2) be going to +不定式，表示将来。
　 a. 主语的意图，即将做某事或打算做某事。
What are you going to do tomorrow
　 b. 计划，安排要发生的事。
The play is going to be produced next month.
　 c. 有迹象要发生的事
Look at the dark clouds; there is going to be a storm.
3) be +不定式表将来，按计划或正式安排将发生的事。
　 We are to discuss the report next Saturday.
4) be about to +不定式，意为马上做某事。
He is about to leave for Beijing.
注意：be about to 不能与tomorrow, next week 等表示明确将来时的时间状语连用。
☆be going to / will的用法之比较：
用于条件句时，be going to表将来，will表意愿。例如：
If you are going to make a journey, you'd better get ready for it as soon as possible.
Now if you will take off your clothes, we will fit the new clothes on you in front of the mirror.
☆be to和be going to 的用法之比较：
　be to 表示客观安排或受人指示而做某事。而be going to 则表示主观的打算或计划。例如：
　I am to play football tomorrow afternoon. (客观安排)
　I'm going to play football tomorrow afternoon. (主观安排)
四、现在进行时
　1. 表示现在( 指说话人说话时) 正在发生的事情。例如：
We are waiting for you.
　2. 习惯进行：表示长期的或重复性的动作，说话时动作未必正在进行。例如：
Mr. Green is writing another novel.　
(说话时并未在写，只处于写作的状态。)
She is learning piano under Mr. Smith.
　3. 表示渐变的动词有：get, grow, become, turn, run, go, begin等。
The leaves are turning red.
It's getting warmer and warmer.
　4. 与always, constantly, forever 等词连用，表示反复发生的动作或持续存在的状态，往往带有说话人的主观色彩。
You are always changing your mind.
知识扩展：不用进行时的动词
　
1) 事实状态的动词。如：have, belong, possess, cost, owe, exist, include, contain, matter, weigh, measure, continue
I have two brothers.
This house belongs to my sister.
2) 心理状态的动词。如：know, realize, think see, believe, suppose, imagine, agree, recognize, remember, want, need, forget, prefer, mean, understand, love, hate
I need your help.
He loves her very much.
3) 瞬间动词。如：accept, receive, complete, finish, give, allow, decide, refuse.
I accept your advice.
4) 系动词。如：seem, remain, lie, see, hear, smell, feel, taste, get, become, turn
You seem a little tired.
五、过去进行时
1）概念：表示过去某时正在进行的状态或动作。
2）过去进行时的主要用法是描述一件事发生的背景；一个长动作发生的时候，另一个短动作发生。
3) 常用的时间状语有：this morning, the whole morning, all day yesterday, from nine to ten last evening, when, while
例句：
My brother fell while he was riding his bicycle and hurt himself.
　 It was raining when they left the station.
When I got to the top of the mountain, the sun was shining.　
典型例题
1) Mary ___ a dress when she cut her finger.　
A. made　 B. is making　 C. was making　 D. makes
答案C. 割伤手指是已发生的事情，应用过去时。同时，when表时间的同时性，"玛丽在做衣服时"提供事情发生的背景，因此用过去进行时。
2) As she ___ the newspaper, Granny ___ asleep.
A. read; was falling　 B. was reading; fell　
C. was reading; was falling　 D. read; fell
答案B.句中的as = when, while，意为"当……之时"。描述一件事发生的背景时，用过去进行；一个长动作发生的时候，另一个短动作发生。句意为 "在她看报纸时，奶奶睡着了。"句中的 fell (fall的过去时)，是系动词，后跟形容词，如：fall sick。
1. — Look! How wonderful my car is! Oh, Jack. What are you thinking about Don’t you like it
— I’m sorry I ______ any remark about it in time. I certainly think it’s smart.
A. wasn’t making B. don’t make
C. won’t make D. didn’t make
2. To find the street where I lived in my childhood is no easy task because the city ______ so rapidly all these years.
A. is changing B. has changed
C. will have changed D. will change
3. He ______ quite well, but he hasn’t had time to swim since this summer.
A. will swim B. have swum C. swam D. swims
4. Jimmy said that he would come to pick me up, but he ____by now.
A. hasn’t turned up B. doesn’t turn up
C. won’t turn up D. hadn’t turned up
5. I’m terribly sorry for being late, but I _____ the wrong bus.
A. catch B. had caught C. caught D. catching
7. The truth, sir, is that the old man _______ across the road when my car hit him.
A. was to walk B. had been walking
C. walked D. was walking
8. I really don’t think Rose will be upset, but I will go and see her in case she _____.
A. is B. does C. will be D. has been
9. The computers made by our company sell best, but several years ago no one could have imagined the role in the markets that they _________.
A. were playing B. were to play
C. had played D. played
10. — Kate is in hospital.
— Oh, really I _______. ________ visit her.
A. didn’t know; I’ll go and B. don’t know; I’ll go and
C. don’t know; I’m going to D. didn’t know; I’m going to
11. — Where _______ the guidebook I can’t see it anywhere.
— I _______ it right here, but now it’s gone.
A. did you put; have put B. had you put; have put
C. have you put; put D. were you putting; put
14. — Do you live in this city
— No, we ______ it for holidays.
A. just visit B. just visited C. are just visiting D. have visited
15. — How is the old man now
— Sorry, he ______ though they did all they could to save him.
A. was dead B. had died C. has been dead D. died
16.The lake will be further polluted unless some measures ______.
A. will be taken B. are taken C. were taken D. had been taken
17. I’m afraid it will be two months ______.
A. when I come back B. when I’ll come back
C. before I come back D. before I’ll come back
18.The workers _____ busily when the boss came to look for something he ______ in the office.
A. had worked, had left B. were working ; had left
C. working ; had left D. had worked; left
21.The notice ______ “No smoking”.
A. is told B. reads C. tells D. is read(共20张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
分 词
南莫中学高三英语备课组
一、形 式

主动形式
被动形式
一般式
doing
being done
完成式
having done
having been done
△ 过去分词只有一种形式。
△ 现在分词：
二、 功 能
1．作表语
2．作定语
3．作状语
4．作宾语补足语
5. 现在分词的完成形式和被动形式
6. 独立结构
1．作表语。现在分词多表示主语所具有的特征或属性；过去分词多表示主语所处的状态，如：
The news was exciting.
The situation is encouraging.
She looked disappointed.
He appeared satisfied with my answer.
He seemed quite delighted at the idea.
Don’t get excited.
注①：已经成为形容词的分词，可以用 very 修饰；没有完全成为形容词的分词宜用 much 或 quite，有时也可用very much，如：
I’m very much pleased.
He’s very much worried about his health.
注②：过去分词作表语时，应注意与被动结构的区别。
系表结构说明主语的状态或具有的性质、特点；被动结构强调谓语动作，指主语所承受的动作。此外还有：
系表结构：a. 常用一般现在或一般过去时态；b. 一般不带状语；
c. 可以有不及物动词的过去分词。
被动结构：a. 有多种时态，常与主动语态的时态一致；b. 可以带时
间、方式或 by 短语作状语；c. 必须是及物动词。
The small village is surrounded by trees. (状态)
The small village was soon surrounded by enemy soldiers. (动作)
I’m interested in chess.
I was interested by what you told me.
The sun is risen.
This novel was written by Lu Xun in 1921.
2．作定语：
① 单独作定语，应放在被修饰的名词之前，如：
touching story / leading cadres / shining example / coming week /
skilled worker / armed forces / boiled water / steamed bread
Barking dogs seldom bite.
Soon our respected and beloved leaders entered the banquet hall.
注：分词作定语时，意义上接近于一个定语从句，如：
developing countries = countries that are developing
a growing city = a city that is growing
liberated areas = areas that have been liberated
② 在更多情况下，可以用分词短语作定语，这时分词短语应放在被修饰的名词之后，在意义上也相当于一个定语从句，如：
Who is the man standing (= that is standing) by the door
They built a highway leading (= which leads) into the mountains.
They are problems left (= which have been left) over by history.
Have you read any short stories written by Lu Xun
③ 作定语的现在分词所表示的动作发生的时间有两种情况：
a. 表示正在进行的动作, (变为从句时要用进行时态), 如：
Tell the children playing there (who are playing there) not to make so much noise.
Did you see the man talking (who was talking) to the manager
b. 表示经常性的动作, 或现在 (或当时) 的状态, (变为从句时, 用一般时态), 如：
They lived in a room facing (= that faced) the south.
The house standing (= that stands) at the corner of the street was built in 1955.
④ 过去分词作定语时，过去分词所表示的动作可以在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，也可以是没有一定的时间性，如：
Is this the book recommended by our teacher
The meeting held last week is very important.
He is a man loved by all.
I hate to see letters written in pencil.
注①：如果所表示的动作现刻正在发生，或是与谓语所表示的动作同时发生，可以用现在分词的被动形式来表示，如：
The meeting being held is very important.
We must keep a secret of the things being discussed here.
注②：如果所表示的是一个未来的动作，可以用一个不定式的被动形式来表示，如：
The meeting to be held next week is very important.
Please tell me the subjects to be discussed at the next meeting.
⑤ 分词还可以作非限制性定语（相当于一个非限制性定语从句），这时，它和句子的其他部分用逗号隔开，试比较：
All my brothers living in Shanghai are scientists.
All my brothers, living in Shanghai, are scientists.
All the letters in the drawer written in pencil are from my sister.
All the letters in the drawer, written in pencil, are from my sister.
⑥ 本节值得注意的问题：现在分词短语作定语时，所表示的动作不能先于谓语所表示的动作，也不可以表示将来。另外，一般不用现在分词的完成式作定语，所以，下列句子都是错的：
Here is Mr. Li coming from Beijing. (应改为who has come from Beijing)
Those having finished their work can go home now. (应改为who have finished)
The man giving us a lecture last week left for Shenzhen this morning. (应改为who gave us)
⑦ 系动词的现在分词形式不可用作后置定语，此时要用从句来表示，如：
Those being busy don’t have to go. (应改为Those who are busy don’t have to go.)
His brother being a PLA man is 18 years old. (应改为who is)
⑧ 不及物动词的过去分词不可用作后置定语，若要表示这个意思要用从句，如：
The lion died in this zoo the other day was a mother lion. (应改为which/that died)
3．作状语：
① 现在分词作状语，表示陪衬性的动作或伴随情况，如：
The children ran out of the room, laughing and talking merrily.
They stood there for an hour watching the game.
She sat at the desk reading a newspaper.
注意：a. 分词表示的必须是主语的一个动作；b. 分词表示的动作和谓语表示的动作（或状态）是同时发生的；c. 分词表示的是比较次要的动作，对谓语表示的动作或状态加以说明；d. 大部分放在谓语之后；e. 分词有时可以与句子的其他部分用逗号隔开。
② 现在分词作状语，表示行为方式或手段（这类状语可以放在句首，也可以放在句末，有时还可以放在句中。其他参考上述a-c），如：
Following the guide, they started to climb.
Working this way, they greatly reduced the cost.
Travelling by jeep, we visited a number of cities.
③ 现在分词作状语，表示原因或理由，如：
Seeing nobody at home, she decided to leave them a note.
Not knowing her address, we couldn’t get in touch with her.
Being so poor in those days, we couldn’t afford to send the boy to hospital.
注：如果分词表示的动作在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，则要用完成形式，如：
Having worked among the peasants for many years, he knew them very well.
Not having received an answer, he decided to write another letter.
Having lived in Berlin many years, he knew the city well.
④ 现在分词作时间状语（相当于 when 引导的从句），如：
Turning around, she saw a police car driving up.
Hearing the news, they all jumped with joy.
Seeing those pictures, he couldn’t help thinking of those days in Yan’an.
注①：这里分词表示的是一个极短暂的动作，这动作一发生，谓语动词所表示的动作立即发生。这类分词一般放在句首。如果两个动作是完全同时发生的，多用 when 或 while + 分词这种结构，如：
Be careful when crossing the street.
Don’t mention this while talking to him.
注②：如果要强调谓语动词的动作发生时，分词的动作已经完成，这个分词要用完成形式，如：
Having arrived at a decision, they immediately set to work.
Having heard this, the woman astronaut expressed her satisfaction.
⑤ 现在分词作状语还可以表示结果、条件和让步，如：
Her husband died in 1942, leaving her with five children. (结果)
The bus was held up by snowstorm, thus causing the delay. (结果)
Working hard, you will succeed. (条件)
Turning to the left, you will find the path leading to the site. (条件)
Weighing almost one hundred jin, the stone was moved by him alone. (让步)
⑥ 过去分词短语作状语，可以修饰谓语，说明动作发生的背景或情况，如：
Built in 1192, the bridge is over 700 years old.
Led by the party, the people have improved their living conditions greatly.
Surrounded by a group of pupils, the old teacher walked into the room.
The trainer appeared, followed by six little dogs.
⑦ 过去分词短语表示原因（相当于一个原因状语从句），如：
The children, exhausted, fell asleep at once.
He soon fell asleep, exhausted by the journey. (= as he was exhausted…)
⑧ 过去分词短语有时可以表示时间（相当于时间状语从句）和条件（相当于条件状语从句），如：
United, we stand; divided, we fall. (=When / If we are united …)
Heated, water changes into steam. (=When / If water is heated …)
Seen from the hill, the park looks very beautiful.
注：过去分词短语作状语时，前面有时可以加上when, if, while, though, as if 等连词，这种结构可以看作是一种省略的状语从句（省略部分多为 “主语 + be 的多种形式”）。需要注意的是，省略的主语必须和主句的主语相同，如：
If / When heated, water changes into steam.
Even if invited, I won’t go.
We will not attack unless attacked.
The girl is very shy, and never speaks until spoken to.
4．作宾语补足语：
① 现在分词做宾语补足语，如：
I’m sorry to have kept you waiting for so long.
I could feel the cold wind blowing on my face.
He tried to start the engine running.
The words immediately set us all laughing.
注：现在分词做宾语补足语表示动作与谓语同时发生或正在进行，强调动作过程。
② 过去分词做宾语补足语，如：
He watched the TV set carried out of the room.
Last year they had the house rebuilt.
When you speak English, be sure to make yourself understood.
You’d better have your shoes mended.
注：过去分词做宾语补足语表示动作完成结果，并有被动意义。
③ 现在分词做宾语补足语时，与宾语有着逻辑上的主谓关系，宾语补足语一般为宾语所做的动作；过去分词做宾语补足语时，与宾语有着动宾关系，宾语是过去分词所表示的动作的承受者，如：
He saw an old man getting on the bus.
An old man was getting on the bus.
I once heard this song sung in Japanese.
This song was once sung in Japanese.
I don’t want the children taken out in such weather.
The children were taken out in such weather.
④ 以上句子可以变为被动结构，这时，宾语补足语就成了主语补足语，与谓语一起称为“复合谓语”，如：
We were kept waiting for quite a long time.
She was never heard singing that song again.
One of the glasses was found broken.
⑤ 有些动词既可以用不定式作宾语补足语，又可以用现在分词作宾语补足语，有些动词只能用现在分词作宾语补足语，这些动词是：catch, keep, mind, prevent, remember, stop, start, smell, excuse, spy, send 等，例如：
She caught her son smoking a cigarette.
We’d better keep the fire burning.
I don’t mind you joking. I like it.
The heavy rain prevented us coming here on time.
I don’t remember him ever saying anything like that.
We must try to stop them getting into trouble.
His words started me thinking seriously.
Can you smell something burning
The earthquake sent the china and glass crashing to the ground.
现在分词的完成形式和被动形式
① 现在分词的完成形式主要用在状语中，表示动作在谓语动作之前发生，如：
Having been there many times, he offered to be our guide.
The delegates, having fulfilled their mission, arrived back in Shanghai.
注：在独立结构中，也可以用现在分词的完成形式，如：
His comrades having all left for the front, he didn’t want to stay in the rear.
② 在表示一个被动的动作时，如果这个动作是现刻正在进行的，或是与谓语表示的动作同时发生的，就可以用现在分词的被动形式。这种形式可以作定语、状语或构成复合宾语，如：
That building being repaired is our library. （定语）
He asked who was the man being operated on. （定语）
You’ll find the topic being discussed everywhere. （宾语补足语）
As we entered the village, we saw new houses being built. （宾语补足语）
Being asked to give a performance, she couldn’t very well refuse.（状语）
Being protected by a thick wall, they felt they were quite safe. （状语）
△ 有时还有完成被动形式，如：
Having been given such a good chance, how could she let it slip away
在用分词短语作状语时, 它逻辑上的主语一般必须与句子的主语一致, 但有时它也可以有自己独立的逻辑上的主语, 这种结构称为:
独 立 结 构
独立结构可以表示伴随动作或情况, 表示时间、原因、条件等, 例如：
He rushed into the room, his face covered with sweat. (伴随情况)
The shower being over, we continued to march. (时间)
So many students being absent, we decided to put the meeting off. (原因)
Weather permitting, we’ll have an outing tomorrow. (条件)
All things considered, her paper is of greater value than yours.
The job done, we went home.
The composition written, he handed it to the teacher.(共19张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法专项训练
现在分词和过去分词
用法之异同
南莫中学高三英语备课组
现在分词和过去分词的用法异同历来是学习中的难点和高考测试的重点。众所周知，两种分词的区别很多，但它们之间的根本区别是：
过去分词在时态上强调动作已经完成，在语态上侧重于被动；
而现在分词在时态上强调动作正在进行，在语态上侧重于主动。
这种根本的区别具体体现在两种分词分别充当的各种句子成份中。细述如下：
一、分词作定语
共同点：分词作定语时，如果分词只是一个单词，那么，该分词就位于其所修饰的名词之前；如果是分词短语，那么，该短语就位于其所修饰的名词之后，它的作用相当于一个定语从句。
　　不同点：分词作定语时，被分词所修饰的名词就是该分词的逻辑主语。但现在分词与逻辑主语之间是主动关系，所表示的动作一般与句中谓语动词所表示的动作同时发生；而过去分词则表示被动关系，所示动作一般发生在谓语动词之前或同时发生。
1.There was a terrible noise ____ the sudden burst of light.
　A. followed B. following C. to be followed D. being followed
　简析：首先，根据语法分析可知，句子后半部分是一个作定语、修饰 noise 的分词短语；再根据句意“一阵闪电之后，接着就是一声巨响。”可知，巨响应是主动，紧接在闪电之后的。因此，该题应选B。
2.The Olympic Games, ____ in 776 B. C., didn’t include women until 1912.
　A. first playing B. to be first played
C. first played D. to be playing
　简析：首先，根据语法分析可知，待选部分是一个作定语、修饰 The Olympic Games 的后置分词短语；再根据 The Olympic Games 对于动词 play 来说只能是被动承受，且已完成 (in 776 B. C.)。因此，该题应选C。
3.What’s the language ____ in Germany
A. speaking B. spoken C. be spoken D. to speak
　简析：该题应选B。测试过去分词作后置定语表达被动，等于定语从句 which is spoken
4.Most of the people ____ to the party were famous scientists.
A. invited B. to invite C. being invited D. inviting
简析：该题应选A。测试过去分词作后置定语表达被动，等于定语从句 who were invited
5.Most of the artists ____ to the party were from South Africa.
A. invited B. to invite C. being invited D. had been invited
简析：该题应选A。测试过去分词作后置定语表达被动，等于定语从句who were invited
6.The computer centre, ____ last year, is very popular among the students in this school.
A. open B. opening C. having opened D. opened
简析：该题应选D。测试过去分词短语作定语放在所修饰的名词后，可以用非限制性定语从句“which was opened last year”代替
7.The first textbooks ____ for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 16th century.
A. having written B. to be written C. being written D. written
简析：该题应选D。测试过去分词作后置定语表达被动，等于定语从句which were written
二、分词作表语
共同点：分词作表语时，它起着形容词的作用。
　　不同点：分词作表语时，句子的主语就是该分词的逻辑主语。但现在分词作表语时，与其逻辑主语之间是主动关系，所表示的动作的一般与句中谓语动词所表示的动作同时发生；而过去分词则表示被动关系，所示动作一般发生在谓语动词之前或同时发生。　
1.This news sounds ____.
A. encouraging B. encouraged C. encourage D. to encourage
简析：首先，根据语法分析可知，待选部分在句中应作表语，因为 sounds 在此句中用作连系动词；再根据 The news 对于动词 encourage 来说应是主动关系，即这个消息本身就鼓舞人心。因此，该题应选A。
2. -How did Bob do in the exams this time
　-Well, his father seems ____ with his results.
A. pleasing B. please C. pleased D. to please
简析：首先, 根据语法分析可知, 待选部分在句中应作表语。因为 seems 在此句中用作连系动词; 再根据 his father 对于动词 please 来说应是被动关系, 即这个结果使他的父亲高兴; 换言之, 他的父亲因为受到这个结果的刺激而感到高兴。因此, 该题应选C。
3. -How did the audience receive the new play
　-They got very ____.
A . excite B . excited C . excitedly D . exciting
简析：该题应选B。测试他们被那出新戏所打动。
三、分词作宾语补足语
共同点：分词在复合宾语中可作宾语补足语，对句子的宾语起补充或说明作用。
　　不同点：分词作宾语补足语时，句子的宾语就是该分词的逻辑主语。但现在分词与其逻辑主语之间是主动关系，所表示的动作一般与句中谓语动词所表示的动作同时发生；而过去分词则表示被动关系，所示动作一般发生在谓语动词之前或同时发生。
1.The next morning she found the man ____ in bed, dead.
A. lying B. lie C. lay D. laying
简析: 首先, 根据语法分析可知, 待选部分在句中应作宾补, 补充说明宾语 the man; 再根据宾语 the man 对于动词 lie 来说应是主动关系, 而且, lie 这个动作与谓语动词 found 同时进行。因此, 该题应选A。
2. -Good morning. Can I help you
-I’d like to have the package ____, madam.
A. be weighed B. to be weighed C. to weigh D. weighed
简析: 首先, 根据语法分析可知, 待选部分在句中应作宾补, 补充说明宾语 the package; 再根据 the package 对于动词 weigh 来说, 只能是被动关系。因此，该题应选D。
3. I can hardly imagine Peter ____ across the Atlantic Ocean in five days.
A. sail B. sailing C. to sail D. to have sailed
简析: 该题应选B。测试动词 imagine 后要求跟动名词, Peter 是动名词的逻辑主语。
4.If you wave your book in front of your face, you can feel the air ____ against your face.
A. moved B. moving C. moves D. to move
简析: 该题应选B。测试使役动词后用现在分词作宾补表示宾语正发出的动作。
四、分词作状语
共同点：分词作状语时，一般在句子中作时间、原因、方式或伴随等状语。
　　不同点：分词作状语时，句子的主语就是该分词的逻辑主语。但现在分词作状语时，与其逻辑主语之间是主动关系，所表示的动作一般与句中谓语动词所表示的动作同时发生；而过去分词则表示被动关系，所示动作一般发生谓语动词之前或同时发生。
1.European football is played in 80 countries, ____ it the most popular sport in the world.
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
简析：首先，根据语法分析可知，待选部分在整个句中应作状语；再根据 European football 对于 make 来说应是主动关系，即欧洲足球使之本身成为一项最受世人欢迎的运动。因此，该题应选A。
2.____ a reply, he decided to write again.
A. Not receiving B. Receiving not
C. Not having received D. Having not received
简析：该题应选C。 测试非谓语动词的否定式是在其前直接加 not 。若动作发生在主句动作之前时用非谓语的完成式。
3.The visiting Minister expressed his satisfaction with the talks, ____ that he had enjoyed his stay here.
A. having added B. to add C. adding D. added
简析：该题应选C。测试现在分词可以作补充说明的状语。　
4. “Can’t you read ” Mary said ____ to the notice.
A. angrily pointing B. and point angrily
C. angrily pointed D. and angrily pointing
简析：该题应选A。测试现在分词作伴随状语，通过副词 angrily 进行干扰。若B 答案为 and pointed angrily 时也对。
　　另外，分词作状语时，如果其逻辑主语与整个句子的主语不一致时，需要独立主格结构或 with 复合结构来替代。(此时，也可把该分词看成介词的宾语补足语。)
例: The murderer was brought in, with his hands ____ behind his back.
A. being tied B. having tied C. to be tied D. tied
简析：很显然，待选部分的逻辑主语是 his hands，而不是句子的主语 The murderer , 而 his hands 对于动词 tie 来说，只能是被动承受。因此，该题应选D。
1.I cannot understand _____ such a well-paid job.
A. him to give up B. him to have given up
C. his giving up D. his being given up
2.Jane’s summer vacation in England led to _____ an Englishman.
A. her marry B. her to marry
C. her being married D. her marrying
3.She was sad because of _____ any chance left.
A. there being not B. there not being
C. not there being D. there was not
4.If you think a letter is too slow, why not _____ a telegram
A. try to have sent B. trying to send
C. to try to send D. try sending
5.There is no chance _____ him today.
A. in seeing B. to seeing
C. of seeing D. about seeing
6.I know you like _____ . Would you like _____ with me now
A. to swim, to swim B. swimming, swimming
C. swimming, to swim D. to swim, swimming
7.Before _____, the machine must be checked.
A. being used B. using it
C. being used to D. using
8.To give up _____ means _____ .
A. smoking, stopping smoking B. smoking, to stop smoking
C. to smoke, to stop to smoke D. to smoke, stopping to smoke
9. — What do you think of the book
— Oh, excellent. It’s worth _____ a second time.
A. to read B. reading
C. to be read D. being read
10. “What has made you so upset ” “________ my new bike.”
A. Lost B. Because of losing
C. Since I lost D. Losing
11. I still remember _____ to Beijing when I was six.
A. to take B. taking C. having taking D. having been taken
12. Some foreigner used to _____ on the left in their own countries, but now they have got used to _____ on the right in our country.
A. driving, drive B. drive, drive
C. drive, driving D. driving, driving
13. He remained ____ there, for he grew ____ in many things there.
A. staying, interesting B. staying, interested
C. to stay, interest D. stayed, interested
14. It is important for parents and young people to learn how to get through to each other and develop skill in understanding and _____.
A. being understood B. to be understood
C. understand D. understood
15. _____ more trees is good for health and it is also important to stop waste from factories _____ our surroundings.
A. To plant, pollute B. Planting, to pollute
C. Plant, polluting D. Planting, polluting
16. I would appreciate _____ back this afternoon.
A. you to call B. you call
C. your calling D. you’re calling
17. How about the two of us _____ a walk down the garden
A. to take B. take C. taking D. to be taking
18. “The light in the office is still on.” “Oh, I forgot _____ .”
A. turning it off B. turn it off
C. to turn it off D. having turned it off
19. “I must apologize for _____ ahead of time.” “That’s all right.”
A. letting you not know B. not letting you know
C. letting you know not D. letting not you know
20. It happened ______ when I left the station, so I had to wait until the rain stopped.
A. to be raining　　　　 B. to have rained　　　　
C. to rain　　 D. raining
21. ____ more attention, the trees could have grown better.
A . Given B . To give C . Giving D . Having given
22. Climbing mountains was ____, so we all felt ____.
A. tiring ; tired B. tired ; tiring C. tiring ; tiring D. tired ; tired
23. The ____ morning, the father came into the lonely house , ____ by his naughty boy .
A. following ; following B. followed ; followed
C. following ; followed D. followed ; following
24. ____ these pictures, I couldn’t help thinking of those days when I was in Beijing and ____ from the top of a thirty-storeyed building, Beijing looks more magnificent.
A. Seeing ; seen B. Seen ; seeing C. Seeing ; seeing D. Seen ; seen
25. Mrs White was glad to see the nurse ____ after her son and her daughter and was also pleased to see children well ____ care of in the nursery.
A. looked ; taken B. looking ; taken
C. looked ; took D. looking ; taking
26. I was fortunate to pick up a wallet ____ on the ground on the way home, but unfortunately for me, I found my colour TV set ____ when I got home.
A. lying; stolen B. laying; stealing C. lay; stolen D. lying; stealing
27. ____ better attention , the vegetables could have grown better with the sun shining brightly in the sky and ____ them light.
A. Giving; given B. Given; given C. Giving; giving D. Given; giving
28. ____ his head high , the manager walked into the room to attend the meeting ____ then .
A. Holding ; being held B. Held ; holding
C. Having held ; held D. Held ; to be held
29. ____ but he still could not understand it.
A. Told many times B. Having been told many times
C. He has been told many times
D. Though he had been told many times
30. On hearing the ____ news, I was too ____ to sleep.
A. exciting ; excited B. excited ; exciting
C. exciting ; exciting D. excited ; excited(共19张PPT)
冠词的用法 (Articles)
I. 分类
不定冠词a/an，
定冠词 the，
零冠词（不用冠词）
a / an的用法
1. 表示“某种类别当中的一个”，“该类中的一例”　 A cat is an animal.猫是一种动物。
He’s a Frenchman.他是个法国人。
2. 第一次提到某物
I looked up and saw a plane. 我抬头看见了一架飞机.
3. 用在称呼前，含有“我不认识．．．的感觉”
A Mr. Smith is waiting to see you.一位史密斯先生正等着要见您。
4. 可以表示量度单位，＂每．．．＂
40 km an/per hour 每小时40公里
twice a/per day 每天两次
5. 与可数名词连用位于what, such之后，表示感叹，或强调程度
What a surprise! 真是让人吃惊。
My boss is such a fool! 我的老板这么蠢。
6. 用在形容词最高级前，相当于very。
This is a most useful dictionary.这是一本非常有用的字典。
a / an的用法
7. 用在序数词前面表示“再一次，又一次”。
Ten years after the death of her husband, she got married for a second time.在她丈夫去世十年后，她再次结婚了。
8. 用在many, quite, rather, such, twice, what 等词后面，构成短语。
It’s quite a problem. 这是一个相当难的问题。
I’ve never seen such an exciting football match before. 我以前从来没见过这么精彩的比赛。
a / an的用法
9. 注意区分a/ an：一般来说，an用在元音前，a用在非元音前。但注意下面的特殊例子。
a Europe (European, one-way street, union, university, useful tool, usual way…)
an honest man (hour, honor, a, e, h, i, l, m, n, o, r, s, x…)
an 80-metre-high-tower
a / an的用法
the的用法
1. 基本用法：有明确的所指；可以与任何名词连用
Shut the door. 关门。
Where will the meeting be held 在哪儿开会？
2. The + adj.表示一类人或事物
the British英国人, the rich富人, the young年轻人,
3. 表示一天的各段时间
in the morning/ afternoon/ evening
4. 表示独一无二的自然现象，方位，左右
the earth地球, the sun太阳, the east东, the west西, the right右, the left左
5. 用在乐器之前
My sister is learning the flute/ piano.我妹妹在学笛子/ 钢琴。
6. 用在逢十的复数数词之前，指世纪中几十年代
in the 1870’s 十九世纪七十年代 ,
7. 用在姓氏的复数形式前，表示这一家人。
the Smiths史密斯一家人
the的用法
8. 用在某些习惯表达法中的介词短语中，指有关者的身体或衣着的一部分
lead sb. by the hand拉着某人的手,
hit sb. in the face打在某人的脸上,
grasp sb. by the sleeve抓住某人的袖子
9. 用在形容词最高级和序数词前面。
The first time I saw him was in 1990.我第一次见他是在1990年。
Could you tell me the shortest way to the station 你能告诉我去火车站最近的路吗？
the的用法
10. 和表示数量的名词连用，表示“以．．．为单位”
Eggs are sold by the dozen. 鸡蛋按打来卖。
He is paid by the hour / the day/ week/ month.他按小时/天/周/月来付酬。
11. 与名词连用时，要注意与不定冠词的区别。
a / the most interesting…非常有趣的… / 最有趣的…
a / the number of 许多 / …的数量
for a/ the moment 片刻，一会儿/ 暂时，目前
give sb. a / the push 推某人一下 / 解雇某人
the的用法
零冠词
1. 表示泛指或一般概念
Snow is white. 雪是白的。
比较：The snow in the yard is very thick.院子里的雪很厚。
2. 用在泛指的一日三餐前
Have you had breakfast/ lunch/ dinner 你吃早饭/午饭/晚饭了吗？
比较：The breakfast was well cooked. 这顿早饭做得好。
3. 用在球类，棋类之前
Let’s go and play football.我们去踢足球吧。
How about having a game of chess, John 约翰，咱们下盘棋好吗？
4. 用在称呼语及表示家庭成员（常大写）的名词之前
Tom asked, “Where’s Father/ Mother/ Aunt ” 汤姆问，“爸爸/妈妈/姑姑在哪儿？”
零冠词
5. 在表语，宾语补足语，同位语中，表示独一无二的职位或头衔
Who’s captain of your team 谁是你们队长？
He was elected monitor of our class.他被选为班长
George Bush, president of the United States… 美国总统布什…
6. 用在表示学科的名词之前。
English, Chinese, mathematics…
零冠词
7. 在独立结构中
The hunter entered the forest, gun in hand.猎人手拿着枪，走进了森林。
Child as he is, he knows a lot about the history of China.他虽然是个孩子，却对中国历史了解很多。
8. 用在某些习惯用语中
go to school (college, hospital, class, church, bed…)
by bike, (bus, train, car, boat, ship, plane, air…)
at sunrise, (sunset, noon, night, midnight)
零冠词
检测
1. Alice is fond of playing ______ piano while Henry is interested in listening to ______ music.
A. /, the B. /, / C. the, / D. the, the
2. Alexander Grander Bell invented ______ telephone in 1876.
A. / B. a C. the D. one
3. ---Where’s Jack
--- I think he’s still in ______ bed, but he might just be in ______ bathroom.
A. /, / B. the, the C. the, / D. /, the
4. Many people are still in ______ habit of writing silly things in ______ public places.
A. the, the B. /, the C. the, / D. /, /
5. She is ______ newcomer to ______ chemistry, but she has already made some important discoveries.
A. the, the B. the, / C. a, / D. a, the
6. Wouldn’t it be ______ wonderful world if all nations lived in ______ peace with one another
A. a, / B. the, / C. a, the D. the, the
检测
7.Many people agree that ______ knowledge of English is a must in ______ international trade today.
A. a, / B. the, an C. the, the D. /, the
8. --- Have you seen ______pen I left it here this morning.
--- Is it ______ black one I think I saw it somewhere.
A. a, the B. the, the C. a, a D. the, a
9. Paper money was in ______ use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in ______ thirteenth century.
A. the, / B. the, the C. /, the D. /, /
检测
10. Most animals have little connection with ______ animals of ______ different kind unless they kill them for food.
A. the, a B. /, a C. the, the D. /, the
11. ______coffee that we drank just now was given to us by ______ Jacksons.
A. /, / B. The, / C. /, the D. The, the
12. I remember he lives in ______ south, so we shouldn’t be walking ______ south.
A. /, / B. /, the C. the, / D. the, the
检测
13. They spent ______ getting the problem settled.
A. so a long time B. quite a long time
C. quite long a time D. such long a time
14. ______People’s Republic of China has opened its door to ______ rest of ______ world.
A. The, /, the B. /, the, the
C. The, the, the D. /, /, the
15. Your shoes and mine are ______.
A. of size B. in a size C. same big D. of a size
检测形容词和副词强化训练
1. To plant the tree, we must dig _____.
A. a three feet deep hole B. three-foot-deep a hole
C. a hole three feet deep D. a three-feet-deep hole
2. I think he is one of the best men you've ____ found.
A, never B. already C. ever D. once
3. ____ the boy’s grown! He is almost ___ his father.
A. What, as tall as B. What, taller than C. How, as tall as D. How, taller than
4. I haven’t got ____ nails to mend the cupboard. I need another three of them.
A. enough big B. big enough C. much bigger D. many enough
5. Henry knows little of physics _________ of chemistry.
A. as well as B. no less than C. and still more D. and still less
6. — The dish is delicious!
　— Well, at least it's ___ the one I cooked yesterday.
A. as bad as B. no worse than C. as well as D. no better than
7. — Do you think the weather is good enough for a picnic
　— Yes. You couldn't hope for ____ at this time of the year.
A. a nice day B. the nice day C. a nicer day D. the nicest day
8. It makes Thomas no better, and it makes you ____
A. best B. good C. well D. worse
9. With the help of the new equipment, our factories produced ___ VCD players in 2000 as the year before.
A. as many as twice B. twice more than C. as twice many D. twice as many
10. I had invited 50 guests to the party, but actually twice ____ came.
A. more than B. as many C. as much D. less than
11. — Why didn't you go to the cinema last night
　— It was something ____ interesting.
A. far less B. more or less C. much more D. any further
12. The population of many Alaskan cities has _____ doubled in the past five years.
A. larger than B. more than C. as greatly as D. as much as
13. — This is a good place for a picnic.
　— Yes, it couldn't be ____ .
A. better B. best C. worst D. worse
14. — How do you like your teacher of English
　 — Well, no one teaches _____ here.
A. well B. poorly C. best D. better
15. In the poor parts of America's big cities there is a lot of crime, _____ .
A. and much of it is serious B. much of it is serious
C. and many more is serious D. more of it is serious
16. — Do you like cats
— Of course. They are ____ a kind of pet. They can do much good for their masters.
A. better than B. more than C. no more than D. no better than
17. The newly-built theatre is ____ the old one.
A. as twice big as B. twice more bigger than
C. twice the size of D. twice so big as
18. I'm afraid that your conclusion is ____ from correct.
A. far B. free C. different D. short
19. Thank you very much. It's ____ of you.
A. kindest B. a most kind C. the most kind D. most kind
20. Whoever is never _____ with the progress he has made will be a success.
A. content B. proud C. praised D. enough
21. My teacher has three brothers, all _____ than he. George, _____, is an officer.
A. elder, the eldest B. old, the oldest C. elder, the old one D. older, the eldest
22. You shouldn't be too ___ about things you are not supposed to know.
A. strange B. amusing C. curious D. conscious
23. The new research team was led by the ____ engineer.
A. main B. major C. chief D. primary
24. These T-shirts are usually $ 35 each but today they have a ___ price of $19 in the shopping centre.
A. regular B. special C. cheap D. particular
25. It is a good way for us to memorize new words by seeing them_____.
A. properly B. repeatedly C. clearly D. usually
26. — Why did she spend so much time searching shop after shop for a blouse
　 — Oh, she was very ____ about her clothes,
A. special B. particular C. especial D. unusual
27. Football fans are _____ young people between the ages of fifteen and twenty.
A. most B. almost C. mostly D. at most
28. It’s very _____ to let the old have seats on the bus.
A. thoughtful B. useful C. careful D. funny
29. — Mr. Zhang, can I talk to you ____ about my composition
　 — Sure. How about Thursday afternoon
A. somewhere B. somehow C. sometime D. sometimes
30. The early train is ____ to leave at five in the morning.
A. possible B. due C. probable D. sure
31. He enjoys a cup of coffee sometimes, but ____ he drinks tea.
A. most B. almost C. nearly D. mostly
32. It’s _____ necessary for people to know the importance of protecting all the wildlife.
A. very B. rather C. quite D. too
33. These plastic flowers look so ___ that many people think they are real.
A. natural B. similar C. splendid D. fresh
34. — How can I get to the island
　 — You can' t get there ___ by swimming.
A. more than B. other than C. rather than D. less than
35. Of the two pictures, the left one looks ______ at a distance.
A. the better B. the best C. a little good D. better
36. If you wish to study hard, you must see films _____.
A. more often B. oftener C. less often D. fewer often
37. — Let's take a walk before lunch. — Oh, I think it's _____ for walking.
A. much too hot B. too much hot C. very much hot D. very much heat
38. I bought a _____ table the day before yesterday.
A. small round wooden B. small wooden round
C. round wooden small D. round small wooden
39. It was a wonder that _____ little food saved _____ many lives during the war.
A. so, such B. such, so C. so, so D. such, such
40. Nurses are required to look after _____.
A. sick and wound B. sick and wounded
C. the sick and wound D. the sick and wounded
1-10: CCCAD BCDDB 11-20: ABADA BCADA
21-30: DCCBB BCACB 31-40: DCABA CAACD(共10张PPT)
48
音标
20
元音
12
单元音
8
双元音
4 前元音
3 中元音
5 后元音
28
辅音
10对+8
Aa
Ee
I i
Oo
Uu
Hh Jj Kk
Bb Cc Dd Gg Pp Tt Vv
Yy
Qq Ww
/e/ Ff Ll Mm Nn Ss Xx Zz
Don’t forget Rr
Aa Ee Ii Oo Hh
Ff Ll Mm Nn Ss Xx Rr
an
There is ________“E” in the word English.
( n, l, i, s, h, )
There is ________“g” in the word English.
an
a
Aa
Ee
I i
Oo
Uu
开音节 闭音节
/ei/ cake / / bag
/i:/ these /e/ egg
/ai/ bike /i/ it
/ u/ those / / box/ mother / /
/ju:/ use /u/ put/ us / /
see come some apple give
Aa
/ e / any many anything
/ : / class glass ask
/ / want what watch wash
Uu
/ u:/ blue ruler
ai /ei/ rain wait
ay /ei/ may play
al / : / all ball
/ : l/ always
/ :/ half calm
ar / :/ car park
/ : / war warm
au / : / because
aw / : / saw
air / / hair chair
are / / care hare
元音字母Aa的字母组合的拼读规则
元音字母Ee的字母组合的拼读规则
ee / i: / see meet
ea / i: / tea meat
/ e / bread weather
er / : / term serve
/ / teacher mother
ear / : / learn heard
元音字母Ii的字母组合的拼读规则
ie / i: / field believe
/ ai / lie die
ir / : / bird girl
igh / ai / high right
元音字母Uu的字母组合的拼读规则
ur / : / nurse Thursday
元音字母Oo的字母组合的拼读规则
oa / u / boat coat
ou / au / house round
/ : / thought bought
ow / au / how town
/ u / yellow slow
or / : / order north
/ : / work world
oi / i / noise point
oy / i / boy enjoy
几种辅音字母及字母组合的拼读规则
/k/ c, k, ck, ch Christmas
/s/ c, s nice sick
/ / sh she fish
/ / ng, nk English thank
/w/ w, wh wide what
/h/ h, wh how who
/f/ f, ph five photo
/t / ch, tch teacher catch(共28张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法专项训练
名词性从句典型错误例析
南莫中学高三英语备课组
找出下列句子中的错误，并总结出规律：
1. Can you tell me how many students are there
in your class
2. I don't know where has he gone.
3. The owner of the shop came to see what
the matter was.
　　
Can you tell me how many students there are
in your class
I don't know where he has gone.
The owner of the shop came to see what was
the matter.
规律一：名词从句中须使用陈述语序！
找出下列句子中的错误，并总结出规律：
4. We suggested that we would go to the cinema.
　
5. My idea is that we must do our homework first.
6. His proposal that we went there on foot is
acceptable.
　　
We suggested that we (should) go to the cinema.
My idea is that we (should) do our homework first.
His proposal that we (should) go there on foot…...
规律二：注意虚拟语气的使用！
问题：此类虚拟语气有哪些关键词？
找出下列句子中的错误，并总结出规律：
7. If we will have a meeting hasn't been decided yet.
8. It depends on if the weather is suitable for us to do it.
9. The question is if he himself will be present at the
meeting.
10. He asked me if I could go with him or not.
Whether we will have a meeting hasn’t been decided yet.
It depends on whether the weather is …...
The question is whether he himself will be present …...
He asked me whether I could go with him or not.
规律三：4种情况只能用whether ：
（1）位于句子开头； （2）前面有介词；
（3）引导表语从句； （4）与or not连用。
找出下列句子中的错误，并总结出规律：
I think that worthwhile that we spent so much money on these books.
2. That is hard to decide when and where we will held our sports meeting.
3. Everybody considers it impossible which he wants to finish the job in such a short time.
4. It doesn’t matter that you will come or not.
it
it
that
whether
规律四：主语从句和宾语从句在适当的情况
下可以借助 “it” 而后置。
问题：想想看是什么“适当的情况”？
名词从句与定语从句
的主要区别
成分上的区别：
名词从句和定语从句分别在句中充当什么
样的成分？
1. How the prisoner escaped remains a mystery.
2. I wonder whether/if he is fit for the job.
3. The problem is who will be equal to the task.
4. He had no idea whether we could overcome the
present difficulties or not.
主语
宾语
表语
同位语
5. I visited the country which/that had been bombed by
the US-led NATO (美国为首的北约) a month before．
6. I shall never forget the years when I lived in the
countryside with the farmers, which has a great
effect on my life.
7. In the office I never seem to have time until after
5:30 pm., by which time many people have gone home.
8. I had never seen such a good film as I watched last
night.
结论一：
名词从句充当句子的主要成分；
定于从句充当句子的修饰成分。
2. 引导词含义上的区别：
引导词是否指向句中的某个成分？
1. That he came back made us very happy.
2. I’m sorry (that) I’ve made a mistake.
3. The fact is that his bark is worse than his bite.
4. Word came that he would come to see us all.
5. He made another wonderful discovery, which
I think is of great importance to science.
6. Kennedy and Johnson, both of whom were
murdered in their terms, once co-worked as
president and vice-president．
7. The Oscar is one of the film prizes that have
not been offered to any Chinese actor or actress
by far．
8. The Oscar is the only one of the film prizes
that has not been offered to any Chinese actor
or actress by far．
9. The days are gone forever when we used
foreign oil.
10. As we all know, China is a developing country.
11. This is the village where my father once lived
for several years.
12. 1980, when Chinese government began its
reform, is an important year for China.
结论二：
定语从句的引导词在语义上
具有指代先行词的作用。
名词从句的引导词不具备此功能。
3. 关于that:
that 在名词从句和定语从句中各起什么作用？
1. He pretended (that) he didn’t see me.
That she lost her necklace on the way home
made her so worried.
It is necessary that we should learn a second
language.
4. It is said that he works hard at English.
问题：that 作何成分？
The school that my sister studies at is far from
here.
The first request that he made was to ask for
freedom.
7. It was said that that was all that he said.
8. Is this the house that you have bought yourself
(which)
(which)
问题：that 作何成分？
结论三：
名词从句中的 that 只起引导词的作用，
无任何意义。
定语从句中的that 在从句中充当主语或宾语，
有时可以与 which 互换。
4. 引导词的不同：
不会出现在名词从句中的关系词：
不会出现在定语从句中的关系词：
as, 且 when, where 等不能与 in/on/at which 互换。
whether, if, what, how
5、名词从句与定语从句的一些对应关系：
1. He has done what he can to help me.
--He has done ____ ____ he can to help me.
What I want to say has nothing to do with it.
--____ ____ I want to say has nothing to do
with it.
all that
All that
3. Whoever breaks the law is to be punished.
______ ______ breaks the law is to be punished.
4. He will give the dictionary to whoever needs if most.
He will give the dictionary to ______ ____ needs it most.
5. We’ll remember whomever we turned to for help.
We’ll remember ______ ________ we turned to for help.
6. They will do whatever he wants them to do.
They will do ______ ______he wants them to do.
7. I’ll read whichever book you give me.
I’ll read ____ of the books _____ you give me.
Anyone who
anyone who
Anyone (whom)
anything that
any
that
6、其余问题：
1. 误：I don't know if he comes back this month.
2. 误：I have no idea what had happened when
I was away.
正：I don't know if he will come back this month.
正：I have no idea what happened when I was
away.
3.误：The reason is because he is ill.
4.误：Who leaves last turns off the light.
正：The reason is that he is ill.
正：Whoever leaves last turns off the light.
名词性从句试题集锦
1.I ask her _______ come with me.
A. if she will B. if will she C. whether will she D. will she
2._______ he said is true.
A. What B. That C. Which D. Whether
3.Can you tell me ________
A. who is that gentleman B. that gentleman is who
C. who that gentleman is D. whom is that gentleman
4.He didn't know which room _______.
A. they lived B. they lived in C. did they live D. did they live in
5.To get the job started, _______ I need is some money.
A. only what B. all what C. all that D. only that
6.I have no idea _______ far the railway station is from here.
A. what B. how C. it's D. that
7.Can you tell me _______ the railway station
A. how I can get to B. what can I get to
C. where I can got to D. where can I get to
8.Do you know _______
A. what is his name B. how is his name
C. what his name is D. how his name is
9._______ you have done might do harm to other people.
A. That B. What C. Which D. This
10.They have no idea at all ________.
A. where he has gone B. where did he go
C. which place has he gone D. where has he gone
11.They want to know _________ do to help us.
A. what can they B. what they can
C. how they can D. how can they
12.These photographs will show you _______.
A. what our village looks like B. what does our village look like
C. how does our village look like D. how our village looks like
13.Can you make sure ________ the gold ring
A. where Alice had put B. where had Alice put
C. where Alice has put D. where has Alice put
14.No one can be sure ________ in a million years.
A. what man will look like B. what will man look like
C. man will look like D. what look man like
15.________ the 2008 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing is not known yet.
A. Whenever B. If C. Whether D. That
16.Go and get your coat. It's ________ you left it.
A. there B. where C. there where D. where there
17.It worried her a bit _______ her hair was turning gray.
A. while B. that C. if D. for
18._______ he said at the meeting astonished everybody present.
A. What B. That C. The fact D. The matter
19. — Do you remember ________ he came
— Yes, I do. He came by car.
A. how B. when C. that D. if
20._________ we can't get seems better than _________ we have.
A. What ; what B. What ; that C. That ; that D. That ; what
21.________ we'll go camping tomorrow depends on the weather.
A. If B. Whether C. That D. Where
22.It is generally considered unwise to give a child ________ he or she wants.
A. however B. whatever C. whichever D. whenever
23. — I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week.
— Is that _________ you had a few days off
A. why B. when C. what D. where
24.These wild flowers are so special that I would do ________ I can to save them.
A. whatever B. that C. which D. whichever
25.________ you don't like him is none of my business.
A. What B. Who C. That D. Whether
26.You can't imagine ________ when they received these nice Christmas presents.
A. how they were excited B. how excited they were
C. how excited were they D. they were how excited
27.________ caused the accident is still a complete mystery.
A. What B. That C. How D. Where
28.I had neither a raincoat nor an umbrella. _________ I got wet through.
A. It's the reason B. That's why
C. There's why D. It's how
29.It was a matter of ________ would take the position.
A. who B. whoever C. whom D. whomever
30.________ has helped to save the drowning girl is worth praising.
A. Who B. The one C. Anyone D. Whoever
31.It was _______ he said _______ disappointed me.
A. what ; that B. that ; that
C. what ; what D. that ; what
32.Eat ________ cake you like and leave the others for ________ comes in late.
A. any ; who B. every ; whoever
C. whichever ; whoever D. either ; whoever
Good-bye!(共10张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
倒装结构
南莫中学高三英语备课组
倒装语序分为“全部倒装”和“部分倒装”。在全部倒装的句子中，整个谓语都放在主语的前面；在部分倒装的句子中，只是谓语中的一部分（如助动词、情态动词或系动词be等）放在主语前面，其余部分仍放在主语后面。下面将常见的倒装情况分述如下：
一、由there, here 或now 等引起，谓语为come（或go）的句子，例如：
There comes the bus!
There goes the bell!
Here comes Mary!
Now comes your turn.
注：如果主语为人称代词，仍用自然语序，例如：
There he comes!
Here she comes!
二、由then 引起，谓语为come（或 follow）的句子，例如：
Then came a new difficulty.
Then followed eight years of the Anti-Japanese War.
Then came wind, hail and frost.
三、由here（或there）引导，谓语为be的句子，如：
Here is China’s largest tropical forest.
Here are some picture-books.
注：如果主语为人称代词，仍用自然语序，如：
Here you are. / Here we are. / Here it is. / There he is.
四、由so引起的，表示前面所说的情况也适用于另一个人（或物）的句子，如：
“We must start for the work-site now.” “So must we.”
Society has changed and so have the people in it.
He plays the violin quite well. So does my sister.
He has been to Beijing, so have I.
注：如果一个句子只是重复前面一句话的意思，尽管so用开头，语序也不要倒装，如：
-- It was cold yesterday. – So it was!
-- Tomorrow will be Monday. – So it will.
五、由neither或nor引起的，表示前面所说的情况也适用于另一个人（或物）的句子，如：
-- I won’t do such a thing. –Neither / Nor will I.
If you won’t go, neither shall I.
-- I haven’t done my homework. –Neither / Nor have I.
I didn’t read the notice on the bulletin board, nor did he.
六、在if引导的非真实条件句中，如有助动词had, should或were时，可以省略if，进行倒装，如：
Had I come five minutes earlier, I would have met the famous scientist. (If I had come five minutes …)
Had I been informed earlier, I could have done something.
Should anyone call, tell him to wait for me here.
Were I ten years younger, I would be able to climb to the top of the hill.
Should you change your mind, let us know.
(If I were you …不倒装)
七、在描写情景时，有时为了生动，可以把out, in, up, down, away等副词放在主语前，同时主谓倒装，如：
Up went the arrow into the air.
Up flew the red balloon.
Following the roar, out rushed a tiger from among the bushes.
注：如果主语是一个人称代词，谓语仍放在后面，如：
Away they went. / Down it flew. / Up it went.
八、当as引导让步状语从句时，可以把表语提到前面来，采用“形容词（或副词、名词）+ as +主语+谓语”这种形式，如：
Old as my father is, he keeps up with his English study.
Child as he is, he knows something of electricity.
Tired as he was, he continued to work.
Young as she was, she was already director of a factory.
九、当always, often, well, many a time等词放在句首时，后面常用倒装语序，如：
Always did the soldier go to help the villagers.
Often did we warn them not to do so.
Well do I remember the day I saw a wild tiger.
Many a time did he go swimming in the river.
注：上述所说的词不放在句首，不用倒装语序。
十、only所修饰的副词、介词短语或状语从句放在句首时，其后面的主语部分要进行倒装，如：
Only in this way can you hope to improve the situation there.
Only then did I realize that I was wrong.
Only once did his father discuss his future with him.
Only yesterday did I realize what was going on.
Only after he came back was I able to see him.
注：only修饰主语，仍用自然语序，如：
Only socialism can save China.
十一、含有否定意义的副词、连词或短语构成的状语放在句首时，常用倒装语序。
这些词和词组有：not, never, hardly, seldom, little, rarely, scarcely, not until, not only…but also…, neither…nor…, no sooner…than…, hardly…when …, scarcely…when等，例如：
Never shall I forget the day when I joined the League.
Not until I began to work did I realize how much time I had wasted.
Not only did he read the book, but also remembered what he had read.
No sooner had he arrived there than he fell ill.
Hardly / Scarcely had she fallen asleep when a knock at the door awakened her.
注：上面所说的词和词组如果不在句首，句子不必用倒装语序。另外，not only…but also连接两个主语时，不用倒装，如：
Not only the students, but also the teacher wishes for a holiday.
十二、当so（或such）…that…结构中的so或such用于句首时，要采取倒装语序，如：
So loudly did he speak that even people in the next room could hear him.
So loudly did he speak that he was heard upstairs.
So small was the mark that I could hardly see it.
So angry was he that he couldn’t speak.
So fast does light travel that it is difficult for us to imagine its speed.
Such was the force of the explosion that all the windows were broken.
Such was his strength that he could bend iron bars.
注：such和be连用作表语时，也常用倒装语序，如：
Such was the result.
Such were her words.
Such was the story he told.
十三、在下列结构中也常用倒装语序：
On a hill in front of them stood a great castle.
On the bed lay a sick old man.
Under the tree was sitting one of the biggest men I have ever seen.
Seated on the ground are a group of young men playing cards.
Lying on the floor was a boy aged about seventeen.
Good-bye!冠词和数词强化训练题
1. You are ____ shame to your family while he is ___ honor to his family.
A. an , an B. a , an C. an , a D. a , a
2. _____ Europe and __ America are separated by _______ Atlantic Ocean.
A. / , / , the B. the , the , the C. / , / , / D. the , the , /
3.____ terrible life people in the small island lived at the time
A. What B. How C. What a D. How a
4. Things of ___ kind come together; people of __ kind fall into ___ same group.
A. the , the , the B. a , a , the C. the , the , a D. a , the , the
5. My father is ill. He is still in ____ hospital. I’m going to ___ hospital to see him.
A. the , the B. / , / C. / , the D. the , /
6. Pay special attention to the idioms of ____ English language.
A. the B. some C. an D. /
7. My mother and I wanted to se a new play, but we weren’t be able to get the tickets for _____ two of us.
A. /. B. the C. among D. between
8. You missed ________ “r” when spelling the word “horror”.
A. the B. a C. an D. /
9. She pulled the boy by ____ arm and gave him a hint that she didn’t want him to tell ___ truth.
A. the , the B. his , the C, the , / D. his , a
10. Out rushed the soldier, __gun in ___hand.
A. the , a B. a , the C. the , the D. / , /
11. He has turned ___ writer = He has become ____ writer.
A. a ; a B. / ; / C. a ; / D. / ; a
12. ____ Beijing University dates back to 1898, in ____ Qing Dynasty.
A. / , / B. / , the C. The , the . D. The , /
13. He is ____ older of the two brothers.
A. a B. an C. / D. the
14. — Have you seen _________ pen I left it here this morning.
— Is it ________ black one I think I saw it somewhere.
A．a ; the B．the ; the C．the ; a D．a ; a
15. What ____ fine weather we have today!
A．a B．/ C．some D．an
16. _____ Himalayas is_____ highest mountain in______ world.
A．/ ; the ; / B．The ; the ; the C．A ; a ; a D．/ ; / ; /
17. They each have_____ book. Li Hua’s is about____ writer. Wang Lin’s is on ___ science.
A．a ; a ; / B．the ; / ; the C．/ ; the ; / D．a ; the ; a
18. ______ Physics is_____ science of matter and energy.
A．The ; / B．/ ; / C．/ ; the D．A ; a
19. _____ sun rises in_____ east and sets in_____ west.
A. A ; an ; a B．The ; / ; / C．The; the ; the D．A ; the ; a
20. They were at ____ dinner then. It was____ delicious one.
A．a ; the B．/ ; / C．/ ; a D．a ; a
21. I’m sure that he will be back in ____.
A. a day or two B. one day or two C. a or two days D. one or two day
22. He served the army in _____, when he was in ____.
A. 1980’s , his twenties B. 1980’s , the twenties
C. the 1980’s , his twenties D. the 1980’s , the twenties
23. Every few ____ along the Great Wall there are some watch towers.
A. hundred metres B. hundreds metre
C. hundreds of metre D. hundred of metres
24. She went to the market and bought three ___ eggs and some ____.
A. dozen, meats B. dozens, meat C. dozens, meats D. dozen, meat
25. He wrote a ___ report yesterday morning.
A. a one-thousand-words B. a one-thousand-word
C. an one-thousand words D. an one-thousand-word
26. Alice is fond of playing _____ piano while Henry is interested in listening to ____ music.
A. / ; the B. / ; / C. the ; / D. the; the
27. Beyond _____ stars, the astronauts saw nothing but ____ space.
A. the; / B. / ; the C./ ; / D. the; the
28. After watching ____TV, she played ____violin for an hour.
A. / ; / B. the ; the C. the ; / D. / ; the
29. Alexander Graham Bell invented __________ telephone in 1876.
A. / B. a C. the D. one
30. --- Where's Jack
--- I think he's still in ____ bed, but he might just be in ___ bathroom.
A. / ; / B. the ; the C. the ; / D./ ; the
31. Many people are still in _____ habit of writing silly things in ____ bathroom.
A. the ; the B./ ; / C. the ; / D. / ; the
32. She is ______ newcomer to ______ chemistry but she as already made some
important discoveries.
A. the ; the B. the ; / C. a ; / D. a ; the
33. Wouldn't it be ______ wonderful world if all nations lived in ____ peace with one another
A. a ; / B. the ; / C. a; the D. the; the
34. Many people agree that ____ knowledge of English is a must in ____ international trade today.
A. a ; / B. the ; an C. the ; the D. / ; the
35. --- Have you seen _____ pen I left it here this morning.
--- Is it ____ black one I think I saw it somewhere.
A. a ; the B . the ; the C. the ; a D. a ; a
36. Paper money was in ____ use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in _____ thirteenth century.
A. the ; / B. the ; the C. / ; the D. / ; /
37. Most animals have little connection with _____ animals of _____ different kind unless they kill them for food.
A. the ; a B. / ; a C. the ; the D. / ; the
1-20: BACBC ABCAD D BDAB BACCC
21-37: ACADB CADCD CCAAD CB(共121张PPT)
2005年
高考英语考前辅导
江苏省扬州中学 叶宁庆
三、突破写作误区，
巧做书面表达
一、活用基础知识，
巧做单项选择
二、掌握理解技巧，巧做听力阅读
一
活用基础知识
巧做单项选择
（一）基础知识考查要点
1 名词：考查的重点是名词单复数，名词辨义及名词搭配。如：
He gained his ___ by printing ___ of famous writers.
wealth; work
B.wealths; works
C.wealths; work
D.wealth; works
答案：D。
分析： wealth为不可数名词。work作不可数名词，意为“工作”；作可数名词，意为“作品”、“著作”。
2 冠词和数词：考查的重点是冠词和数词的基本用法。如：
She is ___ newcomer to ___ chemistry but she has already made some important discoveries.
the, the
B. the, 不填
C. a, 不填
D. a, the
答案：C。
分析：newcomer是泛指，用不定冠词。学科名词chemistry，不用冠词。
3 代词：考查的重点是不定代词与物主代词的用法。如：
---Is your camera like Bill's and Ann's
---No. But it's almost the same as___.
A. her B. yours C. them D. their
答案：B。
分析：此处比较的是camera，要用物主代词。形容词性物主代词只能作定语，空格后没有名词，所以要用名词性物主代词。
4 形容词和副词：考查的重点是形容词和副词的比较结构、词语辨异和系表结构。如：
---Have you finished your report yet？
---No, I'll finish in ___ten minutes.
A. another B. other C. more D. less
答案：A。
分析：another后可接单数名词，也可跟few或带数词的复数名词表示“再、还”之意。
5 动词的时态和语态：在历年的高考中所占的比重最大。考查的重点是复合句中的动词形式, 语态常与时态一起考查。如：
---Have you moved into the new house
---Not yet. The rooms ___.
A. are being painting B. are painting
C. are painted D. are being painted
答案：D。
分析：先确定语态为被动，再确定时态为进行时。
6 情态动词：考查的重点是情态动词的基本用法、虚拟语气的意义与结构。如：
---There were already five people in the car but they managed to take me as well.
---It ___a comfortable journey.
A. can't be B. shouldn't be
C. mustn't have been D. couldn't have been
答案：D。
分析：此处谈论过去的情况，为对过去情况的否定性推测。
7 非谓语动词：在高考中的分数比重及题量逐步增加。考查的重点从及物动词后用不定式或动名词作宾语，转向非谓语动词的句法功能、时间概念、主动还是被动。 如：
Charles Babbage is generally considered ___ the first computer.
A. to have invented
B. inventing
C. to invent
D. having invented
答案：A。
分析：consider表示“思考”时，常用动名词短语作宾语。但此处consider表示“认为”，后接不定式复合结构。不定式的动作发生在谓语动作之前，要用完成式来表示。
8 特殊句型：考查的重点是倒装、强调、感叹、否定转移、部分否定、反意问句以及省略和替代。如：
Not until all the fish died in the river ___ how serious the pollution was.
A. did the villagers realize
B. the villagers realized
C. the villagers did realize
D. didn't the villagers realize
答案：A。
分析：否定词位于句首时，主句须倒装并且不能再出现not。
9简单句、并列句和复合句：考查的重点连接词的用法。如：
It worried her a bit ___ her hair was turning grey.
A. while B. if
C. that D. for
答案：C。
分析：it是形式主语，而真正的主语是空格后的整个句子。此处只有that能引导主语从句。
10 短语与搭配：考查的重点一般是动词短语辨义，以及介词与动词、形容词的搭配。如：
John has put on so much weight recently that his mother has to ___all his trousers to his measure.
A. let out B. give away
C. bring in D. make up
答案：A。
分析：let out表示“放大”。
11交际用语：考查的重点是日常交际用语，一般是根据上下文情境来判断答语。如：
A: May I take your order
B: I’d like a cup of coffee and a hot dog. What about you, Lisa
Lisa: ___.
A. The same to me
B. Same again, please
C. It’s very kind of you
D. Thank you all the same.
答案：B。
分析：Same again, please.表示“同样的再来一份”。
（二）单项选择解题技巧
1 利用上下语境。如：
---Where shall I ___ ---At the next stop. A. drop you
B. find you
C. pick you up
D. call on you
答案：A。
分析：就第一句而言，四个选项都有意义。但是，答语At the next stop暗示：两个人说话时在一起。B、C、D都不能用于这一情境。
2 参照类似表达。如： ---Where are you going to do the shopping ---At the ___ store. A. shoes
B. shoe
C. shoe’s
D. shoes’
答案：B。分析：想一下熟悉的the book store，此题就迎刃而解了。此题涉及名词作定语的用法，一般规则是：名词作定语用单数。但是，也不能形成定势：①有时也用复数，例如：a clothes shop, a communications satellite, a sales department等。②名词的所有格表达时间、距离和价值，例如：three days’ stay, a stone’s throw, ten dollar’s worth of oil等。
3 避免思维定势。如： The young man spent as much time as he ___ over his lessons. A. went B. would go
C. could to go D. could going
答案：D。
分析：spend 的句型是spend + time + doing。不要受She did what she could to help him.的影响。
4 分析句子成分。如： The exciting moment we looked forward to ___ at last. A. coming B. came C. come D. comes
答案：B。
分析：本句主语是The exciting moment，we looked forward to是个定语从句，前面的关系代词which被省略了。所选部分是谓语，不是look forward to的宾语。
5 分析句子结构。如：
⑴___in the doorway, everyone in the room gave her a cheer. A. Appearing
B. As she appeared
C. Having appeared
D. When appearing
答案：B。
分析：in the doorway的不是everyone，而是she，所以in the doorway之前要有she。此句运用的是as引导的时间状语从句。
⑵___, she had to stay at home and looked after her. A. Her mother was ill B. As she was ill
C. Her mother being ill D. Being ill
答案：C。
分析：生病的不是she，而是Her mother。逗号不能连接两个句子，要么用并列句Her mother was ill, so she had to stay at home and looked after her.要么用主从复合句Because her mother was ill, she had to stay at home and looked after her. 此句运用独立主格结构Her mother being ill作原因状语。
6 重视标点符号。如：
___, the Great Wall is the longest wall in the world. A. That is well-known B. It is known that C. As is well-known D. We all know
答案：C。
分析：逗号说明此句是由as引导的非限制性定语从句，不是主语从句。
7 重视一词多性。如：
I saw a ___ good girl on TV last night. A. lovely
B. handsome
C. pretty
D. nice
答案：C。
分析：四个都可以作形容词，但pretty还可作副词，表示“相当”。
8 重视一词多义。如：
Jane’s pale face suggested that she ___ill, and her parents suggested that she ___a medical examination. A. be; should have B. was ; have
C. should be; had D. was; has
答案：B。
分析：suggest表示“暗示”，从句用陈述语气；表示“建议”，从句用虚拟语气（should可以省略）。
二
掌握理解技巧
巧做听力阅读
（一）听力理解的考查方式
⒈ 场景题型。
⑴地点题型。常见的提问形式有：
①Where does this conversation probably take place
②Where did it happen
③Where is. . .
④What kind of store is she going to
例如：
Q: Where did this conversation most probably take place
A. At a concert.
B. At a flower shop.
C. At a restaurant.
录音：M: The music and the flower are lovely.
W: Yes, I hope the food is good, too.
答案：C。该题需要合理的推断。题中关键词为the food。
⑵时间题型。常见的提问方式有：
①When does the conversation take place？
②when does the man want to leave？
③How long did it take the man to write his paper？
④When did the football match start？
例如：
Q: At what time does the train to Leeds leave
A. 3:00. B. 3:15.
C. 5:00.
录音：W: Excuse me, could you tell me when the next train to Manchester is
M: Sure. Well, it's 3 now. The next train to Manchester leaves in 2 hours, but you can take the train to Leeds, which leaves in 15 minutes, and then get off at Manchester on the way.
答案：B。该题需要简单的计算。说话时是3点钟，M建议乘去Leeds的车，该车途径Manchester，15分钟后发车。
例如：
Q: What is the relationship between the two speakers
A. Neighbors.
B. Father and daughter.
C. Husband and wife.
录音：W: Hello!
M: Hello, Lucy, this is John. Look, could you do me a favor I've tried to phone my wife six times and I can’t get through. The line is busy all the time. Could you possibly go next door and give her a message
W: Sure, what do you want to tell Mary
答案：A。解题的关键是抓住phone my wife，go next door等关键性的词语。
⑶人物关系题型。常见的提问形式是：
What is the probable relationship between the two speakers
⑷职业判断题型。常见的提问形式有：
① What's the woman's job
② What's the profession (职业)of the man
③ Who is the woman probably speaking to
例如：
Q: Who is the woman most probably speaking to
A. A railway porter.
B. A taxi driver.
C. A postal clerk.
录音：W: Excuse me, sir. I'm going to send this parcel to London. What's the postage for it
M: Let me see. It's one pound fifty.
答案：C。根据parcel（邮包）和postage（邮资）等关键词可以判断：这位女士是在跟邮局职员讲话。
⒉ 推断题型。常见的提问形式有：
①What do we learn from the conversation
②What does the conversation tell us
③Why can't the woman find the book
④What is the man doing
⑤What will the weather be like
⑥What's their opinion of Linda's brother
⑦What does the man mean
⑧What can we conclude from the man's reply
⑨What happened to the woman
⑩What was the consequence of the accident
例如：
Q: What does the man mean
A. She can use his car.
B. She can borrow someone else's car.
C. She can't borrow his car.
录音：W: I need a car this weekend, but mine has broken down.
M: I'm sorry to hear it, but you can always rent one if you have a license.
答案：C。女士讲话有借车之意。男士委婉地拒绝了女士的请求。
例如：
Q: What did the man do last night
A. He watched television with his friend.
B. He stayed at home talking with his friend.
C. He went to see a film with his friend.
录音：W: Did you see last night film on Channel 4
M: Well, I meant to see it, but a friend of mine came to see me. We had a nice long talk about our school days.
答案：B。but后面的内容：一是朋友来访，二是畅谈过去。
⒊ 中BUT题型。题型特征为：对话答语由两部分组成，先是一个短句，后接一个较长的句子，短句与长句子之间用but连接。题目的答案通常在but之后。
⒋ 虚拟语气题型。
⑴虚拟条件句。
例如：
Q: What happened to the woman
A. She got home before 9 o'clock.
B. She had a bad cold.
C. She was delayed.
录音：W: If it hadn't been snowing so hard, I might have been home by 9 o'clock.
M: It's too bad you didn't make it. Jane was here and she wanted to see you.
答案：C。女士讲话表达与过去事实相反，即9点未能到家。
⑵wish+从句。
例如：
Q: What do we learn from the convention
A. The man is planning a trip to Austin.
B. The man has not been to Austin before.
C. The man has been to Austin before.
录音：W: I'm thinking of going to Austin for a visit. Do you think it's worth seeing
M: Well, I wish I had been there.
答案：B。男士讲话表达一种未能实现的愿望。事实：他从未去过那里。
⒌ 建议题型。
⑴Why don't you... 与Why not...
例如：
Q: What is the man suggesting
A. Coming back for a later show.
B. Waiting in a queue.
C. Coming back in five minutes.
录音：W: The movie starts in 5 minutes and there's bound to be a long line.
M: Why don't we come back for the next show I'm sure it would be less crowded.
答案：A。男士的建议中用的是the next show，而在选项中用a later show作替换。
录音：W: We do need another bookshelf in this room, but the problem is the space for it.
M: How about moving the old dining table to the kitchen
⑵What/How about...？
例如：
Q: What does the man suggest they should do
A. Find a larger room.
B. Sell the old table.
C. Rearrange some furniture.
答案：C。建议内容是：把旧餐桌搬到厨房里。
⒍ 比较题型。常见的提问方式有：
①What do(es)… think of …
②Who/Which is better…
③What do(es)… like best
例如：
Q: What does Tome like to do most
A. Tom like best to make phone calls.
B. Tom likes to talk with his friends most.
C. Tom likes to visit his friends most.
录音：M: Does Tom like to visit his friends
W: Yes, but he likes nothing better than to talk on the telephone with his friends.
答案：A。比较级 nothing better than表达最高级的含义 。
（二）阅读理解的考查方式
⒈ 推断词义。
⑴利用形合手段。形合指的是：同义、反义、上义、下义、词的集合、词的搭配等关系。
例如：Finally, renewable energy sources are used even though they are often expensive to develop. One form of these is geothermal energy. In certain parts of the world the temperature of the earth increases thirty degrees centigrade with each kilometer down. At six kilometers, therefore, it rises to nearly two hundred degrees. To get the heat, water is pumped down into the rocks and back up to the surface. Heat from the earth is already used in certain countries.
The underlined words in the paragraph mean _______.
A. renewable source
B. underground source
C. heat inside the earth
D. temperature of the earth
答案：C。geothermal energy是renewable energy的一种形式，属上下义关系。geothermal energy与heat from the earth是同义关系。
⑵利用语言情境。语境指的是照应、替代、省略、定义、举例等。
例如：The aging of the population will affect American society in many ways---education , medicine, and business. Quietly, the graying of America has made us a very different society---one in which people have a quite different idea of what kind of behavior is suitable at various ages.
The underlined word ‘one’ refers to ___.
A. a society B. America C. a place D. population
答案：A。one 是society的同位语。
⑶利用构词知识。构词法主要有：①词缀法②转类法③合词法。
例如：Computer people talk a lot about the need for other people to become "computer-literate". But not all experts agree that this is a good idea.
One pioneer, in particular, who disagrees, is David, the founder of computertown UK. Although many people see this as a successful attempt to bring people closer to the computer, David does not see it that way. He says that Computertowns UK was formed for just the opposite reason, to bring computers to people and make them "people-literate."
David thinks Computertowns are most successful when tied to a computer club but he insists there is an important difference between the two. The clubs are for people who have some computer knowledge already. This frightens away non-experts, who are happier going to Computertowns where there are computers for them to experiment on, with experts to encourage them and answer any questions they have. They are not told what to do, they find out. The computer experts have to learn not to tell people about computers, but have to be able to answer all questions people ask. People don't have to learn computer terms (术语), but the experts have to explain in plain language. The computers are becoming "people-literate."
分析：文中解释了两个概念：
①computer-literate ：
to bring people closer to the computer
a computer club：
for people who have some computer knowledge already
②people-literate ：
to bring computers to people
Computertowns：
there are computers for them to experiment on
not to tell people about computers
don't have to learn computer terms (术语)
We can infer from the text that "computer- literate" means .
A. being able to afford a computer
B. being able to write computer programs
C. working with the computer and finding out its value
D. understanding the computer and knowing how to use it
答案：D。 抓住have some computer knowledge already这一关键，并通过理解其相对概念people-literate作出选择。
其实，computer-literate是computer（计算机）和literate（受过教育的）构成的合成词，如果分别知道这两个词的意思，不仅有助于本词汇题的选择，也有助于本文的理解。
阅读词汇要求：生词率3%*1000（以上）=至少30。30/5=6个生词/篇。
建议：①弄熟《全国统一考试大纲》中的词汇。②认识《新课标》中的词汇。
⒉ 概括主旨。常见的提问方式：
①This news story is mainly about ________.
②The text is mainly about ________ .
③The best headline (标题) for this newspaper article is_________.
④What does the second paragraph mainly discuss
⑤What would be the best title for the text
例如：Kleptomania is an illness of the mind that gives a person the desire to steal. Such a person is not really a thief. They are sick and cannot help themselves. All small children act naturally and as they grow up they normally learn to control their actions- People with kleptomania for certain medical reasons have failed to develop control over their desire to take things that do not belong to them. With medical help they may become normal citizens again- The things that a kleptomaniac steals are seldom of great value. They often give away what they have stolen or collect objects without using them.
What is the topic of the text
A. Young thieves.
B. An unusual illness.
C. Reasons for stealing.
D. A normal child's actions.
答案：B。本文议论的中心为一种罕见的疾病， 浓缩于第一句主题句中： Kleptomania is an illness of the mind that gives a person the desire to steal.
⒊ 捕捉细节。常见的提问方式：
①Which of the following statements is true according to the paragraph(passage)
②Which of the following statements is false (not true), according to the paragraph (passage)
③All the following statements are (not true) EXCEPT
④ The author (writer) mentions all of the items listed below EXCEPT
⑤ In this paragraph (passage), we find support for all of the following statements EXCEPT
⑥ The statements made by the author (writer) are based on evidence (example, fact)
⑦The author (paragraph, passage) states (informs, tell us) that
例如：Sam and Joe were astronauts. There was once a very dangerous trip and the more experienced astronauts knew there was only a small chance of coming back alive. Sam and Joe, however, thought, it would be exciting though a little dangerous. "We're the best men for the job," they said to the boss. "There may be problems, but we can find the answers. ""They're the last people I'd trust," thought the boss. "But all the other astronauts have refused to go."
Most of the astronauts were unwilling to go on the trip because___________ .
A. there was little chance of being selected
B. they weren't experienced enough
C. they thought they might get killed
D. it wasn't exciting enough
答案：C。本题答案在文中可直接找到： the more experienced astronauts knew there was only a small chance of coming back alive.
⒋ 推断信息。
⑴针对主题大意/中心思想的推断题。常见的提问方式：
① We can conclude that...
② We may infer that...
③The writer suggests that...
④The story implies that...
⑤What the writer really means is...
⑥It can be inferred from the passage that...
⑦According to the passage, you can see...
⑧It can be seen from the passage that...
⑨The passage suggests that...
⑩In the writer’s opinion, ...
⑵针对作者的观点、态度和意图的推断题。
①What does the author think of…
②How does the author feel about…
③In the writer’s opinion, …
④What's the tone of this passage
⑶针对写作思路、文章体裁和来源的推断题
①What does/did the paragraph preceding the passage most probably discuss
②The paragraph following the passage most probably discusses
③This selection（节选）might be some parts of a book concerned with...
④This passage might be taken out of a book dealing with...
⑤Where did this passage most probably appear
⑥These extracts（摘录）are probably taken from...
例如：We walked in so quietly that the nurse at the desk didn't even lift her eyes from the book. Mum pointed at a big chair by the door and I knew she wanted me to sit down. While I watched mouth open in surprise, Mum took off her hat and coat and gave them to me to hold. She walked quietly to the small room by the lift and took out a wet mop. She pushed the mop past the desk ….
Mum just pushed harder , each swipe (拖一下) of the mop taking her farther and farther down the hall. I watched until she was out of sight ….
"Of course. I told her about the hospital rules, and she will not expect us until tomorrow….
After reading the story what can we infer about the hospital
A. It is a children's hospital.
B. It has strict rules about visiting hours.
C. The conditions there aren't very good.
D. The nurses and doctors there don't work hard.
答案：B。本文主要叙述Mum巧妙地骗过护士在非探视时间看望女儿Dagmar的经过，说明医院有严格的探视制度。本题的推论必须与文章主题相联系。
（二）完形填空的考查方式
⒈ 运用复现
⑴原词复现。上下文中同一概念重复出现。
⑵同义词、近义词复现。借助意思相同或相近的表达方式，或解释性的语言使上下文语义得以连接起来。
⑶同源词复现。同一词根，通过前缀、后缀、合成和转化等方式构成同源词。
⑷上下义词复现。上义词具有概括性，下义词具有分述作用。
⑸概念复现。同一概念在上下文中以不同的词语出现。
⑹评述性复现。用一种表达方式对另一种表达方法进行解释或说明。
⑺反义复现。通过反义词或对比使文章前后衔接照应。
⒉ 利用联想
⑴利用话题联想。就某一话题而言，有许多信息和表达方式与之同现，形成一个个词汇链。
⑵利用因果关系联想。
⑵利用结构联想。通过关键词进行固定结构联想。
⒊ 借助语言标志。
⑴借助转承语。
⑵借助并列连词。
三
突破写作误区
巧做书面表达
（一）认识失分原因
1．审题不仔细，遗漏要点。
例如：2000年全国卷（目击交通事故）
目击报告: It was 7 : 15 on the morning of February 8, 2000. I was walking along Park Road towards the east when an elderly man came out of the park on the other side of the street. Then I saw a yellow car drive up Third Street and make a right turn into Park Road. The next moment the car hit the man while he was crossing the road. He fell with a cry. The car didn't stop but drove off at great speed heading west. I noticed the driver was a young woman and the plate number was AC864. About two minutes later I stopped a passing car and took the old man to the nearest hospital.

Li Hua
2．过渡不自然，单纯翻译。
例如：叙述国庆节去北京动物园的情况。
有位学生写道：Today is National Day. Li Ming and I went to Beijing Zoo. We took the No. 15 bus. We got there ten minutes later. There were many people in the zoo. Most of them were children. In the zoo, we saw elephants. We saw bears. We saw lions…. At 12 o’clock, we went back home. We had a wonderful day today. We felt tired. We felt happy.
这位学生把该表达的内容都写出来了，而且没有句子结构方面的错误，但是，他写的不是一篇短文，而是孤零零的句子。
有效地运用连接词，可使上下文连贯流畅。
Today is National Day. Li Ming and I went to Beijing Zoo. We took the No. 15 bus and ten minutes later we got there. There were many people in the zoo, most of whom were children. In the zoo, we saw many kinds of animals, such as elephants, bears and lions…. At 12 o’clock, we went back home. What a wonderful day we had today. Although we were tired， we felt very happy.
3. 逻辑不恰当，有悖常理。
结尾：It is very clear that the pollution has harmed not only people around the factory but also the manager himself. The manager was criticized by the government. Now he has realized the importance of keeping the air clean.
短语、从句可使短文更富有表现力。
Charging entrance fees will no doubt keep some people away. What is more，it will become necessary to build gates and walls，which will do harm to the appearance of a city.
4．表达不丰富，结构单调。
例如：2002年全国卷（讨论公园是否收门票）
The entrance fees are charged. People will not come. Walls and gates should be built. They will not make the city look bad.
5．语言不地道，汉式思维。
例如：2002年全国卷（给英文报纸写信）
不少同学写成：I want to tell you about the discussion we’ve had about whether an entrance fee should be charged for parks.
就I wan to tell you……而言，本身没有错，但用在此处就不符合英语习惯了。
书信中应写：I am writing to tell you about the discussion we’ve just had about whether an entrance fee should be charged for parks.
6．用词不贴切，缺乏积累。
例如：2002年北京卷（记叙野外生存训练）
结尾部分有学生写成：Then we set up the camp and set fire to cook food.
最后部分应写：Li Ming then put up the tent，and I made a fire and started cooking.
姑且不谈to cook food的对错，单就set fire而言就是个不可原谅的错误，set fire to a place系“纵火烧某处”，显而易见是对make a fire这个词组没有掌握。
7．语法不正确，错误不断。
【误】Can you tell Asia elephants from Africa
【误】He will remember firmly that the teacher said and did.
【正】Can you tell Asian elephants from African ones
【正】He will remember clearly what the teacher said and did.
8．书写不规范，多词少词。
评分原则：
·词数少于80和多于120的，从总分中减去2分。
·如书写较差，以至影响交际，将分数降低一个档次。
说明：
1．内容要点可用不同方式表达。
2．对紧扣主题的适当发挥不予扣分。
（二）学会句型转换
⒈ 简单句合并为简单句。
⑴用连词and, both…and, nor, neither…nor, or, either…or, as well as, not only…but also, as much as, rather than, more than等。
例如：
We cannot expect her to do housework. And we cannot expect her to look after the children.
We can neither expect her to do housework nor look after the children.
⑵用同位语，例如：
Edison was a great inventor. He was born in 1847.
Edison, a great inventor, was born in 1847.
⑶用介词短语，例如：
The boy was in bad health. He was therefore unable to do it.
Because of his bad health, the boy was unable to do it.
⑷用不定式短语，例如：
She is very young. She can’t go to school.
She is too young to go to school.
⑸用分词短语，例如：
I saw a bus. It came slowly up to me.
I saw a bus coming slowly up to me.
⑹用形容词（短语），例如：
They spent several days in the wind and snow. They were cold and hungry.
They spent several days in the wind and snow, cold and hungry.
⑺用副词短语，例如：
I will return to this point in my lecture. It will be in a little while.
I will return to this point in my lecture soon.
⑻用独立结构，例如：
My father was ill. I had to stay at home.
My father being ill, I had to stay at home.
⒉ 简单句合并为并列句：
⑴表示句与句之间关系平等，而意义引申，主要连词有：
①and，例如：
She has lent us one of her new books. The book is the latest one in her collection.
She has lent us one of her new books and it is the latest one in her collection.（表示增补）
He is jack-of-all-trades. He is master of none.
He is jack-of-all-trades and he is master of none.（含义向否定引申）
An urgent telegram was sent to her husband. She was waiting for his reply.
An urgent telegram was sent to her husband and she was waiting for his reply.（表示动作先后）
The day is short. The work is heavy.
The day is short and the work is heavy. （表示让步）
Think it over again. You will find a way out.
Think it over again and you will find a way out.（表示条件）
Many of the papers are good. These papers are the best.
Many of the papers are good and these papers are the best.（表示对比）
They have finished half of it. This is not bad.
They have finished half of it and this is not bad.（表示评注）
②not only…but also，例如：
He said it. He did it too.
Not only did he say it, but also he did it.
③nor, neither, neither…nor，例如：
Mary can’t speak French. Jane can’t speak French either.
Neither can Mary speak French, nor can Jane.
⑵表示选择关系，主要连词有：or, either…or, whether…or, otherwise等。
例如：
Stop! If not, I will shoot.
Stop or I’ll shoot.
You must behave yourself. You’ll never go out with me again.
Either you must behave yourself , or you’ll never go out with me again.
⑶表示转折关系或对比关系，主要连词有：but, still, yet, however, on the other hand, all the same, though, after all, while等。
例如：
Tom was not here. His brother was here.
Tom was not here, but his brother was.
There is no milk in the container. You can find some in the kitchen.
There is no milk in the container but you can find some in the kitchen.
⑷表示因果关系，主要连词有：for, so, therefore, thus, in that case等。
例如：
He was absent this morning. He was ill.
He was absent this morning for he was ill.
⑸用when，表示突然发生，相当于just then, just at that time/moment，常用结构有：
①was (were, did)…when，例如：
He was on his way home. Suddenly two boys stopped him.
He was on his way home, when two boys stopped him.
②was (were) doing…when，例如：
I was thinking of this. Suddenly I heard my name called.
I was thinking of this, when I heard my name called.
③was (were) (just) about to do…when，例如：
I was just about to pick up the receiver. At that moment the phone stopped ringing.
I was just about to pick up the receiver, when the phone stopped ringing.
④had (just) done…when，例如：
Harry had just left home. His son rushed out to play.
Harry had just left home , when his son rushed out to play.
⒊简单句合并为主从句：
⑴名词从句：
①主语从句。
例如：
You didn't go to see such a wonderful play. It's a pity.
It's a pity that you didn’t go to see such a wonderful play.
②宾语从句，例如：
He is going somewhere. I don’t know.
I don’t know where he is going.
③直接引语，例如：
What should we do first This is my question.
This is my question: “What we should do first ”
④表语从句，例如：
Can we finish our work by tomorrow evening That is my question.
My question is whether we can finish our work by tomorrow evening.
⑤同位语从句，例如：
What did he come here for I tried to find the explanation to this question.
I tried to find the explanation to this question what he came here for.
⑵定语从句：
①用关系代词。
例如：
In our courtyard there was a big date tree. I liked it very much.
In our courtyard there was a big date tree, which I liked very much.
②用关系副词，例如：
He will never forget the day. He joined the League on that day.
He will never forget the day when (on which) he joined the League.
③用whose，例如：
A young man from your college has brought you this parcel. I have forgotten his name.
A young man from your college, whose name I have forgotten, has brought you this parcel.
⑶状语从句：
①表示时间，例如：
He told me yesterday. I heard about it only then.
I didn’t hear about it until he told me yesterday.
②表示地点，例如：
He put his book on the kitchen table. He found it there.
He found his book where he put it.
③表示原因，例如：
Everybody is present. Let’s begin our discussion.
Since everybody is present, let’s begin our discussion.
④表示目的，例如：
We must listen more and speak more. In this way we’ll be able to learn English better.
We must listen more and speak more so that we’ll be able to learn English better.
⑤表示结果，例如：
It was raining cats and dogs. We couldn’t go out.
It was raining so hard that we couldn’t go out.
⑥表示条件，例如：
You can go out. You must promise to come back before eleven.
You can go out as long as you promise to come back before eleven.
⑦表示比较，例如：
The color of your cap is blue. The color of mine is blue too.
Your cap is the same color as mine .
⑧表示让步，例如：
He has had great success. He is working very hard.
Though he has had great success, he is still working very hard.
⑨表示方式，例如：
He did the experiment. His teacher showed him how to do it.
He did the experiment as his teacher showed him.
（三）活用过渡用语
⑴表示时间关系的过渡词语：
first, in the beginning, first of all, next, second, then, soon, meanwhile, meantime, in the meantime, now, earlier, later, after that, afterward, at that moment, by that time, from then on, presently, eventually, at last, finally, before..., after..., since..., when..., while..., as soon as..., once..., until...
⑵表示添加的过渡词语：
and, also, too, again, besides, also, another, moreover, furthermore, in addition, as well as, what is more
⑶表示比较的过渡词语：
like, alike, in comparison, likewise, in the same way, at the same time, similarly, in like manner, as, as well as
⑷表示对照的过渡同语：but, yet, still, however, unlike, instead, whereas, in spite of, despite, on the contrary, in contrast, on the other hand, though, although, for one thing…for another
⑸表示原因的过渡词语：because, for, since, as, because of, due to, owing to, thanks to
⑹表示结果的过渡词语：so, thus, therefore, hence, so that, as a result, in this / that way
⑺表示例证的过渡同语：
for example, for instance, such as, that is, namely, in particular, specifically, as proof of
⑻表示总结的过渡词语：
to sum up, to conclude, to summarize, on the whole, all in all, lastly, in short , in brief, in a word, in conclusion, in closing, in summary
⑼表示强调的过渡词语：
surely, certainly, truly, undoubtedly, clearly, indeed, in fact, after all, above all, most important, to be sure, without doubt, without a question, as a matter of fact
⑽表示重述的过渡词语：
in other words, that is to say, in simpler terms, simply stated, to put it differently
⑾表示综述的过渡词语：
generally, generally speaking, in general, in a word, in short, on the whole, as a rule, for the most part
⑿表示让步的过渡词语：
anyhow, anyway, of course, however, in any case, at any rate
（四）强化短文改错
⑴一致性问题
①主谓一致
a. The new boy or girl in school quickly become one of the class after a few games.
主语the boy or girl是单数，谓语动词也要用单数becomes。
b. Every means have been tried to settle the problem.
主语every means为单数概念，故将have改为has。
②单复数一致
a. We have been to Europe many time.
time改为times。
b. Different people speak different language.
language改为languages。
③代词一致
a. The game speaks for themselves.
themselves改为itself。
b. And I can’t forget the food you cooked for I.
I改为me。
c. Nothing will be damaged during the move, will they？
they改为it。
④时态语态一致
a. Today, it is much easier to be healthy than it is in the past.
is改为was，与in the past保持一致。
b. He knew how young people feel about the world.
feel改为felt，与knew保持一致。
c. She closed the door and hurries away to class.
改为She closed the door and hurried away to class. hurried时态跟and前的closed保持一致。
d. Books may be keeping for two weeks.
此句为被动语态，故将keep改为过去分词kept。
⑵搭配问题
①People in industrial countries can expect to live for twice so long as people who lived a few hundred years ago.
so long as改为as long as。
②Mother is cooking tea for the guests.
cooking改为making。 make tea为习惯表达。
③ The glass is filled of water.
of改为with，固定词组为be filled with。
④When they came down the police were angry to them.
to改为with，be angry with sb为固定搭配。
　⑶非谓语动词
①He allowed me go with my friend.
go前加to，allow sb to do sth．allow与带to的不定式连用。
②Let me to sing a song.
去掉to，let sb do sth．let与不带to的动词不定式连用。
③I want to thank you again for have me in your home for the summer holidays.
have改为having，因为for是介词，后面要跟名词或动名词作宾语。
　⑷冠词的用法
①There's public library in every town in Britain.
is后加不定冠词a。a常用于可数名词单数之前，表示类别，或介绍某个。
②Not every young man tried to get the rich.
去掉the。 get后跟形容词。get rich意为“变为富有”，而get the rich（富人），则语意不通。
　⑸连词的使用
①It was not like a rope and a fan.
and改为or。or常用于否定意义的句子；and常用于肯定意义的句子。
②I told Mother, Father, Sister, all my friends here the great time I had.
all 前加 and 。
③She could not hear that other people were saying.
that改为what。what既连接从句，又在从句中作saying的宾语。
④There are still some countries which people have shorter lives.
which改为where。where在定语从句中作地点状语。
⑤We hurried, we didn't miss the last bus.
改为We hurried, so (that) we didn't miss the last bus.
　⑹形容词和副词的用法
①This film is more less interesting than that one.
more改为much。 much修饰比较级，表示程度。
②They are singing happy in the park.
happy改为happily。happily为副词，修饰动词singing。
　⑺句子结构
①The picture is about a poor little girl lived in old China.
　此句中从句缺主语，应在lived前加who。
②Charles and Linda Mason do all their things as well as climbed building.
climbed改为climbing。climbing是动名词，成份与all their things平行，都作do的宾语。
　⑻逻辑关系
①Did you go back here yesterday？
go改为come。go here无逻辑搭配关系。
②Work hard，or you can pass the exam.
or改为and，才有逻辑意义
（五）注意改错格式
Good Luck !!!同位语从句和定语从句的三点区别
同位语从句和定语从句很相似,但还是有区别的,区别主要在以下三方面:
1. 从词类上区别 同位语从句前面的名词只能是idea,fact,news,hope,belief,suggestion,proposal,word,thought,doubt,truth,possibility,promise,order等有一定内涵的名词 而定语从句的先行词可以是名词 代词 主句的一部分或是整个主句 如:The possibility that the majority of the labour force will work at home is often discussed.人们经常讨论大多数劳动力将会在家里工作的可能性 (同位语从句) We are not looking into the question whether he is worth trusting. 我们正在调查的问题不是他是否值得信赖的问题 (同位语从句) Word came that he had been abroad. 据说他已经出国了 (同位语从句) Our team has won the game, which made us very happy. 我们的队赢了,这让我们很高兴 (定语从句) The doctor whom you are looking for is in the room. 你找的那位医生在房间里面 (定语从句) His mother did all she could to help him with his study. 他妈妈尽她的最大努力帮助他的学习 (定语从句,代词all作先行词 )
2. 从性质上区别 定语从句是从句对其先行词的修饰或限制,属于形容词性从句的范畴;而同位语从句是从句对前面抽象名词的进一步的说明和解释,属于名词性从句的范畴 如: The news that our team has won the game was true. 我们队赢了那场比赛的消息是真的 (同位语从句,补充说明news到底是一个什么消息 ) The news that he told me yesterday was true. 昨天他告诉我的那个消息是真的 (定语从句,news在从句中作told的宾语 ) I made a promise that if anyone set me free I would make him very rich. 我许诺如果谁让我自由,我就让他非常富有 (同位语从句,补充说明promise到底是一个什么诺言 ) The mother made a promise that pleased all her children. 妈妈做出了一个令她的孩子们高兴的许诺 (定语从句,promise在从句中作pleased的主语 )
3. 从引导词及其在句子中的成分上区别 有些引导词如how, whether, what可以引导同位语从句,但不能引导定语从句 如: That question whether we need it has not been considered. 我们是否需要它这个问题还没有考虑 (同位语从句) I have no idea what has happened to him. 我不知道他发生了什么事 (同位语从句) 引导词that引导定语从句时,在从句中一般作主语或宾语(指物时还可以用which代替),并且作宾语时常常省略 that在同位语从句中仅起连接作用,不充当任何成分,并且不能省略,也不能用which来代替 如: The order that we ?should? send a few people to help the other groups was received yesterday. 我们应派几个人去帮别的几个小组的命令昨天收到了 (同位语从句,是对order的具体解释,that虽不作成分,但不能省略 ) The order ?that? we received yesterday was that we ?should? send a few people to help the other groups. 我们昨天收到的命令是我们应该派几个人去帮助别的几个小组 (定语从句,是名词order的修饰语,that在从句中作received的宾语,可以省略 )
最后我们在一起来做三道练习题: 1. Along with the letter was his promise ____ he would visit me this coming Christmas.(2004上海春季高考) A. which B. that C. what D. whether 2. The other day, my brother drove his car down the street at ____ I thought was a dangerous speed. (2004上海春季高考) A. as B. which C. what D. that 3. Luckily,we’d brought a road map without ____ we would have lost our way. (2004北京春季高考) A. it B. that C. this D. which 答案:1. B 2. B 3. D(共59张PPT)
非谓语动词
1．性质：它具有动词的特点，但在句子中起着名词、形容词、副词的作用，充当主语、表语、定语、宾语、宾语补足语、状语的作用，即：除谓语以外一切成分。
2．形式
不定式相当于名词、形容词、副词。充当主语、宾语、定语、表语、宾语补足语、状语。
动名词相当于名词充当主语、表语、定语、宾语。
分词相当于形容词、副词。作表语、定语、宾语补足语、状语形成分
3．语态：必须搞清逻辑主语与非谓语动词的关系，从而来确定非谓语动词态的语态。
逻辑主语能发出该动作 （发）
逻辑主语不能发出该动作 （收）
不发不收用结构： 动词不定式：用结构。
动名词：用结构。
分词：用独立主格结构
1．不定式作主语：
Warm up exercises:
1) change the following into the infinitive
1. ______( die ) for people is a glorious thing.
2. ______( talk ) with him is a great pleasure.
3. ______( help ) others is our duty.
4. ______( see ) is to believe.
5. ______( seat ) at the back of the classroom
made the students surprised.
2) change the sentences above into the ones
using “it” as informal.
3)A: 如果要说明不定式表示的动作是谁做的，可以在不定式前加一个由for 引起的短语。
It is easy for the students to read.
It will be a mistake for us to help you.
B: 下列形容词作表语时，不定式前常加一个of 引起的短语，来说明不定式指
的是谁的情况，这些形容词是：
kind, good, nice, wise, unwise, clever, silly, wrong, right, foolish, stupid, careless, rude, polite, naughty etc.
It’s kind of you to think so much of us.
It’s unwise of him to leave home at once.
It ‘s wrong of him to speak bad behind others.
It’s wrong for the south to break away from the Union.
2．不定式作表语
1. Her work is ______( look )after the
children.
2. My aim is ______( go ) to Tsinghua
University.
3. She seemed ______( think ) about the
problem.
4. They appeared _____( agree ) with
what
we said.
不定式作表语时可以和主语部分调换。
3．不定式作宾语：
有些及物动词常用不定式作宾语。常见的动词有：
want, demand, like, hate, hope, begin, seem, fail, help, offer, manage, pretend, forget, remember, promise, prepare, learn, expect, agree, determine, prefer, intend, etc.
They wanted ______( get ) on the bus, didn’t they
He said he wished______(be )a professor.
I agreed______ (go ) there with the doctor.
My daughter preferred ______( dance ) when she was in her twenties.
He had promised ______(give) me a hand.
4.不定式作宾语补足语
A)1. I didn’t want my parents ______(help ) me.
2. We’d prefer you _______( take ) the job
instead of Zhang.
3. The school ordered all the classroom
______( clean ).
4. My parents expect me _______( go )to a
ideal university.
5. Joan promised the dinner ______( cook )
before we returned.
6. The doctor advised the patient
______( take ) two pills every four hours.
7. He determined me_______( tell ) everything.
B) Whom flns sb do sth. (watch, have(使)hear, observe, make, feel, listen (to), let,
notice, see etc. + sb +动词原形
+ sth + done
We can’t let this ______(go) on.
I will not let my children ______(treat) in that way.
John made him ______( tell ) everything.
The two boys were sorry indeed to see him ______(go).
We felt the house ______( shake) in the earthquake.
Do you like listening to other people ______( talk ) Have you ever heard him ______( tell ) a lie
Who would you like to have______( go )
Who would you like to have______(go) with
What song did you hear ______( sing )
We saw the house ______( burn ) to the ground when we reached there.
5.不定式作定语
Change the following into infinitives.
He was the first person that came to the classroom this morning.
The only thing that I want to get is the diamond necklace.
Everything that is done needs praising.
Do you have anything that you want to say
Here are some books that you can read.
6.不定式作状语。
状语的形式很多，有目的、结果、原因、条件、让步、比较、方式、伴随等，但目的、结果 要用不定式。
A)Substitution:
He got up early so that he could catch the first bus to the town.
He got up early_____ _____ _____ catch the first bus.
We must work hard at English in order that we can contact foreigners freely.
We must work hard at English _____ _____ ____ contact foreigners freely.
He was so frightened that he could hardly say anything.
He was______ frightened _______say anything.
He was ______ brave ______ ______say anything.
He was so young that he could go to school.
He was _____ late _____ go to school.
He was not _____ ______ _____ go to school.
B) 1. ______(save ) the badly sick lady, the
doctor had an operation on her.
2. He hurried to the station only _____
( find ) the train left.
动名词
1．动名词作主语
A)
1. ______( die ) for people is a glorious thing.
2. ______( talk ) with him is a great pleasure.
3. ______( help ) others is our duty.
4. ______( see ) is to believe.
5. ______( seat ) at the back of the classroom made the students surprised.
it作形式主语时，可用动词不定式，但下列巨型常用动名词：
It is+ no good (no use, fun, a pleasure, a waste of time)+doing…
There is no + doing….
如：
It’s no use ______( sit ) here waiting.
There is no ______( say )what will happen next.
Is it any good ______( tell ) him the truth right now.
不定式与动名词的区别：
不定式作主语时经常表示具体动作，而动名词作主语时经常表示抽象动作：
It’s no good eating too much fat.
It’s not good for you to eat so much fat.
B) 关于逻辑主语的问题
1. ______to the meeting surprised all of the
boards.
A. Mike coming B. Mike came C. Mike coming D. Mike’s coming
2. It’s no use _______ that you didn’t know the
rules.
A. you pretend B. you pretending C. your pretending D. your pretend
Change the following into the simple sentences.
That Peter didn’t attend the meeting made it put off.
2．动名词作表语
1. Her work is ______( look )after the
children.
2. My aim is ______( go ) to Tsinghua
University.
3. One of my bad habit is ______(bite )
nails（指甲）.
3．动名词作宾语
mecafps+doing (mind, miss, excuse, enjoy, escape consider, admit(承认)advise, appreciate=enjoy, avoid, finish, practise, suggest, stop)delay, imagine, include, keep, quit, resist, risk, understand, be used to, look forward to, object to, pay attention to, etc.
以及介词后接动名词doing
He was in low spirits and even consider _____(go ) away.
Practise _____( put ) your hand to the ground.
I can’t help ______( have ) the trip to Britain.
Don’t tell me you always escape _____( fine) because you have a fast sports car.
Leave off ______(bite) your nails!
He didn’t feel like ______( work ), so he suggested _____( spend ) the day in the garden.
You certainly mustn’t miss _______( see ) the wonderful film.
The doctor advised ______( stay ) longer in hospital.
I couldn’t imagine that ______( be ) possible.
We appreciate your ______( want ) ______( help ) us in our difficulties.
We can’t stand ______( pooh-pooh) every new idea.
Michael has delayed ______( write ) to her till today.
The law forbids ______( sell )liquor to
children.
They all suggested ______( give ) more chances.
Can you imagine ______( leave ) standing outside for a whole night.
They built the banks to prevent the
area from ______( flood).
Women do mind ______( smoke ) by men.
动名词与不定式的不同含义：
be afraid to do 不敢、害怕、胆怯去
做某事
be afraid of doing 担心、恐怕出现
She was afraid ______( wake ) her husband up, for he had bad temper.
She was afraid ______( of wake ) her husband, for he was ill.
2) forget to do sth.忘记去做某事（未
做）
forget doing sth.忘记做过了某事（已
做）
The light in the office is off. It was she
who turned it off, but she herself forgot _______( turn ) it off.
The light in the office is still on. She
forgot ______(turn )it off.
3)remember to do sth.记着去做某事（未
做）
remember doing sth.记着做了某事（已做）
Do you remember ______(meet) me at a party last year
You must remember ______( leave) tomorrow.
4) stop to do sth.
stop doing sth.
5) regret to do sth.
regret doing sth.
I regret _____( go ) to his home town.
I regret _____( tell ) you the truth.
6)try to do sth.
try doing sth.
You must try _____( do ) it again.
Let’s try _____( do ) the work in some other way.
7) mean to do sth.
mean doing sth.
If it means _____( delay ) more than a week,I’ll not wait.
I mean _____( go ), and nothing can stop me.
8) go on to do sth.
go on doing sth.
9) like/love/start/begin/hate/continue to do sth.
doing sth.
10)Sth.wnat/require/need to be done
doing.
The temple needs____( rebuild).
The children require____ (educate).
动名词复合结构的一般规则是：
1.逻辑主语是有生命的名词：作主语时，须用名词或代词所有格；作宾语时，也可用普通格或人称代词宾格。
Tom’s (His) coming is what we have expected.
She didn’t mind Jack/ Jack’s (him/ his) coming here.
2.逻辑主语是无生命名词时，只用普通格。
Is there any hope of our winning the match
3.逻辑主语是指示代词或不定代词this, that, somebody, someone, nobody, none, anybody, anyone时， 只用普通格。
She was disturbed by somebody shouting outside.
11)canit help doing sth.
can’t help do sth.
can’t help but do sth.不能不，忍不
住
1.I couldn’t help___(think) of my childhood when I saw the picture.
2.I’m sorry I can’t help___(lend) you the money, for I’m short of it nowadays.
3.I can’t help but___(cry).
9) permit, allow, advise, consider, admit doing sth. sb./wh to do sth.
1.Do you consider _____( buy ) this kind of book
2.Is he considered _____( take ) this position
3.Is he considered _____( send ) to work in Tibet
分词
分词：分词相当于形容词、副词。作表语、定语、宾语补足语和状语。分词可分为现在分词、过去分词。
一般式 完成式
现在分词 doing having done
having been done
过去分词 done
1）分词与动名词作表语时的区别：
1.Our plan is ______( finish ) the task
before May.
2. Tom’s job was ______( guard ) the
factory.
3. His lecture is ______( interest ),
which made us ______( interest ).
4. The situation is ______( encourage).
2)现在分词和过去分词作状语的区别：
分词与逻辑主语（即句子主语）关系来决定分词的语态，主语能发出分词的动作用主动doing/having done，不能发出分词的动作用被动done/having been dong。
分词的动作如发生在谓语动词之后doing(用一般式)，如发生在谓语动词之前，(用完成式)having done。
A)
1._____(see ) those picture, he couldn’t help thinking of those days in Yan’an.
2._____( turn ) round, Fanny found an ambulance driving up.
3_____( water ) the vegetables, they began to pick up the apples.
4._____( finish ) the work, he went back home on foot.
5._____( inspire ) by Dr. Chen’s speech, they decided to study maths harder.
6._____( persuade) by her mother, she gladly went there alone.
7.Warmly _____( praise ) for his work, he was too excited to fall asleep.
8._____( arrive ) at the station, we found the train gone.
9._____( send ) the child to bed, she began to correct the pupils’ exercises.
10._____( surround), the enemy found nowhere to hide and had to give up.
11.Once _____( arm ), we are afraid of nothing.
12.While _____( cross )the street, look out for cars.
13.When _____( walk ) in the park, Mathilde met with her old friend.
14.While_____( criticize ),she cried.
15.She came earlier than _____( expect).
16.Everything goes well as _____( plan ).
17.She still made the same mistakes though ____( tell) several times.
18.____( give ) more time, we are sure to do it better.
19.The doctor did everything he could _____( save ) the patient.
20._____(improve )his English, Wang Ling works much harder.
作目的、结果状语的区别：
21. Li Ming works hard _____( pass ) the exams.
22. Li Ming works hard _____( try ) to pass the exams.
23. He returned home _____( find ) the house broken into.
24.His father died, _____( leave ) him nothing but debts.
25. Football is played over a century, _____( make ) it popular.
26. Bees suck honey into their stomachs, ____( get ) thicker and thicker.
判断下列对或错：
1. Seeing from the hill, the city looks more
beautiful.
2. Having had dinner, the dishes were
washed.
3. Leaving at home, the little girl felt much
afraid.
一些独立结构：
1. Generally _____( speak ), we have learnt a lot in this school.
2. _____(judge ) from his appearance, he is somebody.
3. _____( tell ) you the truth, your work is terrible.
将上列1-18句分词部分改成从句：
B)伴随状语
1. The boy lay in bed, _____( listen ) to music.
2. It’s a bad habit to talk to others, ____( look ) aside.
3. The professor entered the room, _____( follow ) by his assistants.
4. The visiting Minister expressed his satisfaction with the talk, ____( add )that he had enjoyed his stay here.
5. The boy stood in front of the teacher,
_____( criticize).
独立主格结构
（ 所谓独立主格结构，分词的逻辑主语不是句子主语，而是有自己的逻辑主语时，叫独立主格结构。）
A)1. Today ____( be ) Sunday, the library doesn’t open.
2. There _____( be ) no buses, we had to walk home.
3. The signal _____( give ), the bus started.
4. Weather ____ ( permit ), we’ll visit the Great Wall.
5. A teacher from England ____( teach ) us English, we’re sure to learn it well.
B) 6. With him ____( give ) us a lead, our team is to win.
7. With the worker ____( lead ), the Young Pioneers went through the forest and started towards the mountain village.
8. Many people spoke aloud in front of our classroom, with nobody ____( stop ) them.
9. He was looking at the screen again, with the machine ____( turn ) on.
10. The girl felt uneasy with the whole class _____( stare ) at her.
11. Now the patient could walk with the nurse ____( support ) him.
12. With the machinery _____( do ) all the work, we finished the task last month.
13. She lay on the grass with her eyes _____( close ).
14. You might catch a cold with your feet _____( expose).
3）现在分词与过去分词作宾语补足语的区别：
whom flns+sb do (经常性动作)
+sb doing sth.（正在进行）
+sth done（被动）
1.I used to see these boys ____( play ) on the playground.
2.I saw them _____( play ) the computer this afternoon.
3.Have you _____( heard ) this song _____( sing ) before
4.She was surprised to find the house _____( break ) into when she went back home.
5． Unfortunately, he got his wallet _____( steal ) on the bus.
6. We are interested in hearing him _____( tell ) us the news.
7. He won’t have us _____( criticize ) him.
8. It’s a bad habit to leave the work ______( undo ).
9. Yesterday I caught him _____( take ) my dictionary when I went into
the classroom.
4） 分词作定语：
A) 1. Do you know the man _____(speak ) at the meeting
2. Do you know the man _____( praise ) at the meeting
3. The building _____( put ) up last now is our library.
4. The building _____( put ) up now will be our new company.
5. The building _____( put ) up next year will be our new company.
6. There was an old temple _____
( stand ) at the top of the hill.
7. There is a sports meeting _____
( hold ) next Tuesday.
8. There was an old man ______( live ) in the village.
B) 1.He was the first person
_____(come) to the classroom this
morning.
2.The only thing _____(get )is the diamond necklace.
3.Everything _____(do ) needs praising.
4. Do you have anything____( say )
5. Here are some books for you _____( read ).
5) 作定语时， 一个词放在前面， 短语放在后面。（注意语态）
The _____( surprise) news made us
_____(surprise).
2. The _____( interest )man, Chaplin, interested us all.
3. The _____( excite )football match attracted many football funs.
4. There appeared a _____( worry ) look on his face.
5. She tried to hide her _____( dissatisfy) expression in public.(共15张PPT)
Dec.18, 2004
不能单独作谓语，没有人称和数的变化，但有时态和语态的变化。
还可以有自己的宾语和状语的动词形式。在句中做非谓的成分。
主要形式：不定式to do 动名词doing 分词doing done
1. He stood there, tired from a whole day of work, thinking of
a way to escape from the construction site.
2. The news conference, to be held in that hall, has already
been crowded with reporters.
3. Having reached the very peak of the Everest, the climbers
cheered against the fierce north wind.
4. He keeps buying expensive maps. He must have more
than 200 by now.
5. I heard the girl singing in the classroom.
6. The man talking with my father is Mr. Wang.
状语
状语
(宾语)补语
定语
定语
宾语
找出下列句子中的非谓语动词（含短语）
2.看“_____”上要填的非谓语动词与相关的名或代
词（多是主语）的逻辑关系 主谓关系 动宾关系
　 主动关系 被动关系
to do 一般式
进行式
完成式
doing 一般式
完成式
done
非谓语动词解题一般思路
1.分析句子成分，看“_____”上要填谓语还是非谓语
to write to be written
to be writing ————
to have written to have been written
writing being written
having written having been written
———— written
3.根据语境判断非谓具体为主动或被动的哪一类
主要是看:
1.非谓本身自带的时间状语
2.谓语动词与非谓发生的先后关系
实战练习题
方法总结：
谓非谓; 明语态; 定时态。
Who can you imagine ____ to that party
A. inviting B. being invited
C. was invited D. has invited
2. The way he thought of ___ the problem is a good one.
A. solving B. to solve C. solves D. solved
3. I particularly enjoyed driving through the countryside with you and saw the changing colors of the leaves on the trees.
(04辽宁83改错)
seeing
Examples
返回
The problem____ next is of great importance.
The problem____ now is of great importance.
The problem____ just now is of treat importance.
A. discussed B. being discussed C. to be discussed
---Li Ming is said ____ abroad. Do you know what
country
---Yes, In London.
A. to have studied B. to study
C. to be studying D. to have been studying
根据非谓自带的时间状语确定主或被动的具体形式
根据上下文的谓语动词与非谓动词发生的先后关系确定
例
例
he studied in
he will study in
he studies in
A ______
B __
C ___
C
A
B
NMET 1999 第14题
返回
非谓语动词高考选练
1.(NMET1996第23题) _____ in thought, he almost ran into
the car in front of him.
A. Losing B. Having lost C. Lost D. To lose
2. [NMET2003] A cook will be immediately fired if he is
found ___ in the kitchen.
A. smoke B.smoking C. to smoke D. smoked
3.[02春] Prices of daily goods___ through a computer, can
be lower than store prices.
A. bought B. are bought C. been bought D. buying
4.[02上海春] With a lot of difficult problems___, the
newly-elected president is having a hard time.
A. settled B. settling C. to settle D. being settled
5.[02上海] In London, missing a bus means ___for another
hour.
A. wait B.waiting C. to be waiting D. to wait
补充
1.have something to do
2.be to blame
3.be to rent
4.need /want/require doing
5.be worth doing
6.with sth. to do/to be done
....
补充1
补充2
With a lot of difficult problems___, the newly-elected president is having a wonderful time.
A. settled B. settling C. to settle D. being settled
try mean
like love prefer
forget remember regret
＋ to do/doing
不定式补充
6. [03上海] Generally speaking, ___ according to the directions, the drug has no side effect.
A. when taking B. when taken
C. when to take D. when to be taken
7.[02上海春] When___, the museum will be open to the
public next year.
A. completed B. completing
C. being completed D. to be completed
8. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his
mother told him_____. (NMET95 35)
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to
9.With everything she needed____, she left the shop.
A. buying B. to buy C. bought D. to be bought
10. The meeting ___ tomorrow is of great importance.
A. held B. being held
C. to be held D.was to be held
11. European football is played in 80 countries, ___ it the
most popular sport in the world. (NMET98)
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
从句省略补充
补充
1. His parents died, leaving him an orphan.
2. Her father left home ten years ago, never to return.
3. The news reporters hurried to the airport,
only_________ the film stars had left.
(用tell的正确形式填空)(04福建)
to be told
12.[00全国] They discussed the plan they would like to
see___ the next year.
A. carry out B. to carry out
C. carried out D. carrying out
13. I’m examining the composition he has just finished
___ the possible mistakes in it.
A. to correct B. correct C. corrected D. correcting
14. The program was so _____ that the children kept their
eyes_____ on the screen.
A. exciting, fixed B. exciting , fixing
C. excited, fixed D. excited, fixing
15. It ___ a hot day, we’d better go swimming.
A. is B. to be C. been D. being
其他特殊形式补充
____ a rainy day; we decided not to go there.
A. Being B. It was C. To be D. It being
与句子的主语无逻辑上的主谓或动宾关系的非谓形式
1. 独立主格的非谓形式
（1） There being no buses, we had to walk home.
（2） Weather___, we'll go out for a walk.
　 A. permitted　 B. permitting　 C. permits　 D. for permitting
2. 用作连词的非谓形式
（1） It matters little what you use your money on,
provided you use it wisely.
（2） Supposing you are right, it will be possible for him to do so.
3. 作独立成分用的非谓形式
（1） Judging from his clothes, he is very poor.
（2） Strictly speaking, she is not honest.
（3） To tell you the truth, the beautiful girl is a cheat.
（4） To make things worse, she was late for the meeting.
16.While shopping, people sometimes can’t help___ into
buying something they don’t really need. (96上海14)
A. to persuade B. persuading
C. being persuaded D. be persuaded
17. She can’t help ____ the house because she’s busy making
a cake. (97 上海12)
A to clean B. cleaning
C. cleaned D. being cleaned
18.I would love _____ to the party last night but I had to work
extra hours to finish a report. (NMET 97第12题)
A. to go B. having gone C. going D. to have gone
would/should love to do表示“想，希望”，
而would/should love to have done则表示“本希望，而未实现”的意思。
其他如: planed/wished to have done
had planed/ expected to do 也有此用法
补充
只接动名词作宾语的常见动词有十六个：
resist 、 mind 、 suggest 、 delay 、 keep on 、look forward to、enjoy、include、appreciate、imagine、practise、finish、succeed in、consider、can’t help、miss。
这样记：抗议推迟盼喜报，
心想练成考不错.
只接动名词
的动词还有
怎么记住？
2. The first thing I do every morning is listen to the English
programme.
---I am leaving for Beijing, Do you have anything＿ to your
sister there
---No, thanks. A. taken B. to be taken C. taking D. take
1.能跟不定式作宾语补足语且省去to的常见动词有这些：
feel 、hear、listen to 、 make、let、have、look at、
see、watch、notice、help。
改错：The girl is often listened to sing that beautiful song.
不定式的补充
to
用“一感、两听、三让、四看、半帮助” 来记忆！
1.I have a lot of homework to do.有
2.Just now I have her go there.
3.Don’t have the fire burning all night!
4.I have had my radio repaired.
扩展
返回
省to的情况
省do的情况
1) A: Have you seen the movie
B: No, not yet. But I expect to.
2) A: How do you feel about the book
B: I haven’t read it. And I don’t care to.
3) A: Are you on holiday
B: No, but I would like to be.
4）A: I haven’t got everything ready yet.
B: But you should / ought to have.
状语从句的简化(用非谓）
主从句主语相同时,可用短语替换
1. 从句含有be 动词
When (he was) a student in the university, he read a lot.
While (he was) waiting, he took out a magazine to read.
I didn’t know it until _____ (用tell的正确形式填空 ).
2.从句中无be动词
Since I came to Beijing, I have made many new friends.
→(Since) coming …
After I finished my homework, I fed the dog.
→(After ) finishing …
返 回
told
(I was) told
Thank you!(共28张PPT)
Adverbial Clauses
Huang
Yaochun
1.Adverbial Clauses of Time:（时间状语从句）
when, while, as, before, after, since, until,
as soon as, every time, each time, the
moment, by the time…
I.when
1)When he comes here tomorrow,I will call
you. (at the time that)
2)Henry is in charge of the office when
Mr.Smith is away. (during the time that)
II.while
1)While he was walking in the street,
he met Tim. (分词短语）
While walking in the street,he met Tim.
Walking in the street ,he met Tom.
2)He learned to speak English while he was
here.
3)I like tea while she likes coffee.
III. as (一边...一边,随着）
1)As they were picking tea,the girls were
singing happily.
2) She sang as she worked.
IV. Before
1)It won’t be long before he finishes his writing.
V. After
1)After he (had) finished his work,he left there.
He (had) finished his work before he left here.
After finishing his work,he left here.
Having finished his work,he left here.
VI. since (from the time that)
1)I have known him ever since he was a boy.
2)I have worked here since I graduated from
the university.
3)It is (has been)two years since he came here.
VII. until (till) (up to the time that)
1)He will not go to bed until(till) his
mother comes.
2)Until she told me, I had no idea of what
they had said.
3)It is not until his mother comes home
that he will go to bed.(强调结构）
VIII .as soon as
1)As soon as she got home,she began to cook.
On getting home,she began to cook.
*IX. every time,each time,the moment
1)Every time/each time I catch a cold,I
have pain in my back.
2)There was an applause the moment (as
soon as) she appeared on the stage.
X. by the time
1)By the time he arrived,the train had already
gone.
2)By the time he comes,we will already have left.
Exercises:
1.They walked out of the room ___the
meeting was over.
2.They must stay in school ____they are
sixteen.
3.Take the medicine ____you go to bed.
4.I knew nothing about it _______he told me.
5.It is more than five years ____we started to
learn English.
6._____he talked on,he got more and more
excited.
7.We should strike ____the iron is hot.
2.Adverbial Clauses of Reason(原因状语从句）
because, since, as,
now that, for
I. because
1)The ship changed its course because there
was a storm.
The ship changed its course because of
the storm.
2)Because he was ill,he didn’t go to school.
He was ill ,so he didn’t go to school.
Being ill, he didn’t go to school.
II.since
1)Since you are ill,you’d better go to see
the doctor.
2)Since you do not understand ,I will
explain again.
III.as
1)As she was late for class,she had to say
sorry.
2)As Jane was the oldest in this family,
she had to look after the others.
IV. now that
1)Now that class is over,let’s go to play
football.
V.for
He must be ill, for he is absent today.
Exercises:
1.The teacher must be strict with you ____
they want you to make great progress.
2.____your father is well again,you no longer
have anything to worry about.
3.The day breaks,_____the birds are singing.
3.Adverbial Clauses of Condition
(条件状语从句）
I.if
1)If he had worked harder,he would have passed
the exam.
2)If you work harder,you will succeed.
Work harder, and you will succeed.
Work harder,or you won’t succeed.
Working harder,you will succeed.
II.unless
1)We can’t write to Mary unless she tells us
her address.
We can’t write to Mary if she doesn’t tell us
her address.
*III.as long as(只要 )
1)I will never give up learning as long as I live.
2)You may borrow the book as long as you
keep it clean.
*IV.on condition that（条件是）
We’ll let you use the room on condition that
you keep it tidy.
*V.in case(万一）
You’d better take your raincoat with you in case
it rains.
4.Adverbial Clauses of Place (地点状语从句）
You may find him where his parents live.
5.Adverbial Clauses of Purpose (目的状语从句）
so that /in order that
They set out early so that (in order that) they
might arrive there in time.
They set out early in order to( so as to)
arrive there in time.
6.Adverbial Clauses of Result（结果状语从句）
so…that…,such…that…
1) It is so good a story that I’ll never forget it.
It is such a good story that I’ll never forget it.
2)such+adj.+名词 +that clause
3)so +adj./adv. +that clause
4)so + many/few + 复数名词 +that clause
much/little+不可数名词
7.Adverbial Clauses of Comparison（比较状语从句）
as…as,not as(so)…as,
more/-er…than,less…than
1)He doesn’t work so hard as you do.
2)There is as much ink in bottle A as in bottle B.
3)The more you worry,the less you’ll succeed.
4) Gold is much heavier than any other metal.
8.Adverbial Clauses of Concession(让步状语从句）
1)Although(Though) he is old ,he works hard.
He is old,but he works hard.
*2)Even though (even if)you say so,I don’t
believe it. (即使 )
*3. Difficult as the work is,we’ll finish it on time.
Though the work is difficult,we’ll finish it
on time.
4.Whenever(No matter when) you come to
our country,you will be warmly welcomed.
5.Wherever(No matter where) he goes,he always
brings two bodyguards with him.
9.Adverb Clauses of Manner(方式状语从句 )
1) You must try to do as I did.
2)Let’s do as Mrs. Li teaches us.
*3)He talks as if he knew all about it. (好象 )
Exercises:Fill in the blank with a conjunction.
(where, unless, if, as, such…that, even though , as if, now that)
1.A driver should slow down ___the
roads are narrow.
2.___you mail the letter today, it won’t arrive
there.
3.___he has time,he will come and see us later.
4.Tom made __great progress ___his headmaster praised him at the school meeting.
5.___his father knew what he had done, the boy was going to be in trouble.
6.We will stay a little longer ___it is very late.
7.She pretended to laugh loudly ___the story
were very funny.
8.Poor ___his English was,yet Mr.Li made
himself understood in England.
9.You should do ___your parents ask you to do.
Bye-Bye !(共30张PPT)
虚拟语气
虚拟语气是一种特殊的动词形式，一是用来表示说话人所说的话不是一个事实，而是一种假设、猜测、怀疑等(在条件从句中或让步状语从句中)；一是表示说话人的愿望、要求、命令、建议等 (在宾语从句、表语从句、同位语从句)。
虚拟语气的概念
虚拟语气
一、在条件从句中 (叫虚拟条件句)，表示与事实相反的条件。分三种情况(以 do 为例)：
虚拟语气在 在条件从句中
表示与事实情况相反 条件从句的谓语形式 主句的谓语形式
表示现在情况 过去式(did)
(be常用 were) Would / could / might / should (用于第1人称) +动词原形(do)
表示过去情况 过去完成式(had +done 上面4个情态动词+have done
表示将来情况 ①过去式 (did)
②should + do
③were to do 4个情态动词 + do
虚拟语气
[例句]
If you had come a few minutes earlier, you would have met him.
要是你早来几分钟的话，你就能见到他了。(与过去事实相反)
2. If it were sunny tomorrow, I would come to see you.
明天要是天气好的话，我来看你。(与将来事实可能相反)
3. If I were you, I would go at once.
假如我是你的话，我会马上走。(与现在事实相反，事实上我不可能是你)
虚拟语气在 在条件从句中
虚拟语气
二、省略 if 的条件从句
当从句中有 were, had 或 should 时，可省略if ，而把它们放在句首。
If I were to meet him tomorrow, I should ask him about it.
Were I to meet him tomorrow,…
If he should fail in the experiment this time, he would try again.
Should he fail in the experiment…
虚拟语气在 在条件从句中
虚拟语气
三、错综时间的条件句
即从句与主句的动作发生的时间不同。此时，需要按时间来确定虚拟形式。如：
If they had studied hard, they could do it easily now. 如果他们以前努力学习的话，现在干的就会容易些。
If he had not taken my advice, he wouldn't do it much better like this. 如果他不听取我的建议，他就不会干得这样好。
虚拟语气在复合句中的应用：
虚拟语气
1、记住：这些动词后面接的宾语从句：表示愿望( wish), 建议(suggest, advice, propose, recommend) ，要求(demand, request, require, insist), 命令(order, command)等。
2、除wish外，其它动词用should + do 构成, should 可以省略。
3、 wish接宾语从句有三种情况：
1) 现在：用过去式
2) 过去：用过去完成式 (had done)
3) 将来：用情态动词(would / could) + do
虚拟语气在：在宾语从句中
虚拟语气
[例句]
1. I wish she would be on my side. 我希望她能站在我一边。
2. I wish I were 30 years younger.
我但愿自己能年轻三十岁。
3. I wish (that) you would get a good job.
我希望你能找到一个好职业。
4. He wished he hadn't done it.
他想要是他没这样做该多好。
5. He ordered that the students wash the clothes every week by themselves. 他要求学生每周都要自己洗衣服。
虚拟语气在：在宾语从句中
虚拟语气
4、记住：insist / suggest 各有两种意思，要用不同的语气
Insist 表示“坚决要求”时，用虚拟形式，即 should + do;
Insist 表示“坚称，坚持说”时，用陈述语气，表示事实。
Suggest 表示“建议”时，用虚拟形式。
Suggest 表示“表明、暗示”时，用陈述语气。
[例句]
The teacher suggested that we (should) clean the blackboard after class. 老师建议我们课后把黑板擦了。
He insisted that all of us should be there on time by any means. 他坚持要我们大家想尽办法按时去那儿。
He insisted that he was right.
虚拟语气在：在宾语从句中
虚拟语气
在would (had) rather(宁愿) 引导的宾语从句中
当从句表示现在或将来的时间时,谓语动词要用一般过去时;表示过去时间时,谓语动词要用过去完成时。 I would rather he came tomorrow than today.
虚拟语气在：在宾语从句中
虚拟语气
在句型 “It is important (necessary, strange, natural) that .... ” 中，that 后面的从句中的谓语动词用： should + 动词原形
[例句]
It’s necessary that we should have a walk now. 我们有必要出去散散步。
It’s natural that she should do so. 她这样做是很自然的。
It’s important that we should take good care of the patient. 重要的是我们要照顾好病人。
虚拟语气在 在主语从句中
虚拟语气
主句的主语常是表示说话人愿望(wish / desire)、建议(suggestion / advice) 要求(requirement / demand)、命令(order, command)等的名词，表语从句的谓语动词用 (should) + do.
Our suggestion is that you (should) be there on time.
虚拟语气在 在表语从句中
虚拟语气
同位语从句的先行词常是表示说话人愿望、建议、要求、命令等的名词。
The suggestion that students (should) learn something practical is worth considering.
Do you know the order that you (should) keep watch.
虚拟语气在 在同位语从句中
虚拟语气
在as if 从句中，常用虚拟形式，即表示与现在事实相反，用过去式；与过去事实相反用过去完成式 (had done).
一、as if 连接表语从句
she looked as if she were made of ice.
她看起来似乎是冰做的
he looked as if he hadn’t slept for two days.
二、as if 连接让步状语从 句
She looked after the boy as if he were her own son.
她照顾这男孩就像自己的儿子一样。
He speaks to us as if he had been there. 他给我们讲的好象他去过那儿。
虚拟语气在 在 as if 从句中
虚拟语气
1. if only 意为：若是...那该多好啊; 真希望...; 只要, 只要...就好
表示现在的情况,应用过去式; 如果是过去的情况,应用过去完成时态
If only I had arrived in time!
If only she didn’t drive so fast.
2. It’s (high/right) time that…
that 从句要用虚拟语气：谓语用过去时或should + do
It’s time that you left here.
虚拟语气中的几个特例
虚拟语气
3. 一些介词短语, 如:but for(要不是), without, otherwise(否则), in that case(如果是那样的话), 表示含蓄的条件,这时主句要用虚拟语气
Without your help, we would not have made such rapid progress.
虚拟语气中的几个特例
虚拟语气
1、表示说话人的要求、建议、命令时，常用(should) do表示虚拟形式, 主要用于名词性从句中。
2、其它情况常用两种形式：表示与现在事实相反，用过去式；表示与过去事实相反用过去完成式。
简单的归纳
虚拟语气
Alan ___ the party if he had gone to London.
A. would have missed B. had missed
C. would miss D. missed
2. If I knew you were coming, I ___ you at the airport.
A. had met B. met
C. would meet D. would have met
Exercises
A
D
虚拟语气
3. If only I ___ to my parents! (But I didn’t.)
A. listened B. had listened
C. should listen D. would listen
4. Tom suggested that Ann ___ the house.
A. sell B. sold
C. shall sell D. would sell
5. I wish this bus ___ to the university.
A. go B. went
C. has gone D. had gone
B
A
B
虚拟语气
6. Simon looks as though he never ___ a square meal(吃得饱), though his parents feed him very well.
A. get B. getting C. got D. should get
7. He is talking so much about America as if he ___ there.
A. had been B. were C. was D. been
8. I ___ you some money, but I hadn’t got any then.
A. would lend B. would have lent
C. could lend D. may have lent
C
A
B
虚拟语气
9. – Have you ever been to Beijing
-- No, but I wish I ___.
A. have B. will C. do D. had
10. I don’t think it is the right time that you __.
A. will go B. went C. go D. must go
11. When a pencil is partly in a glass of water, it looks as if it ＿＿＿＿. A. breaks B. has broken
C. were broken D. had been broken
D
B
C
虚拟语气
虚拟语气
虚拟语气
虚拟语气
虚拟语气
虚拟语气
虚拟语气
虚拟语气
虚拟语气(共17张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法专项训练
动 名 词
南莫中学高三英语备课组
一、动名词的形式
主动形式
被动形式
一般式
doing
being done
完成式
having done
having been done
二、功能及用法
1．动名词（短语）做主语，如：
Writing the book has taken up all his spare time.
Seeing is believing.
注①：动名词（短语）做主语还常用于下列结构：
a. It’s no use sending him over. It’s too late already.
It’s no good talking a lot without doing anything.
It’s a waste of time arguing about it.
b. There’s no joking about such matters.
There’s no saying what he’ll be doing next.
There’s no telling what he’s going to do.
注②：动名词作主语与不定式作主语的区别：
动名词作主语通常表示抽象的或泛指的动作，一般不与特定的动作执行者联系在一起；不定式作主语通常表示具体的动作或行为，往往与特定的动作执行者联系在一起，如：
It’s no use crying over spilt milk. (抽象)
He realized that to go on like this was no use. (具体)
在实际运用中，一般可以互换，差异不大。但在下列几种情况中不能互换：
a. 当表语是动名词时，主语也要用动名词；当表语是不定式时，主语也要用不定式，如：
Seeing is believing.
To see is to believe.
b. 动名词和不定式作主语，一般都可以使用形式主语it，而将动名词或不定式放在句尾。但是在下列句型中，一般宜用动名词，不宜用不定式来代替：
It’s no use doing …
It’s no good doing…
It’s a waste of time doing …
例如：
It’s no use going there today; he won’t be at home.
It’s a waste of time arguing about it.
It’s no good waiting here. Let’s walk home.
而在It’s important … / It’s necessary … / It’s advisable … / It’s essential … / It’s fitting … 这类句型中，只能用不定式，如：
It’s important to learn foreign languages.
It’s quite necessary to read it many times.
2．动名词（短语）作表语，如：
Their job is building houses.
His job is raising pigs.
注①：动名词作表语与不定式作表语的区别：
动名词作表语时表示比较抽象的一般行为、习惯；不定式作表语时表示具体的某一次动作，特别是将来的动作，试比较：
My favourite sport is swimming.
The first thing for us to do is to improve our pronunciation.
注②：动名词作表语与现在分词作表语的区别：
动名词作表语时相当于名词，说明主语的含义及内容，它与主语是同等关系，主语与表语互换位置不影响句子的基本含义，但不可用副词来修饰。
现在分词作表语时相当于形容词，说明主语的特征、性质、状态等，主语与表语不可互换位置，但可用very, quite等副词来修饰，如：
My job is looking after the children.
Our duty is serving the people heart and soul.
The situation is encouraging.
This cake is very inviting.
The volleyball match we watched was very exciting.
3．动名词（短语）用作宾语的情况很多，如：
Hearing the words, she couldn’t help thinking of her past bitterness.
We all avoided mentioning that matter.
★ 能用动名词作宾语的动词有两类：
一类是只能用动名词作宾语的动词，其中有：avoid, admit, consider, delay, advise, dislike, enjoy, escape, excuse, finish, give up, can’t help, imagine, keep (on), don’t mind, miss, practise, put off, stop, go on, resist, suggest等，如：
Mary is considering changing her job.
I enjoy working with you.
Would you mind ringing me up tomorrow
另一类是既可以用动名词，又可以用不定式作宾语的动词，其中有：begin, cannot bear, continue, forget, hate, intend, like, love, plan, prefer, propose, regret, remember, start, try, want, need, can’t afford等。
上述动词尽管可以带两种结构作宾语，但用法不尽相同，需要注意下列几个情况：
A. 在begin, start, cease, continue, cannot bear, hate, like, love, prefer, propose 等动词后，两种结构意义无大的出入，如：
She can’t bear being laughed at / to be laughed at.
但是在下列情况下，通常用不定式：
a. 在would like / love / prefer / hate 后表示一个特定的新动作时：
I’d like to buy a suit.
I’d hate to disappoint them.
b. 当谓语动词已用进行时态时：
The water is beginning / starting to boil.
I’m starting to work on my essay next week.
c. 在begin 等后，非限定动词由某些状态动词构成时（即：指心理状态或精神活动时）：
She began to believe his story.
He began to realize that he was wrong.
d. 当主语是物，不是人时：
The water started / began to boil.
The ice started / began to melt.
B. 在need, want, deserve等后，可用动名词的主动式表示被动含义，或用不定式的被动式，意义上无差别。但用动名词较为普遍，（这时主语一般是物），如：
The door needs oiling / to be oiled.
C. 有的动词尽管可以用两种结构，但意义明显不同，须认真加以区别：
I forgot to close the door before I left the room.
I forgot having closed the door.
He tried to write better. (尽量努力地写)
He tried writing with a brush. (用毛笔试着写)
I couldn’t help finishing it. (不能不结束某事)
I couldn’t help to finish it. (不能帮助结束某事)
They left off fishing. (停止钓鱼)
They left off to fish. (离开某处出发去钓鱼)
I regret to say that there is no wine in the bottle. (对现在要发生的事表示遗憾、抱歉)
I regret not taking your advice. (后悔)
★ 动名词（短语）还常常跟在短语动词之后，作介词的宾语。常见的有：
insist on / think of / dream of / object to / hear of / prevent … from / keep … from / stop … from / feel like / be engaged in / look forward to / depend on / thank … for / excuse … for / devote … to / set about / spend … in / get (be) used to … / be fond of / be afraid of / be tired of / succeed in / be interested in / be proud of / burst out / give up 等，如：
He insisted on seeing us home.
They all objected to putting the meeting off.
Are you interested in going to the show
I’m thinking of going to town this afternoon.
I don’t feel like eating anything.
She is afraid of falling behind the others.
He finally got tired of doing office work.
She devotes hours to helping Mother with housework on Sunday.
4．动名词（短语）可以和about, against, at, before, after, by, for, besides, from, in, on, upon, without等介词构成短语，在句中作状语，如：
They broke in loud cheers on hearing the news.
He warned me against swimming there.
She left without saying good-bye to us.
Besides cooking and sewing, she had to take care of the children.
He felt uncomfortable about accepting the gift.
They were surprised at your doing that.
5．动名词（短语）可以和介词构成短语作定语，如：
He hasn’t much experience in running factories.
What’s their reason for cancelling the English evening
Have you any objection to going there on foot
He has little hope of passing his examinations.
They don’t approve of his way of looking at things.
I’m glad to have this opportunity of coming to visit your country.
6．动名词还可以作定语，如：
singing competition swimming pool
dining car opening speech
drinking cup living room
typing paper waiting room
writing desk washing machine
frying-pan sleeping-pill
walking stick teaching method
注：动名词作定语表示被修饰名词的用途，它和名词之间没有逻辑上的主谓关系；而现在分词作定语，表示被修饰名词本身的动作、行为，它和名词之间有逻辑上的主谓关系。
三、动名词的复合结构
动名词的复合结构就是前面带有代词或名词的动名词结构。
有时为了明确动名词所表示的动作的执行者，可以在动名词之前加上一个物主代词或名词所有格，来表示动名词逻辑上的主语。有时也可以用人称代词宾格或名词普通格，不过，这主要用于口语中。如：
She won’t hear of us leaving the village.
Do you object to Li Ping’s joining the physics group
注①：如果不是在句子的开头，这个结构常用名词的普通格或人称代词宾格，如：
I don’t like the idea of us / our not helping at all.
I don’t mind Jane buying another one.
注②：如果动名词的逻辑主语是表示无生命的东西的名词，或不定代词，就只能用普通格，不能用所有格，如：
Is there any hope of your team winning the match
The boy was alarmed by someone knocking at the door.
动名词的复合结构有下列用法：
① 作主语：
Their coming to help was a great encouragement to us.
Nothing is worse than our bowing before difficulties.
Lao Li’s (not: Li)going won’t be of much help.
② 作表语：
Our sole worry is your relying too much on yourself.
What’s troubling them is their not having enough machine tools.
③ 作宾语：
Do you mind my reading your paper
Please excuse my interrupting you.
④ 作介词宾语：
They insisted on my staying there for supper.
Do you think there will be any chance of my seeing him again
四、动名词的完成形式与被动形式
动名词的一般形式通常表示一般性动作（即不是明确地在过去、现在或将来发生的动作）或是与谓语所表示的动作同时发生的动作，如：
They are all interested in climbing mountains.
He took a great delight in helping others.
① 如果要表示动名词代表的动作在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，通常用动名词的完成形式，如：
He didn’t mention having met me.
I regret not having taken her advice.
I don’t remember having ever promised you that.
注：在某些动词之后（或在成语中）常用（或可以用）动名词的一般形式表示在谓语动作之前发生的动作，如：
Excuse me for coming late.
I don’t remember ever seeing him anywhere.
② 当一个动名词逻辑上的主语所表示的是这动作的承受者时，这个动名词一般要用被动形式，如：
This question is far from being settled.
He did it without being asked.
They insisted on their being treated as ordinary workers.
He didn’t mind being left at home.
They couldn’t stand being treated like that.
注：如果表示的动作在谓语表示的动作之前发生，有时需要用动名词的完成被动形式，如：
I don’t remember having ever been given a chance to try this method.(共25张PPT)
代 词
I. 代词的分类
人称代词 I , you ，she ，him
疑问代词 who whom what
物主代词 my 、your、hers
关系代词 which 、that、who
反身代词 myself、yourselves
连接代词 who、which、what
相互代词 each other、one another
不定代词 one、each、another、neither
指示代词 this、that、those、these
II. 人称代词的用法
1) 作主语，用主格。作宾语用宾格。She teaches us English.
2)在句中作表语，常用宾格。Who is it It’s me. 但有时用主格。 If I were she, I would’t go there. It was I who told him about it.
3)并列人称代词的顺序。单数：2,3.1. 复数：1,2,3
III.反身代词
1)作宾语。I teach myself mathematics.
　　　　　 She is looking at herself in the mirror.
2) 作介词的宾语。
a. 表示“对比”，“自己”
She loves me for myself, not for my money.
b.）介词＋oneself 的常见用语。
to oneself(对自己），for oneself（亲自，独自；为了自己），of oneself（自己的） ，between oneselves（秘密地）， in oneself（本来, 本身） ，by oneself（单独地，独立地）
3)作同位语，起强调作用。 You yourself told me the story.
Exercise one
1.Yours is not a bad idea ____________.
2. Laura is not quite _________ today.
3. I have the room ______________ .
4. You can call on me. I am ____________ today.
5. What I said just now is only _____________.
6. If you don’t believe me, you can go and see ________________.
7. I don’t know when the door closed ________________.
IV. 指示代词的用法
1).时空的差别 eg. There is this seat here,near me,or there is that one in the fourth row. Which will you have,this or that？
2). This 和 that 在行文叙述上的差别。Eg.
I shall say this to you: he is a poor man.
He was ill. That’s why he didn’t come.
3).that 和 those 用于表比较的结构。
The weather of Beijing is just as good as that of Tianjin.
TV sets made in Nanjing are better than those made here.
4). 打电话时this 表示我,that表示你.
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
一些重要的
不定代词的用法
不定代词有both, either, neither, one, the other, another, little, few, some, any, each, every, no, none等，从实际应用和理解出发，重点学习以下几个：
(一) both, either, neither
(二) one, another, the other
(三) little, a little, few, a few
(四) some / any, no / none, each / every,
many / much
不定代词 含义 数量关系 作定语时名词的数 作主语时动词的数
both 两者都 =2 复数 复数
either 两者中的任何一个 =2 单数 单数
neither 两者都不 =2 单数 单数
all 三者或三者以上都 ≥3 单数或复数 单数或复数
none 三者或三者以上都不 ≥3 ○ 单数或复数
each 每一个 ≥2 单数 单数
every 每一个 ≥3 单数 单数
both, either, neither
both为“两者都”，neither为“两者都不”，either为“两者之一”。这三个单词都用于指两个人或物，在句中可作主语、宾语和定语。
作主语：
1) Both (of them) enjoyed the rice. 他们两人喜欢吃米饭。
2) Neither (of us) is a doctor. 我们俩都不是医生。
3) Either (of you) will go. 随你们哪个去都可以。
注意：作主语时，both后面的谓语动词用复数。neither, either后面的谓语动词一般用单数形式。
作定语：
1) Both Zhang Hua's father and mother worker work in a hospital, but neither one is a doctor. 张华的父母亲在一所医院工作，但都不是医生。
2) You may take either apple. 两个苹果任你拿一个。
作宾语：
1) I like both of the toys very much. 我非常喜欢这两件玩具。
2) The boy could find neither of them and went away. 这男孩找不到他们俩就走开了。
both 还可作同位语，它们句中的位置是在动词be，助动词或情态动词的后面，但在实义动词前面。
1) They are both in good health. 他们两人身体都很好。
2) They will both go there. 他们两人都收到那儿去。
3) They both agreed to take part in the birthday party. 他们两人都答应参加生日晚会。
此外，either 可作副词用于否定句，表示 “也”，相当于肯定句中的 “too”。
This is not mine. That is not, either. 这不是我的，那也不是。
neither 表示“也不”的时候，常用在倒装的结构形式中：
I don't like to play football. Neither does he. 我不喜欢踢足球，他也不喜欢。
She hasn't got a bike. Neither have I. 他没自行车，我也没有。
注意，both 和 and, either 和 or, neither 和 nor 可构成连词。表示“和……两个都”，连接主语时谓语动词是复数；“不是……就是”；“或……或”，“既不……也不”；“……都不” 连接两个并列主语时谓语动词的数一般应与靠近谓语动词的主语保持一致，如：
1) Both Zhang and Wang are good students. 张、王都是好学生。
2) Either you or he is right. 不是你就是他对的。
3) Neither he nor i am a scientist. 他和我都不是科学家。
one, another, the other
1. one 常用来作代词，替代前文所出现的可数名词，表示人或物，以避免重复。例如：
I haven't got a ball pen. I'll have to buy one. (= a ball pen) 我没圆珠笔，我得去买一支。
He is one to think more of others. 他是个能多为别人着想的人。
2. the other, another 都可解释为 “另一个”。other 加上定冠词用于两者中的另一个，another 指三者以上中的另一个。例如：
He was two brothers. One is a doctor, the other is a teacher.
We've received two parcels, one from my uncle, the other from my aunt.
I don't like this one, show me another, please.
I've just bought three things. One is a walkman, another is a pocket calculator, the third is a video game.
3. another 还有 “再……” 的意思，例如：
Have another cup of coffee, please. 再喝一杯咖啡吧！
She could have to stay here for another week. 他将在这里再待一个星期。
4. other 有 “另外” 的含义。例如：
Where are the other students 其他学生在哪里？
The boy is much cleverer than the other two. 这孩子比另两个更聪明。
5. others 和 the others 表示复数的泛指和特指。例如：
In the park some are playing games. Others are walking near the river.
I have five colour pencils. One is red, another is blue and the others are green.
6. the rest 也可作 “其余的” 解释。它用作主语时注意谓语动词的单复数。例如：
The rest of his life was spent in America. 他的余生是在美国度过的。
He has eight books. Two are in English. The rest are in Chinese. 他有几本书，两本是英文，其余的是中文。
little, a little, few, a few
1. little 与 a little 两者都用来修饰不可数名词，little 作 “很少”，“几乎没有” 解，有否定的意思，a little 作 “少许”、“有一点” 解，有肯定的意思，例如：
In this way they can make the trip with just a little money. 用这种方法他们只花很少的钱就能旅行。
There is little left, is there 没剩多少了，是吗？
2. few, a few 用来修饰可数名词，前者表示否定，后者表示肯定。
A few of us speak English well. 我们中有几个人英语讲得很好。
There were few eggs is the fridge, so he went to the supermarket and bought some. 冰箱里几乎没鸡蛋了，所以他去超市买了一些。
3. few 作主语时，谓语动词仍用复数，例如：
Few men know this, do they
4. 常用词组有 quite a few (好几个)，only a few (只有一个)，a very few (极少数)。例如：
He studied Chinese for quite a few years. 他学汉语已有好几年了。
some, any, no, none, each, every, many, much
（1）some 和 any:
some (一些，某个) 句中可作主语、宾语、定语等，常用于肯定句。作定语时，它可修饰可数名词和不可数名词，可数名词是单数时，some 表示 “某个” 的意思。例如：
There are some newspapers on the table.
I am going to buy some orange juice.
Have you any questions Yes, I have some.
I have read that in some magazine.
当说活者表示提议、请求或期望得到肯定回答时，在疑问句中也可用 some。例如：
Would you like some tea
Could you lend me some money
any “一些” 用法相同于 some, 但多用于疑问句、否定句或条件从句。例如：
Is there any ink in your pen
Put up your hands if you have any questions.
注意：
1. any 用于肯定句中有 “任何一个” 解。常用于比较级句子中。
Tom runs faster than any other boy in his class.
Tom runs faster than any of the other boys in his class.
2. some, any, every, no 可以与 body, thing, one 构成合成代词，这些代词都作单数看待，表示人或物：
Something is wrong with my bike.
Something is asking to see you.
Nobody is absent.
If you want anything, call me.
（2）no 和 none:
none (没有一个，全不，都不) 是名词性的不定代词，可作主语和宾语，常和 of 短语连用，不以作定语。none 作主语代替不可数名词时，谓语用单数形式。代替可数名词时，谓语用单、复数均可。例如：
None of us is / are from Beijing.
None of the money is mine.
none 与 all 相对，有 “全不” “全部” 的含义，因此 all 是全肯定，none 是 all 的全部否定，但都指三者以上的人或物。
We all made mistakes.
None of us was correct.
no 是形容词性的不定代词，只能用作定语，可修饰可数和不可数名词。no 等于 not a 或 not any 加上名词。例如：
I have no money.
I have not any money.
no one 相当于 nobody，意为没有人，谓语用单数。
（3）each 和 every ：
each (每个，各自的) 强调个体，可作主语、宾语、定语、同位语。
every (每个，一切的) 相当于all，强调整体，只能作定语。
Each boy has a dictionary. 每个孩子都有一本词典。
Every boy has a dictionary. 所有的孩子都有一本词典。
注意： every 构成的常用词组
every other day 每隔一天 / every other five days 每隔五天
every other line 每隔一行 / every five days 每五天
（4）many 和 much ：
many 修饰可数名词的复数，谓语用复数，much 修饰不可数名词，谓语用单数，它们可用在肯定句、否定句和疑问句中，还可在肯定句中作主语或修饰主语。例如：
So much for today.
There are many buses and cars in the street.
many 已被 a lot of, a large number of, a great many 所代替。
much 已被 a lot of, plenty of, a good deal of, a great (large) quantity of 所代替。
但 a lot of / lots of 只能用于肯定句。
1. ______ of them knew about the plan because it was kept a secret.
A. Each B. Any C. No one D. None
2.We couldn’t eat in a restaurant because ______ of us had ______ money on us.
A. all ; no B. any ; no C. none ; any D. no one ; any
3.There is a tree on _______ side of the street.
A. every B. all C. either D. both
4.There is a desk on _______ side of the room.
A. both B. either C. all D. every
5. — Which side can I sit on the boat
— If you sit still, you can sit on _______.
A. every side B. all sides C. both sides D. either side
6.It is said that _______ of his parents have gone to Beijing.
A. all B. every C. both D. either
7.Some students are absent-minded, _______ of them heard what the teacher said.
A. all B. none C. every D. not all
8. — Is _______ here
— No, Bob and Tim have asked for leave.
A. anybody B. somebody C. everybody D. nobody
9.They were all very tired, but ______ of them would stop to take a rest.
A. any B. some C. none D. neither
10. — Can you come on Monday or Tuesday
— I’m afraid _______ day is possible.
A. either B. neither C. some D. any
11. If you want to change for a double room you’ll have to pay _____ ﹩5.
A. another B. other C. more D. each
12. — Which of the two books do you want
— I want _____. Please show me ______.
A. none ; another B. all ; the other
C. neither ; the other D. neither ; another
13._____ side of the street is lined with different shops, ____ of which sell electronic products.
A. Both ; both B. Either ; all
C. Neither ; either D. Either ; both
14. — Do you need anything else
— Yes, we still need ______ aircrafts.
A. more two B. two more
C. other two pieces of D. two other pieces of
15.I had no idea which was better, so I took _____ of them.
A. any B. every C. none D. both
16. — The examination was easy, wasn’t it
— Yes, but I don’t think ______ could pass it.
A. somebody B. anybody C. nobody D. everybody
17.Is there anyone who can do the job . A. None B. No one C. Not one D. Not many ones
18.I wanted some water, but there was in the bottle. A. none B. no C. any D. nothing
19.Tom and Mary have arrived, but students in your class aren't here yet. A. other B. others C. the other D. the others
20.Do September and April have thirty days A. every B. neither C. each D. all
21. of us is active in English class. A. Every B. Every one C. Everyone D. Anybody
22.We have English classes day, Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays. A. each other B. every other C. this and other D. all other
23.Tom had a bad cold. is why he didn't come to school. A. It B. That C. This D. There
24.They invited the three of ,Tom, Bob, and . A. us , me B. we , I C. us , I D. we , we(共14张PPT)
Review
The direct and indirect speech
复习直接引语和间接引语
2004.12.14 周仁理
什么是直接引语和间接引语
直接引语：直接引述别人的话，用“ ”。
间接引语：转述别人的话，不用“ ”。
（直接引语和间接引语通常出现在宾语从句中）
John said,”I like reading adventure stories.”
John said that he liked reading adventure stories.
直接引语变为间接引
发生的变化
（以直接引语是陈述句为例）
时态的变化，人称的变化。
指示代词，时间状语，地点状语和个别动词的变化。
在直接引语和间接引语互换中，汉语和英语有许多相似之处，所以特别要注意句子的意思，而不是生搬硬套。
He said,”I’m afraid I can’t finish the work.” He said (that) he was afraid he could’t finish the work.
She said,”My sister was here one week ago.” She said (that) her sister had been here one week before. She said,”I’ll come here this evening.” She said (that) she would come here that evening
举例说明
变化的特殊情况
间接引语时态不变
当直接引语是客观真理时
当直接引语是具体的过去某年某月某日时
当直接引语是过去完成时态
当地转述，当天转述
He said, “I’ll come here this morning.”
He said he would go there that morning.
He said he will come here this morning.
各种句子种类的直接引语变为间接引语
陈述句
一般疑问句
特殊疑问句
祈使句
直接引语为陈述句时
用that引导间接引语，that 可以省略
say to sb. tell sb.
She said,”I’ll go there tomorrow.”
She said that she’ll go there the next day.
She said to me,”I broke your CD player.”
She told me that she had broken my CD player.
直接引语为一般疑问句
用if 或whether 引导间接引语
用陈述句的语序
say 变为ask
He said,”Is Lucy interested in English ”
He asked if Lucy was interested in English.
直接引语为特殊疑问句
用原来的疑问词引导
用陈述句的语序
say 变为ask
“What can I do for you ” he said to me.
He asked me what he could do for me.
直接引语为祈使句
ask 表示请求:
ask sb. to do sth.
ask sb. not to do sth.
tell 表示命令：
tell sb. to do sth.
tell sb. not to do sth.
直接引语为祈使句
Mr Smith said to his son:
Buy some bread for me.
(tell sb to do sth)
Buy some bread for me,please.
(ask sb to do sth)
Don’t buy some bread for me.
( tell sb not to do sth )
Don’t buy some bread for me,please.
(ask sb not to do sth )
直接引语为另一种请求的句子
直接引语为：Can /Could you…
Will/Would you…
用ask改为间接引语表示请求
1.“Can you lend me two yuan ”he said to me.
He asked me if I could lend him two yuan.
He asked me to lend him two yuan.
2.”Would you please not stay up too late ”she said to me .
She asked me if I would not stay up too late.
She asked me not to stay up too late.(共38张PPT)
06年高考语法复习系列四
形容词和副词
考 点 分 析
1、形容词和副词的基本用法；
2、形容词和副词的位置；
3、形容词和副词的级别；
4、常见形容词和副词的用法比较。
形容词的基本用法
1、形容词的词义
问题1：
--- I’m very ________ with my own cooking. It looks nice
and smells delicious.
--- Mm, it does have a ________ smell. (2002北京)
A. pleasant, pleased B. pleased, pleased
C. pleasant, pleasant D. pleased, pleasant
D
高考中关于形容词的词义的题考得不少，复习时需密切关注。该句中 pleased 表示“感到满意（高兴）的”；pleasant 表示“令人满意（高兴）的”。根据句意不难发现答案为D。
问题2： Their cheerful voice showed that they were having a
____ discussion. (1997上海)
A. noisy B. serious C. complete D. friendly
问题3： If it is quite _______ to you, I will visit you next
Tuesday. （05天津卷）
A. convenient B. fair C. easy D. comfortable
D
该句中 cheerful 是重要的提示词，意为“欢快的”。noisy; serious 以及 complete 显然都与题义无关。是形容词，意为“友好的”，只有它符合题义。
It is convenient for sb. to do sth. 该句型意为：“某人方便（适合）做某事”；一般不说“sb. is convenient to do sth.” 其它三个词显然不符合句义。
A
2、后置定语问题
问题4：
All the people _____ at the party were his supporters. (02北京)
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
解析：形容词作定语修饰名词时，要放在名词的前边。但是下列情况要后置：
proper (本身), present (在场的，出席的), involved
(有关的), concerned (相关的), left (剩下的), objecting
(反对的), mentioned (提及的), selected (当选的)等。
如 the students present (出席的学生)
the cost involved (所需费用)
A
f.
下列情况也要后置： a. some, any, no, every 构成的复合不定代词的修饰语要后
置．如：
something new; nothing serious; anything interesting b. else 修饰不定代词和疑问代词时，要后置。如：
Nobody else is so silly as you are. c. 不定式短语，动名词短语，分词短语，介词短语做定
语要后置。如：
Do you still remember the afternoon in the first year at
college when the professor gave us a chemistry lesson d. 以 a- 开头的形容词做定语要后置．如：alike, alive,
alone, asleep, afraid, awake… 如：
He is the only man awake at that time.
巩固练习：
I can’t get a good picture on my TV set. There must be something ____ with it.
A. bad B. matter C. the matter D. the wrong
2. _____ to take this adventure course will certainly learn a lot of useful skills.
A. Brave enough students B. Enough brave students
C. Students brave enough D. Students enough brave
3. There is _____ to hold the water.
A. nothing big enough B. nothing enough big
C. big enough nothing D. enough big nothing
C
C
A
3、以-ly 结尾的形容词
问题5：
What he said sounds ________. (1993上海)
nicely B. pleasantly C. friendly D. wonderfully
解析：1） 大部分形容词加-ly 可构成副词。但 friendly，deadly，lovely，lonely，likely，lively，ugly，brotherly，manly, timely, worldly (老于世故的) 仍为形容词。 改错：(错） She sang lovely. （对） Her singing was lovely. 　　 （错） He spoke to me very friendly. 　　 （对） He spoke to me in a very friendly way. 2）有些以-ly 结尾既为形容词，也为副词。 　　 daily，weekly，monthly，yearly，early 　　 The Times is a daily paper. It is published daily.
C
多个形容词修饰名词的顺序
问题1
John Smith, a successful businessman, has a car. （04辽宁）
A．large German white B．large white German
C．white large German D．German large white
多个形容词修饰名词时，其顺序为： 　 限定词--数词--描绘词--(大小，长短，形状，新旧，颜色) --出处--材料性质，类别--名词
根据这个公式，就不难排列出：大小 + 颜色 + 出处，故选择B。
B
问题2: This _______ girl is Lind’s cousin. (05北京卷)
A. pretty little Spanish B. Spanish little pretty
C. Spanish pretty little D. little pretty Spanish
问题3：One day they crossed the ____bridge behind the palace. 　 A. old Chinese stone　　 B. Chinese old stone　　
C. old stone Chinese　　 D. Chinese stone old
由“限定词--数词--描绘词--(大小，长短，形状，新旧，颜色) --性质--名词”的公式可知，描绘词 + 大小 + 出处的顺序，最符合答案。
根据排列顺序： 大小、形状 +年龄+颜色+来源+质地+用途+名词可选择A
A
A
常见形容词的比较
1). worth --- worthy --- worthwhile
2) alike --- like ---likely
3) dead --- deadly --- deathly
4) historic --- historical
5) live --- lively --- alive --- living
6) possible --- probable--- likely
7) valueless ---priceless
8) respectable (可敬的、高尚的) --- respectful (表示敬意的)
A respectable man is respectful to others.
9) healthy (健康的) --- healthful (有益于健康的)
The air at seaside is healthful to us. So all of us are healthy.
巩固练习：
The World Cup in France was the biggest _____ football match in the world.
A. alive B. live C. lively D. living
2. Anyone who has spent time with children knows the difference in the way boys and girls respond (反应) to the _____ situation.
A. likely B. same C. alike D. similar
3. It’s _____ to rain but not _____ before evening.
A. possible … probable B. probable … possible
C. possibly … probably D. probably … possibly
B
D
A
副词的基本用法
问题1：______, some famous scientists have the qualities of being both careful and careless. （04上海春季）
A. Strangely enough B. Enough strangely
C. Strange enough D. Enough strange
问题2： Can you believe that in _____ a rich country there should be _____ many poor people (1995 N)
A. such, such B. such, so C. so, so D. so, such
A
B
副词 enough 要放在形容词和副词的后面，形容词 enough 放在名词前后都可。
A: 基本句型：such + (a) + adj. + n. ; so + adj. + a + n.
B: such 后可加各种名词，而so后面只能加单数名词；
C: so 可加 many, much, few, little 等，而such不能。
问题3： We don’t care if a hunting dog smells ____, but we really don’t want him to smell _____. (1995上海)
A. well, well B. bad, bad C. well, badly D. badly, bad
问题4： Allen had to call a taxi because the box was _____
to carry all the way home. （03全国卷）
A．much too heavy B．too much heavy
C．heavy too much D．too heavy much
C
A
smell 有双重词性，作“闻起来”解是系动词，后接形容词作表语；作“嗅”解是形为动词，后接副词。该题的干扰项是B，“smells bad” 表示闻起来很臭，不可能同时放入两个空格。
much too 是副词，用来修饰形容词或副词；too much 是名词或形容词，可单独使用或修饰名词。
问题5： John is very lazy. He falls ______ behind in his
studies. (05(广东卷)
A. very B. far C. more D. still
问题6：— Must I turn off the gas after cooking
— Of course . You can never be careful with that .
(05江西卷)
A．enough B．too C．so D．very
B
B
副词的修饰关系是现今高考的热点之一，复习中应予以足够的重视。“far behind …”表示“远远地掉在后面”。
“can never be too …”是一种固定的表达方式，意为“越……就越好”
常用副词的比较
问题1： It was raining heavily. Little Mary felt cold, so she
stood ______ to her mother.( 2002北京)
A. close B. closely C. closed D. closing
问题2： We decided not to climb the mountains because it was
raining _______. (1996 N)
A. badly B. hardly C. strongly D. heavily
A
D
close to 离……近，此处 close 是副词；closely 表示“密切地”，与题意无关。
表示 “雨下得大”可用 rain hard; rain heavily　等，不用 badly 或 strongly。表示“刮大风”可用 strong wind。hardly 是否定词，与句意无关。
注意下面兼有两种形式的副词
close 与 closely close意思是“近”； closely 意思是“仔细地” 　　　 He is sitting close to me. 　　　 Watch him closely.
late 与 lately late意思是“晚”； lately 意思是“最近” 　　　 You have come too late. 　　　 What have you been doing lately
3) deep 与 deeply 　deep意思是“深”，表示时间和空间深度；deeply时常
表示感情上的深度，"深深地" 　　　 He pushed the stick deep into the mud. He often works deep into the night.
　　 Even father was deeply moved by the film.
high 与 highly 　 high表示空间高度；highly表示程度，相当于much 　　 The plane was flying high. 　　 I think highly of your opinion.
5) wide 与 widely wide表示空间宽度；widely意思是“广泛地”，“在许多
地方” 　　 He opened the door wide. 　　 English is widely used in the world.
6) free 与 freely 　 free的意思是"免费"；freely 的意思是"无限制地" 　　 You can eat free in my restaurant whenever you like. 　　 You may speak freely; say what you like.
另外注意下列各组副词的用法区别
1) just --- just now
2) rather --- fairly
3) yet --- still --- already
4) hard --- hardly --- rarely --- scarcely
5) such a + adj. + n. --- so + adj. + a + n.
6) most --- mostly --- almost
7) especially --- specially
8) every day --- everyday
9) sometime --- sometimes ---some time
巩固练习：
It’s always difficult being in a foreign country, _____ if you don’t speak the language.
A. Extremely B. naturally C. basically D. especially
2. Would you be _____ do me a favor
A. kind enough B. so kind as to
C. so kind to D. kind as to
3. The guide told us that he would organize some businessmen from abroad to have a tour _____ the next month.
A. some time B. sometime
C. some times D. sometimes
4. It is ____ that his English is _____ perfect.
A. sure … very B. right … rather
C. exact … fairly D. certain … quite
D
B
B
D
形容词和副词的级别
1、as … as … 结构
问题1： John is the tallest boy in the class, _______ according to
himself. （05安徽卷） (B)
A. five foot eight as tall as B. as tall as five foot eight
C. as five foot eight tall as D. as tall five foot eight as
问题2： What a table! I’ve never seen such a thing before. It is
______ it is long. （05湖北卷）
A．half not as wide as B．wide not as half as
C．not half as wide as D．as wide as not half
B
C
as tall as “高达…”, five foot eight = five feet eight inches
as wide as 是比较，所以倍数词应放在前面。
说明：
1）在否定句或疑问句中可用so… as。 　　　He cannot run so/as fast as you. 2）当as… as 中间有名词时采用以下格式。 　　　 as +形容词+ a +单数名词 　　　 as + many/much +名词 　　 This is as good an example as the other is. 　　 I can carry as much paper as you can.. 3）用表示倍数的词或其他程度副词做修饰语时，放在as的
前面。 　　This room is twice as big as that one. 　　Your room is the same size as mine.　　
4) 倍数+ the + n + of <=>倍数+ as + adj. + as　　
　This bridge is three times as long as that one. 　　This bridge is three times the length of that one. 　　Your room is twice as large as mine. 　　Your room is twice the size of mine.
5) 数量词 + senior / junior + to
He is seven years senior to his wife.
I am three years junior to my elder sister.
２、 more than 结构
问题1：－Is your headache getting ______
－ No, it’s worse. （05全国卷3）
A．better B．bad C．less D．well
问题2： Mr. Smith owns ______ collection of coins than
anyone else I have ever met. （05山东卷）
A. larger B. a larger C. the larger D. a large
问题3： The number of people present at the concert was
_______ than expected. There were many tickets left.
（04福建）
A．much smaller B．much more
C．much larger D．many more
A
B
A
问题4： The dictionary gave me a better offer than ____.
(1999 上海)
A. that of Dick’s B. Dick’s
　C. he gave Dick D. those of Dick
问题5： You’re standing too near the camera. Can you move
_____ (2000 上海)
A. a bit far B. a little farther
C. a bit of farther D. a little far
问题6： In that case, there is nothing you can do ______ than
wait. (2001 北京春季)
A. more B. other C. better D. any
C
B
B
1）要避免重复使用比较级。 　　 (错) He is more cleverer than his brother. 　　 (对) He is cleverer than his brother. 2）要避免将主语含在比较对象中。 　　 (错) China is larger that any country in Asia. 　　 (对) China is larger than any other country in Asia. 3）要注意对应句型，遵循前后一致的原则。 　　 The population of Shanghai is larger than that of Beijing. 　　 It is easier to make a plan than to carry it out.
4）程度词 a bit, a little, rather, much, far, by far, many, a lot,
lots, a great deal, any, still, even 等词可修饰比较级。除
外，还可以用表示倍数的词或度量名词作修饰语。以
上词 (除by far) 外，必须置于比较级形容词或副词的前
面。而 by far 一般置于比较级之后和最高级之前。
３、of the two 结构
问题1： Of the two shirts, I’d like to choose _____ one. (94 上海)
A. the less expensive B. the most expensive
C. less expensive D. most expensive
问题2： If the manager had to choose between the two, he would
say John was ________ choice. (95 上海)
A. good B. the best C. better D. the better
说明：在 of the two 结构中，比较级前要加 the，但如果不在 of the two 结构中，要注意冠词的使用。后有名词的时候，前面才有可能有冠词。 　 比较：Which is larger, Canada or Australia 　　　　 Which is the larger country, Canada or Australia 　　　　 She is taller than her two sisters. 　　　　 She is the taller of the two sisters.
A
D
4、the + 最高级 + 比较范围
问题1：David has won the first prize in singing; he is still very excited now and feels________ desire to go to bed. (05江苏卷)
A. the most B. more C. worse D. the least
问题2： Greenland, ________ island in the world, covers
over two million square kilometers. (2000 上海)
A. it is the largest B. that is the largest
C. is the largest D. the largest
D
D
1)形容词最高级前必须用定冠词 the，副词最高级前可不用。
The shortest boy runs fastest in the 100-meter race.
形容词 most 前面没有 the，不表示最高级的含义，只表示“非常”。 　　　It is a most important problem. 　　 = It is a very important problem. 注意： 使用最高级要注意将主语包括在比较范围内。 　　　 (错)　Tom is the tallest of his three brothers. 　　　 (对)　Tom is the tallest of the three brothers.
2) 下列词可修饰最高级，by far, far, much, mostly, almost 　　　This hat is nearly / almost the biggest.
注意： 　a.　 very 可修饰最高级，但位置与much不同。 　　 This is the very best. 　　 This is much the best. 　b.　 序数词通常只修饰最高级。 　　 Africa is the second largest continent. 3) 句型转换： 　 Mike is the most intelligent in his class. 　 Mike is more intelligent than any other student in his class. 4) “否定词语 + 比较级”，“否定词语 + so… as” 结构表示最
高级含义。 　 Nothing is so easy as this. 　= Nothing is easier than this. 　= This is the easiest thing.
5、和more有关的词组
1) the more… the more…　越……就越…… 　 The harder you work，the greater progress you‘ll make. 2) more B than A　与其说A不如说B 　 less A than B 　 He is more lazy than slow at his work. = He is less slow than lazy at his work. 3) no more… than… 与……一样(不)……，不比……多 　 The officials could see no more than the Emperor. 　　no less… than…　与……一样…… 　 He is no less diligent than you. 4) more than　不只是，非常 　　She is more than kind to us all.(共48张PPT)
By dd2004
不定式运用口诀
本领最多不定式，主、表、宾、补、定和状。
样样成分都能干，只有谓语它不敢。
大家千万要当心，有时它把句型改，
作主宾时用“it”, 自己在后把身藏。
七个感官三使役， 宾补要把to甩开；
疑问词后接上它，宾语从句可充当；
逻辑主语不定式，不定式前for sb. ;
to前not是否定， 各种用法区别开。
watch
The
Infinitive
subject
object
predictive
attribute
adverbial
complement
To do that sort of thing is foolish.
It is foolish to do that sort of thing.
I want to see you this evening.
All you have to do is (to) finish it quickly
We found a house to live in.
She came here to study English.
The patient was warned not to eat oily food
after the operation.
He lifted a stone only to drop it on his own feet.
They jumped with joy to hear the news.
It seems to be very happy.
It appears to be very angry.
（2）Infinitive as Predictive(表语)
(Predictive)
(Predictive)
She
He
They seems
appears
seemed/appeared
doesn't/don’t seem
did not appear to be very calm/well-known.
to be very happy/
like working here.
to take great pride in his/her/their work.
to have a lot of relations.
to envy the king’s wealth.
Make sentences from the table:
3.
object(宾语):
一些动词要用不定式作宾语, 常见的动词有want, hope, wish, ask, choose, decide, expect, manage, offer, promise, refuse, seek, try, pretend, learn, afford, need等。
He hoped/wished/expected to go abroad.
He promised to buy me a computer.
一些动词要用wh-疑问词+不定式作宾语，常见的动词有decide, know, learn, wonder, understand, find out, remember, see等
what to do.
how to do it.
I don’t know who(m) to ask/invite.
when to stop
where to go.
不定式一般不能作介词的宾语，只有在极少数介词如 ：but, except等后才行，此时不定式可带to 或不带to.
We have no choice but to wait outside.
They could do nothing but ask for help.
4. 不定式短语作宾语补足语
例：The teacher asked me to do it again.
老师叫我再做一次。
不定式短语to do it作宾语me的补足语。
I will invite him to play
and have dinner with me.
(宾补）
Infinitive as Object Complement
(Object complement)
Rewrite the sentences, using the words given to you .
1.“Why don’t you play the role of queen in the play ”
I encouraged her
2.“Don’t forget to wear your gloves. It’s freezing.”
I reminded her
3.“You can’t take the box of treasure away.”
I did not allow her
4.“Why can’t they sing some well-known songs ”
I’d prefer them
5.“Do you want to understand the poem I’ll help you.” .
I helped him
to play the role of queen in the play.
to wear her gloves as it was freezing.
to take the box of treasure away
to sing some well-known songs
( to) understand the poem.
The Infinitive as object Complement
英语中有些及物动词要跟复合宾语(宾+宾补),如allow, encourage, expect, help, prefer等带不定式作宾补.
e.g.Your parents don’t allow you to play the
computer
Teachers encouraged students to speak in
English.
1
2
To help each other is good.
It is good to help each other.
互相帮助是好的。
例1： To help each other is good.
It is good to help each other.
互相帮助是好的。
例2：I find it difficult to understand him.
我发现了解他很困难。
不定式短语to understand him作真正宾语, it是形式宾语。
He found it important to study Russian.
The computer makes it possible to calculate faster.
不定式在七个感官动词see, hear, feel, watch, find, notice, listen to, 三个使役动词
let, have, make等后作宾补时,to要省略。如
例1： Now, let me go.
（go前省掉了to）
例2：I saw her run into the classroom.
（run前的to省掉了）
比较She was seen to run into the classroom.
例1. The farmers didn’t know what to do.
The farmers didn’t know what they should do.
例2. Please tell me how to get to the zoo.
Please tell me how I can get to the zoo.
adverbial(状语):
(1) 表示目的【(not)to / (not)in order to / so as (not)to】
We eat to live and don’t live to eat.
(2) 表示结果 (so/such…as to., enough to…, too…to…, only to
他这么傻竟相信了这事。
He was so foolish as to believe it.
He was foolish enough to believe it.
He is too young to join the army.
另外only常用在不定式的前面, 表示出人意料的结果,如:
We arrived there only to find the train gone.
He returned home only to find his house broken into.
不定式中作结果状语的注意点：
1）某些形容词在“too…to…”结构中表示肯定，这类词是：
anxious, eager, glad, ready, surprised, willing…
She was too surprised to see how angry her father was.
2）在not, never, only, all, but等后的”too…to…”结构中，”too”的
含义为”very”，不定式没有否定含义。
I’m only too glad to stay at home.
It’s never too old to learn.
(3)表示原因
(a)不定式也可以用在作表语的形容词后作状语, 说明产生这种情况的原因, 常见的形容词有: sorry, surprised, happy, glad, eager, angry, foolish, right, wrong, slow, quick, rude, cruel, disappointed等。
I’m glad/pleased to see you.
We were surprised to hear the news.
6. 不定式短语作定语
例1：Is this the best way to help him
这是帮他的最好办法吗？
不定式短语to help him作way的后置定语。
例2: He is the man to depend on.
他是可以依靠的人。
不定式短语to depend on作man的后置定语。
注意: 不定式与被修饰的名词在逻辑上有
动宾关系;如果不定式是不及物动词,则后面需有适当的介词。
attribute(定语):
不定式及其短语作定语只能放在名词的后面,以下名词和句型常用不定式作定语,如: chance, way, opportunity, time, the first, the last, the second, the only等词后,在have to do和there be句型中。e.g.
没有人可以照看他.
There is no one to take care of her.
只有五种式样可供选择.
There are only five pairs to choose from.
不定式在以下形容词后:easy, difficult, hard, heavy, light, cheap, expensive, good, nice, safe, dangerous, important, interesting, pleasant, (im)possible, fun等。
This question is difficult _____ (answer).
Do you think him easy_____ (work) with
这时用主动形式表被动意思。
It is beautiful music to enjoy.
(定语)
Infinitive as Attribute
(Attribute)
20. The library needs ______,but it’ll have to wait until Sunday.
A. cleaning B. be cleaned C. clean D. being cleaned
Combine these sentences
1.She thought of this idea first. (She was the first person…)
2.We need to weigh the flesh. ( Let‘s find something…)
3.Is there anything you wish to say (What do you have…)
4.That will be the only thing we have to do now. (That will be the only thing…)
She was the first person to think of the idea
Let’s find something to weigh the flesh.
What do you have to say
That will be the only thing to do.
不定式的逻辑主语，在不定式前加for(of) sb. ，如：
例1. It is important for us to study English.
例2. It is nice of you to help me.
不定式的否定形式只要在to前加not。如：
例1. I’ll try not to be late.
例2. Tell him not to make any noise.
不定式作独立成分。
To tell (you) the truth, he doesn’t agree with you.
To begin with, Beijing is a very beautiful city.
We were surprised to hear the news.
2. We have to get up early to catch the first train.
3. He is considered to be a great scientist.
4. To see is to believe.
5. I have a lot of words to say.
6.It’s impossible for him to go alone.
7.She promised to make no mistakes at all.
8.I find it difficult to understand him.
9. To catch the train, we’d better hurry to the station by taxi.
The tense and voice of the infinitive
1.I want to tell him about it.
2.I want to be told about it.
5.She seems to have known the truth .
(Active Voice)
(Passive Voice)
(Indefinite Tense)
(Perfect tense)
4.She seems to be sleeping
(Continuous tense)
3.She seems to be sleepy
　　　语态
时态 主动语态 被动语态
一般时 (not)to do (not) to be done
进行时 (not) to be doing 无
完成时 (not) to have done (not) to have been done
The tense and voice of the infinitive
动词不定式省略to 的情况归纳
*1 当动词不定式作宾语补足语时，如动词是 make, let , have 或 look at , see, watch, observe, hear, listen to, feel 、等，不定式不带to.
*2. 在下列结构后 had better, would rather, would rather…than, cannot but（不得不 ，必然，不能不）, can’t help but 等
*3. Why…. 或 why not … 表建议
*4. 在介词 but , except 之后，如果其前有 实义动词do 的某种形式，不定式不带to,反之须带to .
*5 不定时作表语时，如果解释do的具体内容时，to可以省去。
*6 动词help或help+宾语之后，可用带to的不定式，也可用不带to的不定式，但在help+宾语+不定式结构中，如果用不带to的不定式，表示主语参与了不定式所表示的动作；如果用带to的不定式，表示主语没有参与不定时所表示的动作。
1.Did you notice anyone come in
2.I must apologize for not letting you know ahead of time.
*3. Though he had often made his little sister cry, today he was made to cry by his sister.
4. I cannot but agree.
5. I can’t help but feel sorry for Tom.
6. Why not have a try again
7. Why spend so much money
8. Then it has no choice but to lie down and sleep.
9. There is nothing to do except wait till it stops raining.
10. The first thing she did was go up to her trainer and thank for all her help during the training.
11. Will you help me (to) repair this bike
1.He asked me to help him repair his radio, but I don’t know ___.
to do it B. how to C. what to do it D. how to do
2. His voice made me _____ terrible.
To feel B. feel C. feels D. felt
3. My parents told me ____ people when they are in trouble.
never laugh at B. not to laugh at
don’t laugh at D. not laugh at
4. It’s bad manners ____ rude to people.
to be B. are C. be D. to being
5. It’s interesting _____ us to take part in the games.
A. of B. to C. for D. at
6.The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier, ___ it more difficult.
A not make B not to make
C not making D do not make
7.I’ve worked with children before, so I know what ___ in my new job.
A. expected B. to expect
C to be expecting D expects
8.Paul doesn’t have to be made ____. He always works hard.
A. learn B. to learn C. learned D. learning
9. I would love ___ to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to finish a report.
A. to go B. to have gone C. going D. having gone
tell, discuss, know, show, learn, decide, wonder, explain…
10.Do let your mother know all the truth. She appears ________everything.(2001年上海）
to tell B.to be told
C. to be telling D.to have been told

11. Having a trip abroad is certainly good for the old couple, but it remains ______whether they will enjoy it.(NMET 2002)
A. to see B.to be seen C. seeing D. seen
12. Charles Babbage is generally considered _____the first computer. (MET1993)
A. to invent B. inventing
C. to have invented D. having invented
13. Allen had to call a taxi because the box was _______ to carry all the way home. (MET2003)
A. much too heavy B. too much heavy
C. heavy too much D. too heavy much
14. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother
told him ______. (MET95)
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to
15. Little Jim should love _____ to the theatre this evening. (MET 92)
A. to be taken B. to take C. being taken D. taking
16.There are five pairs ___,but I'm at a loss which to buy.(1999上海高考) A. to be chosen B. to choose from C. to choose D. for choosing
17.____late in the afternoon, Bob turned off the alarm.
(2001年北京春季高考) A. To sleep B. Sleeping C. Sleep D. Having sleep
18.With a lot of difficult problems ____,the newly-elected president is having a hard time.(2002年上海春季高考)
A. settled B. settling C. to settle D. being settled
19.She will tell us why she feels so strongly that each of us has a
role___in making the earth a better place to live.
(2003上海春季高考)
A. to have played B. to play C. to be played D. to be playing
20.In order to gain a bigger share in the international market, many state run companies are trying ___their products more competitive.
( 2002上海春季高考)
A. to make B. making C. to have made D. having made
_____is a good of exercise for both the young and
the old.
A.The walk B.Walking C.To walk D.Walk
2. When and where to build the new power station __
yet.
A.is not decided B. are not decided
C.has not decided D. have not decided
3.Is____necessary to change trains at Beijing
A. this B. that C. it D. he
4.Our father often told us in the past that __is believing.
A.to see B.seeing C.see D.to be seen
5.She pretended__the letter I wrote yesterday.
A.not to receive B. not receiving
C.not to hear from D. having not received
6.I can’t imagine_____that with such a famous author.
A.work B.to work C.to be working D. working
7.She reached the top of the hill and stopped_____on a big rock by the side of the path.
A.to have rested B.resting C.to rest D.rest
8.Do you consider___any good attempting many scientific experiments
A. there B. it C. this D. that
9.I’m thirsty. Would you please give me something________.
A.drunk B.to drink C.to be drun D.for drinking
10.Mrs.Smith warned her husband_____after drinking again and again.
A. never to drive B. to never drive
C. never driving D. never rive
11.They knew her very well.They had seen her____up from childhood.
A. grow B. grew C. was growing D. to grow
12. Believe it or not, he was seen______upstairs just now.
A. to go B. to going C. having gone D. go
13. It was so cold that they kept the fire ______all night.
A. to burn B. burn C. burning D. burned
14. To master a foreign language,______.
A. a lot of practice is needed
B. it needs a lot of practice
C. practice is in need of
D. one needs a lot of practice
15. Little Jim should love _____to the theatre this evening.
A. to be taken B. to take C. being taken D. taking
16. —What do you think of the book
—Oh, excellent. It’s worth ______a second time.
A. to read B. to be read C. reading D. being read
17. The library needs ______,but it’ll have to wait until Sunday.
A. cleaning B. be cleaned C. clean D. being cleaned(共23张PPT)
高三英语语法总复习训练材料
动词不定式
南莫中学高三英语备课组
一、不定式结构作主语
To see one time is better than to hear a hundred times.
To persevere means victory!
注①：在很多情况下，特别是在口语中，常采用先行it代替主语，而把不定式后置：
It’s a great pleasure to be here.
It is not an easy thing to master a language.
注②：这种后置不定式的结构也适用于某些谓语动词不是系动词的句子，如：
It took us five hours to get there.
It made us very angry to hear him talk like that.
注③：不定式结构的逻辑主语通常可在特定的上下文或情景中看出，也可以由“ for + 名词词组” 来表示，如：
It is not hard for one to do a bit of good.
It was difficult for me to do the work.
注④：某些形容词在上述结构中作表语时，常在不定式之前加上 “of + 名词词组” 来说明不定式所指的是谁的情况，如：
It’s kind of you to think so much of us.
It’s very nice of you to be so considerate.
It’s unwise of them to turn down the proposal.
It was careless of her to make such a mistake.
二、不定式结构作表语
1．主语和表语都是不定式（其含义往往一是条件，一是结果），如：
To be kind to the enemy is to be cruel to the people.
To do that would be to cut the foot to fit the shoe.
2．主语是以aim, duty, hope, idea, intention, mistake, plan, proposal, job, suggestion 等为中心词的名词词组，或以 what 引导的名词性从句表示，后面的不定式说明其内容，如：
My idea is to climb the mountain from the north.
Your mistake was not to write that letter.
My suggestion is to start work at once.
What I would suggest is to start work at once.
注：在某些句型中，当主语部分有动作动词do 时，作表语的不定式可以省略符号 “to”，如：
All we have to do is push the button.
The only thing I can do now is go on by myself.
All I could do was send him a telegram.
三、不定式结构作动词宾语
1．“动词 + 带 to 的不定式结构”。这类动词常见的有：afford, agree, arrange, ask, choose, decide, demand, desire, expect, hope, learn, manage, offer, pretend, promise, refuse, want, wish, like, hate, prefer, continue, try, start, forget, mean, intend, begin, 等，例如：
I’ve arranged to meet him at ten o’clock.
I didn’t expect to find you here.
2．“动词 + 疑问词 + 带 to 的不定式结构”。（这种不定式结构接近一个名词从句）。这类动词常见的有：tell, advise, show, teach, find out, decide, discuss, learn, forget, inquire, know, explain, remember, see, understand, wonder 等。
疑问词（也称连接代/副词）有：what, where, who(m), when, how, whether, which（why 除外），如：
I don’t know what to do / where to go / who(m) to ask / when to stop / how to get there.
I haven’t decided whether to sell it or not.
We must find out what to do next / where to put it.
注① ：如果作宾语的不定式结构有自己的补语，则应使用先行 it，把不定式后置，例如：
I find it difficult to understand him.
We thought it wrong not to help her.
They found it impossible to get everything ready in time.
注② ：不定式结构一般不可作介词宾语, 只有在个别场合, 即在含有否定意义的带有介词 except 或 but (=except) 的结构中才能这样用，例如：
He seldom comes except to look at my pictures.
The child did nothing except weep.
She can do anything but sing.
He will do anything for you except lend you money.
They could do nothing but wait for the doctors to arrive.
注意不定式符号的省略问题！
四、不定式结构作定语
1．不定式作定语通常只能放在被修饰的名词之后，如：
It’s time to go to bed.
He is not a man to bow before difficulties.
Have you anything to declare
She usually has a lot of meetings to attend in the evening.
I want to get something to read during the vocation.
2．能带不定式结构作宾语的动词，转化成名词时往往也能带不定式结构作定语，如：
I don’t wish to quarrel with you.
→I have no wish to quarrel with you.
They will attempt to cross the river tonight.
→ They will make another attempt to cross the river tonight.
She promised not to do that again.
→ She made a promise not to do that again.
3．某些能带不定式结构作状语的形容词，转化成名词时，也能带不定式结构作定语，如：
He was obviously anxious to go.
→ His anxiety to go was obvious.
4．不定式结构与所修饰的名词，有时意义上有着主谓关系或动宾关系，如：
He has a large family to support (= that he must support).
注：处于动宾关系的情况下，如果不定式是不及物动词，它后面应加上必要的介词，如：
She has a lot of things to attend to.
The nurse has five children to look after.
Let’s first find a room to put the things in.
5．有时为了明确不定式结构的逻辑关系，可以在不定式之前加上for + 名词词组，如：
Here’s a book for you to read.
He gave orders for the visitors to be shown in.
五、不定式结构作状语
不定式结构可以作状语，修饰动词、形容词、副词等，表示目的、原因、结果、条件等。
1．表示目的：
They ran over to welcome the delegates.
He bought a bicycle to go to town more quickly.
He went home to see his mother.
注①：不定式结构表示目的时，通常句子的主语就是它的逻辑主语(参见以上三句)，但也有例外的情况，例如：
I stopped for him to speak to me.
He opened the door for the children to come in.
He brought a porter to carry the boxes / bags.
They sent a man to mend the window.
He stood up to be seen better.
注②：为了强调表示目的的不定式结构，特别是在不定式结构前有否定词 not 时，通常可以在不定式符号 to 之前加上 in order 或 so as，如：
He came here in order to see Charlie.
He shouted and waved so as to be noticed.
He went early in order not to miss the train.
I turned the radio down so as not to disturb him.
注③：表示目的的不定式可以置于句首，这也是区别于其他功能的标志之一。但是，置于句首表示目的的不定式之前可以加上in order，但却不可以加上so as ，如：
To draw maps properly, you need a special pen.
(In order to draw maps properly, you need a special pen.)
To get the best results, use clean water.
2. 表示结果：
What have I said to make you so angry
He came round to find himself in hospital.
不定式结构表示结果更常见于下列句型：
① so …as to …
Would you be so kind as to lend me your bicycle / tell me the time
② such (…) as to …
I’m not such a fool as to believe that.
③ enough to …
The boy is old enough to go to school.
④ too … to …
His eyesight is too poor to read such small letters.
注意：下列句子中的不表示结果，也无否定含义：
I’m only too glad to go. (= I’m very glad to go.)
I shall be only too pleased to get home. (= I shall be very pleased to get home.)
〖 only too (adv.) 极; 非常; 太;很 〗
☆☆有时，不定式结构还能表示一个随后发生的动作，相当于一个并列限定动词词组，这种不定式结构也表示结果，如：
She woke early to find it was raining.
He got home to learn that his father was ill.
这种表示结果的不定式结构具有下列几个特点：
① 不定式所表示的动作是随后发生的，相当于一个限定动词词组，如：
He arrived late to find the others had gone home.
He arrived late and found the others had gone home.
② 不定式根据是否需要停顿而决定与主句是否用逗号隔开。
He left his native country (,) never to return.
He returned home (,) to find his father lying sick in bed.
③ 不定式所表示的结果往往含有“令人意想不到”的意味，其中以“使人不愉快的结果”较为常见。（有时也可以表示令人愉快、惊喜的结果），如：
He went home to find his old friend George waiting for him.
④ 不定式之前有时可以加上only或but only，以加强语气，如：
He got to the station only to be told the train had gone.
They lifted a rock only to drop it on their own feet.
注：不定式结构表示结果或表示目的，往往形式相似，这时，须根据词汇意义认真加以区别，试比较：
He arrived late to find the others had gone home. ( = He arrived late and found the others had gone home.)
He arrived late to avoid meeting Robert. ( = He arrived late in order to avoid meeting Robert.)
He got to the station only to be told the train had gone.
He went to the station to inquire about the times of trains. ( = He went to the station in order to inquire about the times of trains.)
3. 表示原因：（不定式所表示的动作先于谓语动词的动作）
She wept to hear the news.
I pretend to be happy to know him.
He laughed to see such fun.
She seemed surprised to meet us.
六、不定式结构作宾语补足语
Don’t force yourself to write when you have nothing to say.
He believed the earth to be a globe.
Did you see a young man enter the house
1．只能用不定式结构作宾语补足语的动词：
① 表示“希望”“愿望”等心理状态的动词，如：wish, desire, expect, love, prefer, encourage, trust 等。
What do you desire me to do
The director preferred her to act the old lady.
② 含有“让”“允许”“促使”“致使”等祈使意义的动词，如：let, allow, permit, decide, mean, lead, bring, put, hurry, cause, 等。
We mustn’t let this happen again.
His father put him to mind the sheep.
③ 带有“请求”“恳求”等感彩的动词，如：ask, desire, invite, beg, request, worry 等。
He begged me not to tell his father about it.
She was always worrying her father to take her to Paris.
④ 含有“建议”“劝告”等意义的动词，如：advise, persuade, call on, urge 等。
He urged us to accept the compromise.
The dentist advised me to have the bad tooth pulled out.
⑤ 含有“命令”“强迫”“禁止”等意义的动词，如：order, command, require, charge, tell, make, oblige, force, drive, forbid, warn 等。
He required us to keep it a secret.
The doctor ordered him to stay in bed for a few days.
I warn you not to do that again.
⑥ 其他还有：help, teach, show, assist, report, bear, wait for, train, depend on 等。
He promised to teach me to swim.
We should train them to make use of reference books.
We are waiting for the train to stop.
2．既能用不定式结构又能用现在分词作宾语补足语的动词：
△ see, watch, notice, look at, hear, listen to, observe, feel, have;
△ imagine, find, discover, like, want, understand, hate, bring, get, leave, set
Did you see anyone enter the house
Don’t imagine yourself to be always correct.
We find him to be dishonest.
He set the boys to carry water.
I’ll leave him to solve the problem for himself.
注①：有些动词用不定式与用现在分词作宾语补足语，所表达的意义是有差别的。一般说来，用不定式表示一次性动作或动作的完成（即全过程）；而用现在分词则表示动作正在进行，即：谓语动词所表示的动作发生时，现在分词所表示的动作正在进行，如：
Did you see anyone enter the house
He saw his father talking with his teacher.
I once heard him sing this song.
She heard Mr. White singing in the next room.
注②：使用不定式作宾语补足语时，在有些动词后面，不定式符号to 应当省略。
△ 下列动词用不定式作宾语补足语时，必须省去不定式符号to：
let, make, have, see, watch, notice, look at, observe, hear, listen to
He observed someone open the door.
I watched them get into the car.
Did you notice him leave the room
△feel 一词在使用 to do 型不定式作宾语补足语时，不带 to；在使用 to be 型不定式时，要带 to，如：
He felt them to be right.
Did you feel the earth shake
△ help 一词在使用不定式作宾语补足语时，可以带 to，也可以不带 to，如：
Do you often help your mother (to) do the housework
△使用不定式作宾语补足语的句子，改为被动结构以后，宾语补足语就成了主语补足语，这时，“to”不可以省略，如：
The boss made them work from morning till night.
They were made to work from morning till night.
不定式的一般式所表示的动作，通常与主要谓语所表示的动作（或状态）同时（或几乎同时）发生，或者是在它之后发生
例如：Who heard him say that
They invited us to go there this summer.
如果不定式所表示的动作在谓语所表示的动作之前发生，这个不定式就要用完成式，如：
I’m glad to have seen your mother.
(cf. I’m glad to see you. )
七、不定式的完成式有下列用法
1．构成复合谓语，如：
He is said to have written a new book about workers.
(It is said that he has written a new book about workers.)
The enemy was reported to have surrendered.
(It was reported that the enemy had surrendered.)
She seemed to have heard about it already.
(It seemed that she had already heard about it.)
2．在某些作表语用的形容词后作状语，如：
You are lucky to have got tickets to the concert.
(=You are lucky that you have got tickets to the concert.)
I’m sorry to have given you so much trouble.
(=I’m sorry I have given you so much trouble.)
She was very glad to have done something for the people.
3．在某些动词后作宾语，如：
He pretended not to have seen me.
I meant to have told you about it, but I forgot to do so.
4．有时还可以作主语、定语或构成复合宾语，如：
It was a great satisfaction to have revisited our native village.（主语）
So you are the one to have cleaned all these rooms.（定语）
They thought it a pity not to have invited her.（复合宾语）
She felt it an honour to have taken part in the work. （复合宾语）
如果主要谓语所表示的动作（或情况）发生时，不定式所表示的动作正在进行，这时，不定式就要用进行式。
八、不定式的进行式主要有下列几种用法
1．构成复合谓语，如：
They are said to be building another bridge across the river.
They seem to be getting along quite well.
I happened to be going that way too.
2．在某些动词后构成复合宾语，如：
We didn’t expect you to be waiting for us here.
3．在某些动词后作宾语，如：
He pretended to be listening attentively.
4．有时可以作主语或状语，如：
I am glad to be working with you. (状语)
It’s nice of you to be thinking of us. (主语)
九、如果不定式所表示的动作在谓语所表示的时间之前一直在进行，就需要用完成进行式，如：
They are said to have been collecting folk songs in Yunnan.
She wished to have been training as hard as the others.
It’s a great pleasure to have been working with you.
当不定式的逻辑主语是不定式所表示的动作的承受者时，不定式一般要采用被动形式。
十、 不定式的被动形式有下列用法
1．作主语：
It is an honour for me to be asked to speak here.
2．作宾语：
She asked to be sent to work in Xinjiang.
3．构成复合宾语：
He wanted the letter to be typed at once.
She didn’t like herself to be praised like that.
4．构成复合谓语：
The books are not allowed to be taken out of the room.
5．作定语：
Are you going to the meeting to be held in the teachers’ office
6．作状语：
She was too young to be assigned such work.
十一、不定式有时还可以有完成式的被动式，在句中作主语、宾语、定语，或者构成复合宾语、复合谓语等，如：
It is a good thing for him to have been criticized.（主语）
She preferred to have been given heavier work to do. (宾语)）
He thought it an honour to have been invited to the party. （复合宾语）
The book is said to have been translated into many languages. （复合谓语）
She was the first woman to have been elected to such a post. （定语）
Good-bye!2000 ~ 2005 年高考题汇编
形容词和副词
1. _______to take this adventure course will certainly learn a lot of useful skills. （2000全国）（C）
　　A．Brave enough students B．Enough brave students
　　C．Students brave enough D．Students enough brave
2. It's always difficult being in a foreign country, ___________if you don't speak the language. （2000全国）（D）
　　A．extremely B．naturally　　C．basically D．especially
3. It is generally believed that reading is_________ it is a science. （01全国）（D）
A. an art much as B. much an art as C. as an art much as D. as much an art as
4. Many people have helped with canned food, however, the food bank needs _____ for the poor. （01北京春季）（A）
A．more B．much C．many D．most
5. In that case, there is nothing you can do _______ than wait. （01北京春季）（B）
A．more B．other C．better D．any
6. I am surprised that you should have been fooled by such a （an）_______trick. （01北京春季）（D）
A．ordinary B．easy C．smart D．simple
7. Boris has brains. In fact, I doubt whether anyone in the class has _________ IQ.　 （02全国）　　【Ｂ】
　 Ａ．a high　　Ｂ．a higher　 Ｃ．the higher　　Ｄ．the highest
8. All the people ______ at the party were his supporters. （02北京）（A）
A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important
9. ― Would you like to come to the dinner party here on Saturday
― Thank you. I’d love to, ______ I’ll be out of town at the weekend. （02北京）（D）
A. because B. and C. so D. but
10. It was raining heavily. Little Mary felt cold, so she stood ______ to her mother. （02北京）（A）
A. close B. closely C. closed D. closing
11. — I’m very with my own cooking. It looks nice and smells delicious.
— Mm, it does have a smell. （02北京春季）（D）
A. pleasant; pleased B. pleased; plcased
C. pleasant; pleasant D. pleased; pleasant
12. Two middle-aged passengers fell into the sea. , neither of them could swim. （02北京春季）（C）
A. In fact B. Luckily C. Unfortunately D. Naturally
13. Allen had to call a taxi because the box was to carry all the way home. （03全国卷）（A）
A．much too heavy B．too much heavy C．heavy too much D．too heavy much
14. --- I hear they aren’t pleased with the house you’ve chosen for them…
--- Well , _________ could they live in such comfort （03北京）（A）
A. where else B. what else C. how D why
15. He did it ______ it took me. （03北京）（D）
A. one-third a time B. one-third time C. the one-third time D. one-third the time
16. --- You don’t look very .Are you ill
--- No, I’m just a bit tired. （03北京春季）（B）
A．good B．well C．strong D．healthy
17. Mr. Smith used to smoke______ but he has given it up. （04天津）(B)
A seriously B heavily C badly D hardly
18. The____________house smells as if it hasn't been lived in for years. （04江苏）(A)
A. little white wooden B. little wooden white
C. white wooden little D. wooden white little
19. ______ students are required to take part in the boat race. （04浙江）(A)
A. Ten strong young Chinese B. Ten Chinese strong young
C. Chinese ten young strong D. Young strong ten Chinese
20. The number of people present at the concert was _______than expected .There were many tickets left. （04福建）(A)
A．much smaller B．much more C．much larger D．many more
21. It is ______ any wonder that his friend doesn’t like watching television much. （04广东）(D)
A. no B. such C. nearly D. hardly
22. Sometimes it was a bit boring to work there because there wasn’t always ______ much to do. （04广东）（D）
A. such B. that C. more D. very
23. The great success of this programme has been ______ due to the support given by the local businessmen. （04广东）（D）
A. rather B. very C. quickly D. largely
24. When we plan our vacation, mother often offers _____ suggestions. （04广西） （B）
A. careful B. practical C. effective D. acceptable
25. It is re ported that the United States uses _____ energy as the whole of Europe. （04广西） （D）
A. as twice B. twice much C. twice much as D. twice as much
26. That doesn't sound very frightening, Paul, I've seen _____. What did you like most about the film （04湖南） （B）
A. better B. worse C. best D. worst
27. Everyone was on time for the meeting _____ Chris, who's usually ten minutes late for everything. （04湖南） （C）
A. but B. only C. even D. yet
28. John Smith , a successful businessman , has a car . （04辽宁） (B)
A．large German white B．large white German
C．white large German D．German large white
29. He speaks English well indeed, but of course not _____ a native speaker. （04上海） (C)
A. as fluent as B. more fluent than C. so fluently as D. much fluently than
30. Mary kept weighing herself to see how much______ she was getting. （04全国I） (A)
A heavier B heavy C the heavier D the heaviest
31. I don’t mind picking up your things from the store. ______, the walk will do me good. （04全国I） (D)
A Sooner or later B Still C In time D Besides
32. I must be getting fat---I can ______ do my trousers up. （04全国II） (B)
A fairly B hardly C nearly D seldom
33. Lizzie was______ to see her friend off at the airport. （04全国IV） （B）
A a little more than sad B more than a little sad
C sad more than a little D a little more than sad
34. If you can’t come tomorrow, we’ll ______ have to hold the meeting next week. （04全国IV） （D）
A yet B even C rather D just
35. There at the door stood a girl about the same height _____. （04北京春季）（B）
A. as me B. as mine C. with mine D. with me
36. _______, some famous scientists have the qualities of being both careful and careless. （04上海春季）（A）
A. Strangely enough B. Enough strangely C. Strange enough D. Enough strange
37. I have worked with him for some time and have found that he is _______ than John. （04上海春季）（B）
A. more efficiently a worker B. a more efficient worker
C. more an efficient worker D. a worker more efficiently
38. This __________ girl is Lind’s cousin. (05北京卷) (A)
A. pretty little Spanish B. Spanish little pretty
C. Spanish pretty little D. little pretty Spanish
39. --- Have you been to New Zealand
--- No. I’d like to, ________. （05山东卷） (D)
A. too B. though C. yet D. either
40. Mr. Smith owns ______ collection of coins than anyone else I have ever met. （05山东卷）(B)
A. larger B. a larger C. the larger D. a large
41. --- ______ that he managed to get the information
--- Oh, a friend of his helped him. （05山东卷） (D)
A. Where was it B. What was it C. How was it D. Why was it
42. John is very lazy. He falls ______ behind in his studies. (05(广东卷) (B)
A. very B. far C. more D. still
43. To understand the grammar of the sentence, you must break it into parts. （05湖北卷） (A)
A．down B．up C．off D．out
44. What a table ! I’ve never seen such a thing before .It is it is long. （05湖北卷） (C)
A．half not as wide as B．wide not as half as
C．not half as wide as D．as wide as not half
45. --- How is everything going on with you in Europe
--- Quite well. Not so smoothly as I hoped, _________. (05江苏卷) (A)
A. though B. instead C. either D. too
46. David has won the first prize in singing; he is still very excited now and feels________ desire to go to bed. (05江苏卷) (D)
A. the most B. more C. worse D. the least
47. －Is your headache getting_____________ － No, it’s worse. （05全国卷3） (A)
A．better B．bad C．less D．well
48. — Must I turn off the gas after cooking
— Of course . You can never be careful with that . (05江西卷) (B)
A．enough B．too C．so D．very
49. There was such long queue for coffee at the interval that we ________ gave up. （05上海卷） (A)
A. eventually B. unfortunately C. generously D. purposefully
50. At times, worrying is a normal, ________ response to a difficult event or situation --- a loved one being injured in an accident, for example. （05上海卷） (C)
A. effective B. individual C. inevitable D. unfavorable
51. My mother always gets a bit _________ if we don’t arrive when we say we will. （05浙江卷） (A)
A．anxious B．ashamed C．weak D．patient
52. Bob ran the 100 meters in 9.91 seconds, and I have not seen _________ this year. （05浙江卷） (B)
A．the best B．better C．the most D．more
53. If it is quite _______ to you, I will visit you next Tuesday. （05天津卷） (A)
A. convenient B. fair C. easy D. comfortable
54. John is the tallest boy in the class, _______ according to himself. （05安徽卷） (B)
A. five foot eight as tall as B. as tall as five foot eight
C. as five foot eight tall as D. as tall five foot eight as倒装句 INVERSION
倒装可分为完全倒装、部分倒装和其他倒装。
一．完全倒装：将谓语动词直接提到主语前 。常见情况有：
1． 以here, there 或out , in, up, down, away等词开头的句子里以示强调。
There goes the bell.
Here comes the bus.
Out rushed the children.
Away went the boy.
注意：但主语是人称代词时，主语语序不变。
Here it is.
Away he went.
2．地点状语放句首
South of the river lies a small factory.
From the valley came a frightening sound.
3. such, the following 放句首时
Such are the facts. Such is life.
The following is the answer to the question.
二．部分倒装：将情动、助动、系动提到主语前。常见情况有：
1． Only修饰的副词，介词短语或状语从句放在句首时。
Only then did I realize that I was wrong.
Only in this way can you learn from your mistakes
Only when the war was over in 1918 was he able to get happily back to work.
2.含有否定意义的副词或连词， 如：hardly, never, not, not only, little , neither…nor…, not until…,no sooner…than…, seldom (Often)等放在句首时。
Never shall I forget it. Never before have I seen such a film.
Not a single mistake did he make. (他一点错也没出 )
Hardly had I reached the bus stop when the bus started
Not only was everything he had taken away from him, but also his German citizenship.
Nowhere in the world can there be such a quiet and beautiful place.
Little does he care about what others think.
Often did we warn them not to do so.
3.把副词 so 放在句首，表示前面所说的情况，也适合于另一人或物。 肯定句用so,否定句用neither, 句式如下：
So + be ( have, 助动词或情态动词) + 主语。
否定形式： neither (nor) + be ( have, 助动词或情态动词) + 主语。
He likes rice very well. So do I.
I have never been there, and neither has he.
4. 表祝愿。
May you succeed!
5. 省略if 时，将had, should, were 提到主语前
Had I knew it, I wouldn’t have done it.
三．其他倒装。
1． 表语置于句首时，倒装结构为 “表语 + 连系动词 + 主语”
Present at the party were Mr green and many other guests.
Seated on the ground are a group of young men.
Gone are the days when we used the “foreign oil”.
So frightened was he that he didn’t dear to move.
So loudly do the students read their lessons that people can hear them out in the street.
2. as: 尽管 句式：（1） 表语/状语+ as + 主语+ 系动/实动，主句。
（2）动原 +as + 主语+ will/may ， 主句。
Child as he is, he knows much English.
Much he loves his son, he is strict with him.
3. No matter how/However + adj./adv.+主语+ 谓语， 主句。
However/No matter how late it is, she often waits for him.
四．巩固练习
______ to rain tomorrow , they would put off the meeting.
A. If it should B. If were it C. Should it D. were it
2. ______ got into the room ______ the telephone rang.
A. No sooner had he, when B. He hardly had, then
C. Hardly had he, when D. He hardly had, then
3. ______ find out what had happened.
A. Until he woke up did he B. Until he woke up to
C. Not until did he wake up he D. Not until he woke up did he .
4. Little ______ about his own health though he was very ill.
A. he cared B. he cares C. does he care D. did he care
5. Early in the day ______ the news ______ the enemy were gone.
A. come, that B. came , that C. comes ,that D. came , what
6. Not only ______ strict with us, but also ______ for us.
A. was the teacher ; did he care B. was the teacher ; he cared
C. the teacher was ; did he care D. the teacher was ; did he care
7. ______, he knows a lot of English .
A. Child as he is B. As he is a Child
C. A child as he is D. Child though he was
8. ______ the cat , she has to give it to the neighbor.
A. As she likes much B. As she much likes
C. Much as she likes D. As much she likes
9. Be quick! ______.
A. Here comes the bus B. The bus here comes
C. The bus come here D. Here the bus comes
10. If you want to go there, ______.
A. so will I B. so I will C. I will so D. so do I
11. In front of the farmhouse ______.
A. does a small boy sit B. did a small boy sit
C. sit a small boy D. sat a small boy
12. Scarcely ______ down when ______ a knock at the door.
A. had he sat ; did he hear B. he had sat ; did he hear
C. he had sat ; he heard D. had he sat ; he heard
13. Here ______. A. does he come B. he comes C, comes he D. he come
14. Only ______ that.
A. can a doctor do B. a doctor can do C. can do a doctor D. can a doctor does
15. Not even once ______ a lie.
A. has Mike told B. Mike has told C. had Mike told D. Mike had told
16. Up ______ into the air.
A. went the arrow B. the arrow went C. did the arrow go D. does the arrow go
17. Not for a moment ______ what he said.
A. I believed B. did I believe C. I would believe D. I believe
18. Under the big tree ______ of seven years old.
A. sat a little girl B. did a little girl sat C. a little girl D. a little girl sat
19. In ______ and the students stood up.
A. the teacher comes B. the teacher coming
C. came the teacher D. did the teacher come
20. No sooner ______ begun to speak than I realized that something was wrong.
A. he has B. he had C. had he D. did he
21. Nowhere else in the world ______ a place so beautiful.
A. you can find B . find you C. can you find D. do you find
22. "Your ticket, Please " " ______."
A. Here you are B. Here are you C. You are here D. I give you it
23. Hardly ______ the house, when he was caught.
A. the thief had entered B. entered the thief
C. had the thief entered D. was the thief entering
24. Seldom ______ late ______ the meeting room.
A. does he come; to B. comes he; for C. does he; for D. comes he; to
25. Never before ______ such a good film ______ "007."
A. have I seen ; as B. I have seen; like C. had I seen; like D. I have seen; as
26. The girl likes singing and dancing. ______.
A. So she does B. So is she C. So am I D. So she can
27. Never ______ early in the morning.
A. he gets up . B. gets up he C. does he get up D. up he gets
28. So loudly ______ that every people in the next room could hear him.
A. did he speak B. he spoke C. did speak he D. he speaks
29. On the river bank, ______ where he once lived.
A. stand a house B. a house stand C. does a house stand D. stands a house
30. I won't go, ______.
A. any of my classmates will go nor . B. nor will not any of my classmates
C. nor will any of my classmates D. nor do any of my classmates
31. Only in a socialist country ______ the people's interests.
A. science can serve B. does science can serve
C. can science serve D. can serve science for
32. Rarely ______ a bike like that nowadays.
A. we see B. see we C. do see we D. do we see
33. No longer ______ to be a member of this club.
A. is he fit B. he is fit C. he fit D. fit he
34. Little ______ that the police are about to arrest him.
A. do he know B. does he know C. he knows D. he know
35. ___from the hill.
A. Down ran the child B. Ran down the child C. Down ran he. D. The child down ran.
36. So funny did he look ____everyone stared at him.
A. and B. at that C. that D. so that
37. ____ I like it, I'll not buy it A. As much B. As C. Much as D. As much as
38. Try as they would, ___ find nothing.
A. could they B. they C. they could D. can they
39. Brave ___ he is, he trembled at the sight of a snake.
A. man as B. man though C. a man though D. a man as
40. Out ____, gun in hand A. he rushed B. rushed he C. did he rush D. did rush he
五．参考答案：
1-5 DCDDB 6-10 BACAA 11-15 DDBBA
16-20 ABACC 21-25 CACAA 26-30ACADC
31-35 CDABA 36-40 CCCAA(共5张PPT)
主谓一致精练与解析
1.More than one person here ____ with the disease.
A. has been infected B. have been infected
C. has been infecting D. have been infecting
●
由more than one 修饰单数名词作主语时，谓语动词要用单数
又如：More than one man was injured in the accident.
More than one house has been repaired.
2. One or perhaps more pages _____ missing.
A. is B. are C. has been D. have been
●
由or连接两个名词或代词作主语时，谓语动词应与靠近它的
主语一致。
又如：Are you or he to drive
Was she or you there
3.An expert, together with some assistants, ____ to help in this
work.
A. was sent B. were sent C. is sending D. are sending
●
由 with，together with，along with，rather than，no less than ，
but， besides，except等连接两个名词或代词作主语时，谓语动词应与前一个相一致。
又如：Nobody but John and Helen was absent.
I, rather than you, am responsible for the accident.
4.The police ____ the black in winter.
A. wears B. wear C. put on D. puts on
●
英语中，一些表示总称意义的名词，如：police，people，cattle等作主语时，谓语动词要用单数形式。
又如：Some people spend a lot of money on clothes.
Cattle are raised everywhere by the farmers.
5.The number of students that you have met ____ the life of the team.
A. are B. is C. were D. be
●
the number of＋复数名词作主语时，谓语用单数。a number
of＋复数名词作主语时，谓语用复数。
又如：The number of cars is increasing in Beijing.
A number of books have been published on this subject.
6. To get up early and to go to sleep early ____ good for your health.
A. is B. are C. was D. were
●
由and连接两个名词，包括两个不定式、两个动名词作主语，若指同一件事或一个概念事，谓语动词用单数形式。
又如：Whether to go on or return is not known.
Time and tide waits for no man.
7. More students than one _______.
A. were punished B. is punished
C. was punished D. will punish
●
More ＋复数名词 ＋than one ＋和 more than one ＋单数名词的意义相同，均表示“不只一个”，但前者用作复数，后者用作单数。
又如：More students than one were punished.
＝More than one student was punished.
8. What they need _____ more people.
A. is B. are C. has D. have
●
名词从句作主语时，通常表示单数概念，谓语动词常用单数，
但所指内容是复数意义时，谓语动词用复数。本句从表语more people 可以得知主语what we need指复数内容。
又如：What we need is more time.
What he needs are books.
What he says and what he does do not agree.(共29张PPT)
一 .不定冠词 a / an
a 用于辅音开头的单词前
a man
a cat
** 一些元音字母开头的单词是辅音开头：
a one-way street
a useful book
a European
an 用于元音开头的单词或单独的字母前
an apple
an island
an hour
an “f”
二. a / an 的用法
1. 用于第一次提到的单数可数名词前；
I need a dictionary.
They live in a village.
He bought an ice-cream.
二. a / an 的用法
2. 用于表示泛指的单数可数名词前；
A child needs love.
= All children need love.
Any child needs love.
二. a / an 的用法
3. 作名词补足语（指专业名称）：
She’ll be a dancer.
The man in blue is an actor.
二. a / an 的用法
4. 用于一些表示数量的短语中； a lot of,
a great number of,
a bit of,
a little
二. a / an 的用法
5. 用于一些数词中（或者用 one);
a hundred,
a thousand,
a half-holiday,
a third,
二. a / an 的用法
6. 用于表示价钱，速度，比率等的短语中；
5 pounds a kilo,
60 kilometres an hour,
four times a day.
二. a / an 的用法
7. 用于感叹句中的可数名词前；
What a pretty girl!
What an interesting book!
二. a / an 的用法
8. 用在称呼前，含有“我不认识．．．的感觉”
A Mr. Smith is waiting to see you.一位史密斯先生正等着要见您。
三. 不用a / an 的情况
1.复数名词前；
2. 不可数名词前，
3. 表示早，午，晚餐的名词前； We have lunch at 12.
I was invited to dinner.
三. 不用a / an 的情况
**** 有修饰语的情况除外.
He gave me a good lunch.
I was invited to a dinner
given to welcome the
visitors.
四. 定冠词 the
the 可与单数、复数名词连用；
1. 用于表示独一无二的事物或群体；
the earth, the sky,
the sun
四. 定冠词 the
2. 用于第二次提到的明确的名词前；
His car hit a tree. You can still see the mark on the tree.
三. 定冠词 the
3. 用于短语或从句限定的名词前，
the girl in white,
the man with good
manners
the boy that I met
四. 定冠词 the
4. 用于特指某人或某物； Ann is in the garden.
(the garden of this house)
Please pass the salt.
(the salt on the table)
四. 定冠词 the
5. 用于最高级，序数词，only 和 same 前，
the first day, the best answer
the only way, the same place
四. 定冠词 the
6. “the + singular noun” 可表示一类事物或动物：
The panda is in danger of becoming extinct (灭绝）.
四. 定冠词 the
7. “the + adjective” 可表示一类人：
the old = old people
the rich = rich people
四. 定冠词 the
8. “the + plural surname” 相当于“the … family：
the Smiths
= Mr. and Mrs. Smith
(and their children)
四. 定冠词 the
9. 用于表示海洋，河流，群岛的专有名词前；
the Changjiang River
the Pacific Ocean
四. 定冠词 the
10. east , west, north, south 用作名词时要加 the, 用作副词时则不用；
He lives in the north (n.) .
Go north (adv.).
五. 不用定冠词 the 的情况；
1. 人名和地名；
Meimei is from Beijing.
2. 抽象名词前；
They are in great
need of help.
五. 不用定冠词 the 的情况；
3. 名词所有格和物主代词后的名词前;
the boy’s uncle,
It is my room.
五. 不用定冠词 the 的情况；
4. 球类运动，三餐及学科等名词前；
He plays football well.
They have porridge for breakfast.
I prefer history to chemistry.
五. 不用定冠词 the 的情况；
5. 表示泛指的复数名词前；
Big hotels all over the
world are very much
the same.
五. 不用定冠词 the 的情况；
6.在bed, home, hospital, work
school / college, 和 town 前；
He is at home.
He is in hospital.
It’s time to go to bed.
五. 不用定冠词 the 的情况；
7. 季节，月份，星期和节日名称前；
Summer comes after spring.
Tomorrow is Children’s Day.附加疑问句
陈述部分的主语是指示代词this, that或these, those时，附加疑问句的主语分别用it和they。
This is an English book, isn’t it
These are English books, aren’t they
陈述部分的主语是someone，somebody，anyone ，everyone，nobody ，no one 等复合不定式时，附加疑问句的主语在非正式的文体中通常用复数they。
Nobody phoned me while I was out, did they
Somebody took my pen by mistake yesterday, didn’t they
陈述部分的主语是everything，something，anything，nothing等复合不定式时，附加疑问句的主语用it。
Everything that he says is right, isn’t it
Nothing can stop us now, can it
陈述部分是there be 或there live，there stand，there used to be 等结构时，附加疑问句的部分的主语用there。
There is a book on the desk, isn’t there
There once lived a rich man here, didn’t there
There used to be a school here, didn’t/usedn’t there
陈述部分的主语是each of 时，如果强调单个，附加疑问句子的主语用he或it；如果强调全体，则根据情况用they，we，you等。
Each of the books costs us five yuan, didn’t we
Each of us bought a postcard, didn’t we
6. 陈述部分的主语是I , 附加疑问句的部分的主语用you,以表示征询对方的意见，这时等于另外的一个句子，相当于how/what about you ？what do you think ？
I like living in the country, don’t you = I like living in the country, how about you
I found English interesting, don’t you = I found English interesting, what do think
7.陈述部分的主语是由neither…nor……，either….or…..或not only……but…also等连接 的并列的主语保持时，附加疑问句的主语常用相应的复数部分，而不与nor, or，but also 之后的主语主语保持一致。
Neither you nor I am wrong , are we
Either you or I am right, are we
Not only Tom but also Alice likes skating, don’t they
8.陈述部分的用代词one作主语，附加疑问句的主语在正式场合用one，非正式场合用you。
One must love one’s country ,mustn’t one/you
One shouldn’t be selfish, shouldn’t one/you
9.陈述部分是一个带宾语从句的主从结构时，附加疑问句部分的主语一般应和主句的主语保持一致，但可用否定转移的动词think，suppose，guess，believe等接宾语从句且主语为第一人称（I /we）时，应与宾语从句的主语保持一致，还要注意否定形式。
She said that she would come back soon, didn’t she
I think he is honest ,isn’t she
I don’t think he is honest, is she
10.陈述部分为并列句时，附加疑问句部分的主语应与后一分句的主语保持一致。
He was born in Germany, but his two sisters were born in American, weren’t they
He got up late, but his parents didn’t scold him, did they
11.陈述部分的主语是none of 。。。时，附加疑问句部分的主语应与of后的名词或代词保持一致。
None of the students went there, did they
None of the dish smells good, does it
12.let’s 开头的祈使句，用shall we，let us/me开头的祈使句，用will you。
Let’s stop here, shall we
Let us go now, will you
Let’s me do it, will you
13.陈述部分的主语是动名词、不定式或主语从句时，附加疑问句的主语用it。
Reading English aloud is very important, isn’t it
What he said was true, wasn’t it
14.陈述部分含有定语从句、状语从句、同位语从句时，附加疑问句的主语应与主句的主语保持一致。
The house where they lived was very old, wasn’t it
That is why he works hard in the factory, isn’t it
15.特殊情况，用am I right？do you think so ,isn’t that so ,ok 等以表示期待和证实。
They forgot to attend the lecture, am I right
We’ll tell them all about it tonight,OK (共20张PPT)
语法专项复习
------宾语从句
一、宾语从句的概念
宾语从句属于名词性从句，在句中作主句的宾语。
eg. We know Mr Green teaches English.
She asked if these answers were right.
二、宾语从句三要素：
连 接 词
时 态
语 序
（一）连 接 词
1.连词that引导：作从句的原句是陈述句。
I hear _____English is not easy.
2.if/ whether “是否”，用它引导从句， 说明对陈述的事物不明确或不清楚。常用在ask, wonder, can(could) you tell me 等后。原句为一般疑问句，选择疑问句或反意疑问句。
Could you tell me if (whether) Miss Brown lives in that house
3.当从句原本是特殊疑问句时，用以下连接代词和连接副词引导：
what, which, who, whom, whose,
when, where, how, why,
how far, how long, how many, how much, how often…
作用：连接主句和从句，并在从句中担任句子成分，具有一定的意义。
eg:I didn’t hear ____he wanted me to do.
I want to know ____is that young man.
Tom asked us____we would start the party.
（二）语序：陈述句语序
（三）时态：
主句用现在时或将来时，从句可用任何时态。
主句用过去时，从句用与过去相关的时态。
即：主句+连接词+从句（主+谓+其他成分）
Do you still remember _________(他说的什
么)
特殊情况：
1.从句说明的是一般真理、客观事实、自然现象、名言时，任用现在时。
Dad told us that it is better to do than to say.
He told the boy that three and three is six.
Could you tell me where the bookshop is.
2.从句中有具体时间状语，即使从句动作发生在主句动作前，仍然用一般过去时。
The teacher told me she was born in 1960.
三、宾语从句注意事项
(一)当从句的原句为以下句子以及what, who作主语时，语序不变：
What’s wrong What’s the matter
What’s happening
eg:I don’t know what’s the matter.
Can you tell me who is over there
(二)只能用whether不能用if的情况
1.在介词后面：
I’m thinking of whether we should go fishing.
We didn’t think about whether it would rain the next day.
2.在动词不定式前：
They asked me whether to sit at the front.
3.当与or not连用，或提出两种选择 时:
I don’t know whether he’s free or not.
Mary asked whether I was doing my homework or not.
Tell me whether you’d like to go shopping or tidy the room.
4.宾语从句提前时：
Whether this is true or not, I can’t say.
5.在动词discuss后的宾语从句中:
We discussed whether we would have a sports meeting next week.
6.引导表语从句或位于句首的主语从句用whether：
Whether he is right or wrong is a question.
The question was whether he went there last night.
(三)用if不用whether的情况:
1.引导否定概念的宾语从句时：
He asked me if I hadn’t finish my homework.
2.引导条件状语从句，if意为“如果”时:
We’ll go hiking if it doesn’t rain tomorrow.
四、宾语从句转化为简单句
1.当主从句的主语一致时：
1) I don’t know what I shall do next.
I don’t know what to do next.
2)John didn’t decide which shirt he would buy.
John didn’t decide which shirt to buy.
2.当主句的谓语含有双宾语时，如果间宾与从句（直宾）中的主语一致时：
1)Can you tell me how I can get to the police station
Can you tell me how to get to the police station
2)Please show me how I should start the recorder.
Please show me how to start the recorder.
3.当主句的谓语动词是order, require等时，如果主句和从句的主语 不一致，宾语从句可转化为“名词（代词）+不定式”结构:
The headmaster ordered that we should start at once.
The headmaster ordered us to start at once.
4.其他转换：
1)He insisted that he should go with us.
He insisted on going with us.
2)We found that the box was very heavy.
We found that the box very heavy.
Exercise:
1._____he will tell us ____ he didn’t take the money is still a question.
A. if ;if B.whether; whether
C. whether ;if D. if; whether
2.This is the room____ we lived in last year.
3.This is the room____ we lived last year.
4.It’s only two days____we spent on holidays.
6.This is the factory____we visited last week.
A.It B. what C.which D.who
7. I don’t know____winter starts in China.冠词和数词
2.1 不定冠词的用法
　　冠词本身不能单独使用，也没有词义，它用在名词的前面，帮助指明名词的含义。英语中的冠词有三种，一种是定冠词，另一种是不定冠词，还有一种是零冠词。
　　不定冠词a （an）与数词one 同源，是"一个"的意思。a用于辅音音素前，一般读作[e]，而an则用于元音音素前，一般读做[en]。
　1） 表示"一个"，意为one；指某人或某物，意为a certain。例如：
　　 A Mr. Ling is waiting for you. 有位姓凌的先生在等你。
　2） 代表一类人或物。例如：
　　 A knife is a tool for cutting with. 刀是切割的工具。
　　 Mr. Smith is an engineer. 史密斯先生是工程师。
　3） 组成词组或成语，如a little / a few / a lot / a type of / a pile / a great many / many a / as a rule / in a hurry / in a minute / in a word / in a short while / after a while / have a cold / have a try /keep an eye on / all of a sudden等。
2.2 定冠词的用法
　定冠词the与指示代词this，that同源，有"那（这）个"的意思，但意义较弱，可以和一个名词连用，来表示某个或某些特定的人或东西。
　1）特指双方都明白的人或物。例如：　　 Take the medicine.　把药吃了。
　2）上文提到过的人或事。例如：
　　 He bought a house.　I've been to the house. 他买了幢房子。我去过那幢房子。
　3）指世上独一物二的事物，如the sun， the sky， the moon， the earth等。
　4）与单数名词连用表示一类事物，如the dollar 美元; the fox 狐狸；或与形容词或分词连用，表示一类人：the rich 富人; the living 生者。
　5）用在序数词和形容词最高级，及形容词only，very，same等前面。例如：
　　 Where do you live 　I live on the second floor.　 你住在哪？我住在二层。
　　 That's the very thing I've been looking for.　 那正是我要找的东西。
　6）与复数名词连用，指整个群体。例如：
　 They are the teachers of this school.（指全体教师）
　 They are teachers of this school.　 （指部分教师）
　7）表示所有，相当于物主代词，用在表示身体部位的名词前。例如：
　　 She caught me by the arm..　她抓住了我的手臂。
　8）用在某些由普通名词构成的国家名称、机关团体、阶级、等专有名词前。例如：
　 the People's Republic of China　 中华人民共和国　 the United States　 美国
　9）用在表示乐器的名词之前。例如：　 She plays the piano.　她会弹钢琴。
　10） 用在姓氏的复数名词之前，表示一家人。例如： the Greens　 格林一家人 （或格林夫妇）
　11） 用在惯用语中。例如：
　　　in the day, in the morning （afternoon，evening）,　the day after tomorrow　
the day before yesterday,　the next morning,　
in the sky （water，field，country）　in the dark,　in the rain,　in the distance,　
in the middle （of）,　in the end, on the whole,　by the way,　go to the theatre
2.3 零冠词的用法
1） 国名，人名前通常不用定冠词：England，Mary。
　2）泛指的复数名词，表示一类人或事物时，可不用定冠词。例如：
　　 They are teachers. 他们是教师。
　3）抽象名词表示一般概念时，通常不加冠词。例如：
　　 Failure is the mother of success.　失败乃成功之母。
　4）物质名词表示一般概念时，通常不加冠词，当表示特定的意思时，需要加定冠词。例如：
　　 Man cannot live without water.　离开水人就无法生存。
　5）在季节、月份、节日、 假日、日期、星期等表示时间的名词之前，不加冠词。例如：
　 We go to school from Monday to Friday.　 我们从星期一到星期五都上课。
　6）在称呼或表示官衔，职位的名词前不加冠词。例如：
　 The guards took the American to General Lee. 士兵们把这个美国人送到李将军那里。
　7）在三餐、球类运动和娱乐运动的名称前，不加冠词，如have breakfast，play chess。
　8）当两个或两个以上名词并用时，常省去冠词。例如：
　　 I can't write without pen or pencil.　没有钢笔和铅笔，我就写不了字。
　9）当by 与火车等交通工具连用，表示一种方式时，中间无冠词，如by bus，by train。
　10）有些个体名词不用冠词，如school，college，prison，market，hospital，bed，table，class，town，church，court 等个体名词，直接置于介词后，表示该名词的深层含义。例如：　 go to hospital　　 去医院看病
　　　 go to the hospital　 去医院 （并不是去看病，而是有其他目的）
　11）不用冠词的序数词；
　 a. 序数词前有物主代词时。
　 b. 序数词作副词。例如：He came first in the race. 他跑步得了第一。
　 c. 在固定词组中，如at（the）first, first of all, from first to last等。
2.4 冠词与形容词+名词结构
1） 两个形容词都有冠词，表示两个不同的人或物。例如：
　　 He raises a black and a white cat.　他养了一只黑猫和一只白猫。
　 The black and the white cats are hers.　这只黑猫和白猫都是他的。
　2） 如后一个形容词无冠词，则指一人或一物。例如：
He raises a black and white cat. 他养了一只花猫。
2.5 冠词位置
1） 不定冠词位置
　不定冠词常位于名词或名词修饰语前。注意：　
　a. 位于such，what，many，half等形容词之后。例如：
　　 I have never seen such an animal. 我从来没见过这样的动物。
　　 Many a man is fit for the job. 许多人适合这岗位。
　b. 当名词前的形容词被副词as, so, too, how, however, enough修饰时，不定冠词应放在形容词之后。例如：
　　 It is as pleasant a day as I have ever spent. 我从未这么高兴过。
　　 So short a time 如此短的时间　　 Too long a distance 距离太远了
　c. quite，rather与单数名词连用，冠词放在其后。但当rather，quite 前仍有形容词，不定冠词放其前后均可，如：rather a cold day/a rather cold day。
　d. 在as，though 引导的让步状语从句中，当表语为形容词修饰的名词时，不定冠词放形容词后。例如： Brave a man though he is，he trembles at the sight of snakes. 他尽管勇敢，可见到蛇还是发抖。
2） 定冠词位置
定冠词通常位于名词或名词修饰语前，但放在all， both，double，half，twice，three times等词之后，名词之前。例如：
All the students in the class went out.　班里的所有学生都出去了。
2.6 数词
　表示数目多少或顺序多少的词叫数词，数词分为基数词和序数词。表示数目多少的数词叫基数词；表示顺序的数词叫序数词。
　一、基数词
　　1）基数词一般可写成如345或three hundred and forty-five。
　　2）基数词一般是单数形式，但遇下列情况，常用复数：
　　 a. 与of 短语连用，表示概数，不能与具体数目连用，如scores of people 指许多人；
　　 b. 在一些表示"一排"或"一组"的词组里。例如：
They arrived in twos and threes.　他们三三两两的到了。
　　 c. 表示"几十岁"。
　　 d. 表示"年代"，用 in +the +数词复数。
　　 e. 在乘法运算的一种表示法里，如Three fives is（are）fifteen。
　二、序数词　　 序数词的缩写形式如first---1st　second---2nd　thirty-first---31st等。　
　三、 数词的用法
1）倍数表示法 a. 主语+谓语+倍数（或分数）+ as + adj. + as。例如
　　　 I have three times as many as you.　我有你三倍那么多。
　　 b. 主语+谓语+倍数（分数）+ the size （amount，length…） of…。例如：
　　　 The earth is 49 times the size of the moon.　地球是月球的49倍。
　　 c. 主语+谓语+倍数（分数）+ 形容词（副词）比较级+ than…。例如：
　　 The grain output is 8 percent higher this year than that of last year. 今年比去年粮食产量增加8%。
　　 d. 还可以用by+倍数，表示增加多少倍。例如：
　　 The production of grain has been increased by four times this year. 今年粮食产量增加了4倍。
　　2）分数表示法的构成：基数词代表分子，序数词代表分母。分子大于1时，分子的序数词
单数，分母序数词用复数。例如： 1/3 one-third； 3/37 three and three-sevenths.
冠词练习
1.When Linda was a child, her mother always let her have ______ bed.
a. the breakfast in b. the breakfast in the c. breakfast in d. breakfast in the
2.He has promised to give up ______ hundreds of times.
a. a tobacco b. tobacco c. the tobacco d. tobaccos
3.______ usually go to church every Sunday.
a. The Brown b. A Brown c. Browns d. The Browns
4.The train is running fifty miles ______.
a. an hour b. one hour c. the hour d. a hour
5.He can play almost every kind of music instrument but he is good ______.
a. at the flute b. at flute c. at a flute d. at that flute
6.The investigators found that more should be done for ______ in India.
a. those poor b. a poor c. poor d. the poor
7.You look in high spirit. You must have ______ during your holiday.
a. wonderful time b. a wonderful time c. the wonderful time d. some wonderful time
8.The city assigned a policeman to the school crossing because ______ traffic there was so heavy. a. a b. an c. the d. one
9.A new teacher was sent to the village in place of ______ one who had retired.
a. a b. the c. an d. its
10.Virtue and vice are before you;______ leads you to happiness,______ to misery.
a. the former…latter b. a former…a latter c. the former…the latter d. former…latter
11.The children in the kinder-garden soon took ______ to their teachers.
a. quite fancy b. a quite fancy c. quite a fancy d. the quite fancy
12.______ tend to bemoan the lack of character in the young generation.
a. The old b. Old c. Elderly d. Older
13.A man suffering from a chock should be given ______.
a. hot sweet tea b. a hot sweet tea c. the hot sweet tea d. one hot sweet tea
14.He answered my questions with ______ not to be expected of an ordinary schoolboy.
a. his accuracy b. a accuracy c. the accuracy d. an accuracy
15.If you go by train you can have quite ______ comfortable journey.
a. the b. one c. a d. that
16.We’re going to ______ with ______ today, aren’t we
a. the tea…the Smiths b. tea…those Smiths c. a tea…a Smith d. tea…the Smiths
17.I want an assistant with ______ knowledge of French and ______ experience of office routine. a. the…the b. a…the c. a…an d. the…an
18.Ann’s habit of riding a motorcycle up and down the road early in the morning annoyed the neighbors and ______ they took her to the court.
a. in the end b. at the end c. in an end d. in end
19.It is reported that today ______ president will have lunch with ______ President Omon.
a. the…the b. a…a c. the…/ d. /…/
20.Tianan Men Square and ______ Great Wall are tow of the places everyone should see in ______ People’s Republic of China. a. the…the b. /…/ c. the…/ d. /…the
21.It has long been known that there is an electric field ______.
a. inside the earth b. inside earth c. inside an earth d. on earth
22.______ much harder work, the volunteers were able to place the raging forest fire______.
a. By the means of…under the control b. By means of…under control
c. By means of…under a control d. By a means of…under control
23.No sooner had the man departed than the tree began dropping coffee beans ______.
a. by the thousand b. by a thousand c. by thousands d. by thousand
24.He expressed ______ of their having ever been married.
a. the doubt b. a doubt c. doubt d. an doubt
25.He saw through the little boy’s tricks ______.
a. at glance b. at the glance c. at some glance d. at a glance
26.Their victory is ______,for they’ve lost too many men.
a. out of question b. out of the question c. out question d. of question
27.Many a girl wants to become ______.
a. some secretary b. a secretary c. secretary d. secretaries
28.He grabbed me ______ and pulled me onto the bus.
a. a arm b. an arm c. the arm d. by the arm
29.I’ll come in ______ minute; in fact I’ll come ______ moment I’m through.
a. /…the b. a…the c. the…a d. /…/
30.This is one of ______ interesting books on your subject.
a. the most b. the most of the c. most d. most of the
31.He enjoys life ______ the “Queen Anne”.
a. on a board b . on board c. in the board d. board
32.He lost his fob and ______ his wife left him.
a. on that top b. on top of that c. on a top of that d. on the top
33.Most of the representatives think that ______ the meeting was very successful.
a. on whole of b. on a whole c. on the whole d. on the whole that
34.Under no circumstances will there be wage control while I am ______ of the government.
a. the head b. a head c. head d. that head
35.Like his sister, David needed ______ from some generous person in order to get home.
a. a ride b. some ride c. ride d. the ride
36.The brain’s left hemisphere controls logic and language, while ______controls intuitive talents and musical ability. a. the right b. a right c. that right d. right one
37.______ is setting up a research team to see how children react to video games.
a. The Japan’s Health Ministry b. Japan’s health Ministry
c. A Japan’s health Ministry d. Japan health Ministry
38.Unlike Americans, who seem to prefer coffee,______ a great deal of tea.
a. English drink b. The English drink c. English man drink d. the English drinks
39.Hundreds of people are ______ now, so there are about 50 people trying for the same position. a.out of the work b. out work c. out of work d. out of a work
40.His mother taught ______ ,but his father was only a blue-collar worker.
a. piano b. an piano c. the piano d. a piano
41.Contrary to what I had expected, he lost for ______.
a. second time b. a second time c. second times d. the second time
42.Fashions change and people change too, but the old feeling remains ______.
a. the same b. same c. that same d. as same
43.We are going to dine tomorrow with ______ to celebrate Christmas Day.
a. the Cunning b. Cunnings c. The Cunnings d. Cunning’s
44.This is ______ which is collected before the first rain in Spring.
a. one tea b. a tea c. the tea d. that tea
45.______ is known by its note,______ is known by his talk.
a. A bird/a man b. One bird/one man c. The bird/the man d. Bird/man
46.Never travel with ______ who leaves you in case of danger.
a. the friend b. that friend c. a friend d. friend
47.Do you think it possible for the North Pole to have ______ a few thousand years from now a. Shanghai b. a Shanghai c. the Shanghai d. one Shanghai
48.I don’t think ______ is a better car than our makes.
a. a Ford b. Ford’s c. the Ford d. Ford
49.I didn’t know why he looked angry when I patted him ______.
a. on the head b. on head c. on a head d. on his head
50.he never fails to give you ______ when you are in trouble.
a. his helping hands b. the helping hand c. helping hands d. a helping hand
51.The historical events of that period are arranged ______.
a. in alphabetical order b. in an alphabetical order
c. in the alphabetical orders d. in a alphabetical orders
52.The like to take a vacation ______.
a. one time the year b. one time in a year c. once a year d. once in a year
53.“What is Todger ” “He is ______.”
a. a poet and novelist b. a poet and a novelist
c. poet and novelist d. the poet and novelist
54.“How did you pay the workers ”“As a rule, they are paid ______.”
a. by an your b. by the hour c. by a hour d. by hours
55.The DMZ extends about two hundred kilometers ______.
a. from east to west b. from the east to west
c. from the east to the west d. from eastern to western
56.What ______ are you planning to buy
a. make of car b. make of the car c. make of a car d. make of cars
57.______,you can’t fool her.
a. The child though Rowena is b. Though child Rowena is
c. As child Rowena is d. Child as Rowena is
58.What’s ______ is to get information about the situation first.
a. the wisest b. a wisest c. the wiser d. wisest
59.The differences between ______ are gradually being eliminated.
a. the town and the country b. town and country
c. a town and a country d. a town and the country
60.Scientists hope to send an expedition to Mars during ______.
a. the 1990s b. the 1990 c. 1990s d. 1990’s
数词练习
1.______ martyrs have heroically laid down their lives for the people.
a. Thousand upon thousand of b. Thousand and thousands of
c. Thousands upon thousands of d. Thousand and thousand of
2.They received ______ of letters about their TV programs.
a. dozen b. dozen and dozen c score d. dozens
3.Who is that man,______ in the front row a. one b. the one c. first d. the first
4.We have produced ______ this year as we did in 1993.
a. as much cotton twice b. as twice much cotton
c. much as twice cotton d. twice as much cotton
5.The earth is about ______ as the moon.
a. as fifty time big b. fifty times as big c. as big fifty time d. fifty as times big
6.The population of many Alaskan cities has ______ in the past three years.
a. more than doubled b. more doubled than c. much than doubled d. much doubled than
7.The moon is about _____ in diameter as diameter as the earth.
a. one-three as large b. one three as large c. one-third as large d. one third as large
8.Five hundred yuan a month _____ enough to live on.
a. is b. are c. is being d. has been
9.______ of the buildings were ruined.
a. Three fourth b. Three four c. Three-fourths d. Three-four
10.Consult _____ for questions about earthquakes.
a. the six index b. index six c. sixth index d. index numbering six
11.She went to the countryside ______.
a. in the morning at nine/on June first,1968
b. on June first,1968/in the morning at nine
c. at nine in the morning/on June first,1968 d. on June first,1968/at nine in the morning
12.Three-fourths of the surface of the earth ______ covered with water.
a. are b. is c. were d. be
13.This month the production of stainless steel in our steelworks has increased ______ 2,000 tons. a. with b. in c. on d. by
14.With the miniaturization of the structural components the weight of these electric devices has decreased ________ 30 percent. a. as b. with c. in d. by
15.The Olympic Games are held ______.
a. every four years b. every four year c. every fourth years d. every four-years
16.As he is not in good health, he goes to his factory only ______ just to learn something about the progress of experiment.
a. once a week b. one week c. one time a week d. one a week
17.Three students ______ in this university come from the South.
a. of ten b. out of in ten c. out of ten d. in tens
18.Strings of the same thickness made of nylon are ______.
a. five times stronger than those b. five time stronger than those
c. five times strong than those d. five times stronger as those
19.the wheels of the old wagon are nearly ______ those of a modern car.
a. twice the size of b. twice size of c. twice sizes of d. twice the size of
20.One day on the moon is ______.
a. two Earth week long b. two Earth weeks long
c. two Earth weeks longer d. two Earth weeks length
限定词练习
1.My hand was hurt. Could you do ______ typing for me
a. some b. many c. such d. any
2.There were ______ students in the reading room. a. neither b. not c. no d. none
3.If it is of ______ use to you, please take it. a. some b. many c. no d. any
4.I’ve invited five people to tea this afternoon. Out of them, only John and Mary can come,______ can’t. a. other b. the other c. others d. the others
5.Most English people go to Spain for the sea, the sun and all the ______ things associated with a relaxing holiday. a. any b. another c. some d. other
6.______ were ironed by my mother yesterday.
a. The all sheets b. all of sheets c. All the sheets d. Sheets of all
7.As usual,______ man was given his individual assignment.
a. every b. each c. all d. both
8.They saw ______ girls the day before yesterday.
a. both the other two b. the two other both c. the both other two d. the both two other
9.One uses the freezer, the computer and the business school to manufacture ______ dishes in never a tick longer than 100 seconds.
a. such others b. other such c. such other d. other such a
10.______ boxer was strong, but ______ had a good build and was light on his feet.
a.Either/every b. Neither/each c. Both/both d. All the/all
11.______ was astonished to find himself rooting and shouting in a most undignified manner.
a. Many elderly man b. A many elderly men
c. Many an elderly man d. Many elderly men
12.I know now, of course, there is ______ as love.
a. no such a thing b. not such thing c. not a thing d. no such thing
13.As there were ______ life-boats for everybody,40 lives were lost.
a. as little b. so little c. too few d. very few
14.He was brave;_____ soldiers fought so bravely in that battle.
a. no others b. no another c. no other d. not other
15.I don’t think we have met before. I’m afraid you’re confusing me with ______.
a. some other b. some other person c. other person d. one other
16.Weekends last from Friday evening to Sunday night.______ days are week-days.
a. The other b. Another c. Other d. Every other
17.We had ______ good time that we hated to leave the party.
a. such a b. such c. so d. pretty
18.Paris is ______ that we can hardly visit all the beautiful parks in two or three days.
a.such large a city b. so a large city c. such a large city d. a such large city
19.Deputies to the National People’s Congress are elected_______.
a. every four year b. each four years c. every of four years d. every four years
20.There is hardly ______difference between the two libraries.
a. no b. any c. much d. some
21.For young people, Carpenter is ______ singer.
a. most their popular b. most popular of theirs
c.their most popular d. most popular of their
22.______ are about the American Independent War.
a. Both book b. Both books c. All the two book d. all of two books
23.When I am in trouble, my friends will give me their hands without ______ hesitation.
a. some b. a c. any d. the
24.You’re welcome to my house ______ time you’d like.
a. the b. any c. no d. some
25.He was very much disappointed because ______ went to his wedding party.
a. no his friends b. all no his friends c. none his friends d. none of his friends
26.You shouldn’t stop your car here since there is a sign ‘______’.
a. Not Parking b. No Park c. No Parking d. Not a Park
27.I cannot invited ______ of you, since I’ve got only one extra ticket.
a. either b. both c. some d. one
28.______ the idioms are not easy to remember and use.
a. Every b. Some c. All d. Each
29.There is a line of trees in ______ side of the river.
a. every b. each c. per d. none
30.______ our countries are developing countries. a. Each b. Either c. Every d. Both
31.The scientist wrote a number of books, but ______ books were novels.
a. last two his b. his last two c. two his last d. last two of his
32.Have you got ______ copies to go around
a. much c. a large amount of c. enough d. great
33.You can never use my car. ____ time should you touch it.
a. At no b. At any c. any d. No
34.My brother is going on the picnic with ______ friends.
a. his two little other b. other his two little
c. his other little two d. his two other little
35.Those examples are not enough, you should give ______ examples to make your argument convincing. a. some b. any c. some more d. any more
36.______ feels entitled to more in life than just housework.
a. Many women b. A lot of woman c. Many a woman d. A few woman
37.You will have to practice ______ times before you can do it.
a.many more b. more many c. more often d. more several
38.It is ______ work of art that everyone wants to have a look at it.
a. a so unusual b. such an unusual c. so unusual d. such unusual
39.This cake is delicious, but I can’t eat ______.
a. some b. no c. any d. much
40.Here are some books by American writers. You can read ______ you like.
a. any b. which c. what one d. whichever one
冠词练习答案
1 C 19 C 37 B 55 C
2 B 20 A 38 B 56 A
3 D 21 A 39 C 57 D
4 A 22 B 40 C 58 D
5 A 23 C 41 B 59 B
6 D 24 B 42 A 60 A
7 B 25 D 43 C 61
8 C 26 B 44 B 62
9 B 27 D 45 A 63
10 C 28 D 46 C 64
11 C 29 B 47 B 65
12 A 30 A 48 C 66
13 C 31 B 49 A 67
14 D 32 B 50 D 68
15 C 33 C 51 A 69
16 D 34 C 52 C 70
17 C 35 A 53 A 71
18 A 36 A 54 B 72

数词练习答案
1 C 6 A 11 C 16 A
2 D 7 C 12 B 17 C
3 D 8 A 13 D 18 A
4 D 9 C 14 D 19 A
5 B 10 B 15 A 20 B

限定词练习答案
1 A 19 D 37 A
2 C 20 B 38 B
3 D 21 C 39 C
4 D 22 B 40 D
5 D 23 C 41
6 C 24 B 42
7 B 25 D 43
8 A 26 C 44
9 B 27 B 45
10 B 28 C 46
11 C 29 B 47
12 D 30 D 48
13 C 31 B 49
14 A 32 C 50
15 B 33 A 51
16 A 34 D 52
17 A 35 C 53
18 C 36 C 54 (共27张PPT)
设计与制作： 黄耀春
江苏省南莫中学
英语教研中心
Non-infinitive
(非谓语动词)
____ late in the morning , Bob turned off the alarm.
To sleep B. Sleeping C. Sleep D. Having slept
(2001春季高考 第21题)
Multiple choice
2 ____ a letter from her parents, Lily is now looking
forward to ___ from them.
Having not received; hear B. Not received; hear
C. Not having received; hearing D. Receiving not; hearing
V. +ing phrases : appreciate; avoid; can’t help; consider; enjoy; escape; finish; give up; imagine; insist on; keep(on); mind;miss…
devote oneself to; pay attention to; be used to; get down to…
A
C
类型
年份 题量 不定式 V. -ing 过去分词
1996 2 1（18题） 1（23题）
1997 2 1（12题）
1998 2 1（25题）
1999 3 2（14、21题） 1（25题）
2000 2 1（19题） 1（22题）
近五年非谓语动词在高考中的复现率
过去分词
不定式
V.-ing 形式
非谓语动词
高考题
巩固 题1
巩固 题2
不定式的作用
不定式的时态
不定式的否定形式
不定式
近五年不定式考查了5道题，主要考查了不定式做宾语和 表语。此外还考了不定式的时态和否定形式。
1.作状语
2.作定语
3.作表语
4.作补语
过去分词
不定式
不定式的作用
1
[例1] NMET 2000 第19题
I’ve work with children before, so I know what ___ in my job.
A. expected B. to expect C. to be expecting D. expects
B
解析
该题考查疑问+不定式在句中做宾语的用法。英语中有一些动词 后可以跟一个疑问词的不定式做宾语，如：
tell, discuss, know, show, learn, decide, wonder, explain…
解析
[例2] NMET 1999 第21题
The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier, ____ it more difficult.
A. not make B. not to make C. not making D. do not make.
B
不定式
不定式的作用
1
因为主语是the purpose，在（purpose, wish, promise, plan）后常跟不定式，故表语要用不定式，to不能省略，因此构成the purpose is to…not to…do 句型，故选B 。
不定式的时态
2
[例3] NMET 1997第12题
I would love _____ to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to finish a report.
A. to go B. having gone C. going D. to have gone
D
不定式
解析
该题考查动词不定式做宾语的 用法。Would love(like) to 是固定搭配，因此B、C、不合题意。Would love+不定式一般式，表示“想，希望”，而接不定式完成式则表示“原本希望而未曾实现”的意思。
[例4] NMET 1999 第14题
Robert is said ____ abroad, but I don’t know what country he studied in.
to have studied B. to study
C. to be study D. to have been studying
A
常和不定式完成式连用的动词还有：
Would love, meant, hoped, planned, expected, promised,
wish等
例如：I meant to have telephoned you, but I forgot.
解析
不定式
不定式的否定形式
3
[例5] NMET 1996年
The patient was warned ____ oily food after the operation.
A. to eat not B. eating not C. not to eat D. not eat
C
解析
该题考查不定式的否定式作主补。要注意warn后跟词方式， ① warn sb. not to do sth. ②warn sb. against doing sth. 该题应该用①结构另外，not 应放在to之前。
在大多数的动词可接不定式短语做宾补，只有少数动词（五个看see,watch,notice, observe,look at；三使役make,let, have;二听listen to,hear等）须接不带to 的不定式做宾补。
过去分词
过去分词主要考查其在句中作状语、定语、表语和补语的用法。
1.作状语
[例1] NMET1996第23题
_____ in thought,he almost ran into the car in front of him.
A. Losing B. Having lost C. Lost D. To lose
C
解析
1.该题考查过去分词作状语的用法。动词-ing或过去分词作状语，其逻辑主语应是主语。
2.“陷入深思”有两种表达法， A.Lose oneself in thought B.be lost in thought,按句子提供的语境可用结构B.
过去分词
2.作定语
[例2] NMET1997第17题
The Olympic Games,___ in 776 B.C.did not include women players until 1912.
A. first played B. to be first played
C. first playing D. to be first playing
A
解析
①过去 分词做定语与其修饰词之间是动宾关系且过去分词表示的动作以完成。
② 现在分词作定语表示动作正在发生，与修饰词是主谓关系。
③不定式作定语表示将要发生的动作。
所以A是正确的。First played in 776B.C.=which was first played in 776 B.C.
过去分词
3.作表语
[例3] NMET1998第23题
Cleaning women in big cities usually get ____ by the hour.
A. pay B. paying C. paid D. to pay
C
解析
该题考查分词作表语的用法。“to pay sb. by the hour” 计时给某人报酬。此题被动结构作表语。类似的有：get burnt, get hurt , get wounded.
V.-ing 形式
v.-ing 形式主要考查其在句子中作定语和状语的用法
[例 ] NMET1998
European football is played in 80 countries, ___ it the most popular sport in the world.
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
A
解析
解析
Making it the popular sport in the world为现在分词短语作结果状语，这类分词短语常放在句子的后面,ing表示顺其自然，不定式表示突然，出乎意料。如：
His parents died, leaving him an orphan.
He rushed to the post office only to find it was closed
过去分词
4.作补语
解析
该题考查过去分词作宾语补足语的用法。the plan 与carry out 的关系是被动关系。see sth.done 这结构常见的还有watch(notice, observe,have 和make)sth. done.
[例4] NMET2000第22题
The managers discussed the plan that they would like to see ___ the next year.
A. carry out B. carrying out C. carried out D. to carry out
C
1. The speaker raised his voice but still couldn’t make himself____ . (NMET91 34)
A.hear B. to hear C. hearing D. heard
2. On afternoon, Mrs Green went to the market, ____ some bananas and visited her cousin. (NMET91 23)
A. bought B. buying C. to buy D. writing
3. --I usually go there by train.
--Why not ____ by boat for a change (NMET92 14)
A. to try going B. trying to go C. to try and go D. try going
4. ____ a reply, he decided to write again. (MET92 39)
A. Not receiving B. Receiving not
C. Not having received D. Having not received
5. How about the two of us ____ a walk down the garden (MET93 17)
A. to take B. take C. taking D. to be taking
6. ____ down the radio ---- the baby’s asleep in the next room.
(MET93 24)
A. Turning B. To turn C. Turned D. Turn
7. Charles Babbage is generally considered ____ the first computer.
(MET93 34)
A. to invent B. inventing C. to have invented D. having invented
8. ---I must apologize for ____ ahead of time.
---That’s all right. (MET94 21)
A. letting you not know B. not letting you know
C. letting you know not D. letting not you know
9. Rather than ___ on a crowded bus, he always prefers ____ a bicycle. (NMET94 22)
A. ride; ride B. riding; ride C. ride; to ride D. to ride; riding
10. The missing boys were last seen ____ near the river.(NMET94 25)
A. playing B. to be playing C. play D. to play
11. The first textbooks ____ for teaching English as a foreign language came out in the 16th century. (NMET94 34)
A.having written B. to be written C. being written D. written
12. ---You were brave enough to raised objections at the meeting.
---Well, now I regret ____ that. (NMET95 26)
A. to do b. to be doing C. to have done D. having done
13. The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told
him_____. (NMET95 35)
A. not to B. not to do C. not do it D. do not to
14. ---What do you think made Mary so upset
---____ her new bicycle. (97上海 13)
A. As she lost B. Lost C. Losing D. Because of losing
15. She can’t help ____ the house because she’s busy making a cake.
(97 上海12)
A. to clean B. cleaning C. cleaned D. being cleaned
16. She looks forward every spring to _____ the flower-lined garden.
(95 上海20)
A. visit B. paying a visit C. walk in D. walking in
17. While shopping, people sometime can’t help ____ into buying
something they don’t really need. (96上海14)
A. to pursue B. persuading C. being persuaded D. be persuaded
18. The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier, ____ it more difficult. (NMET99 21)
A. not make B. not to make C. not making D. do not make
19. A computer does only what thinking people _____. (99上海19)
A. have it do B. have it done C. have done it D. having it done
20. When I got back home I saw a message pinned to the door ____
“Sorry to miss you; will call later.” (NMET99 25)
A. read B. reads C. to read D. reading
5.Mrs.Smith warned her husband_____after drinking again
and again.
A.never to drive B.to never drive C.never driving D.never drive
6. To master a foreign language,______.
A. a lot of practice is needed B. it needs a lot of practice
C. practice is in need of D. one needs a lot of practice
20. The library needs ______,but it’ll have to wait until Sunday.
A. cleaning B. be cleaned C. clean D. being cleaned
4.Our father often told us in the past that _____is believing.
A.to see B.seeing C.see D.to be seen
1.He gave us some advice on how____ English.
A.learning B. learned C. to learn D. learn
2. It ’s a pay day，and they are waiting____.
A. pay B. paying C. paid D. to be paid
3. --- A letter may be too slow.
---- Why not ____ a telegram.
A.try sending B.try to send C.to try sending D.trying to send
巩固练习
C
D
A
B
A
D
1._____is a good of exercise for both the young and the old.
A.The walk B.Walking C.To walk D.Walk
2.When and where to build the new power station______yet.
A.is not decided B.are not decided
C.has not decided D.have not decided
3.Is______necessary to change trains at Beijing
A. this B. that C. it D. he
4.Our father often told us in the past that _____is believing.
A.to see B.seeing C.see D.to be seen
5.She pretended____the letter I wrote the day before yesterday.
A.not to receive B.not receiving
C.not to hear from D.having not received
6.I can’t imagine_____that with such a famous author.
A.work B.to work C.to be working D.working
Non-infinitive
7.She reached the top of the hill and stopped_____on a big rock by the side of the path.
A.to have rested B.resting C.to rest D.rest
8.Do you consider___any good attempting many scientific experiments
A.there B.it C.this D.that
9.I’m thirsty. Would you please give me something________.
A.drunk B.to drink C.to be drunk D.for drinking
10.There was a terrible noise_______the sudden burst of light.
A.followed B.following C.to be followed D.being followed
11．Mrs.Smith warned her husband_____after drinking again
and again.
A.never to drive B.to never drive
C.never driving D.never rive
12.They knew her very well.They had seen her____up from childhood.
A.grow B.grew C.was growing D.to grow
13. Believe it or not, he was seen______upstairs just now.
A.to go B.to going C.having gone D.go
14.It was so cold that they kept the fire ____all night.
A. to burn B. burn C. burning D. burned
15.The murderer was brought in ,with his hands _behind his back.
A. being tied B. having tied C. to be tied D. tied
16.To master a foreign language,______.
A. a lot of practice is needed B. it needs a lot of practice
C. practice is in need of D. one needs a lot of practice
17._________a reply, he decided to write a sixth letter.
A. Not receiving B. Not to receive
C. Not having received D. Having not received
18. Little Jim should love _____to the theatre this evening.
A. to be taken B. to take C. being taken D. taking
19. —What do you think of the book
—Oh, excellent. It’s worth ______a second time.
A. to read B. to be read C. reading D. being read
20. The library needs ______,but it’ll have to wait until Sunday.
A. cleaning B. be cleaned C. clean D. being cleaned
Thank you for coming!(共24张PPT)
The Attributive Clause
———定语从句中应注意的
几个问题
一、引导定语从句的关系词
指代人 who，whom，that
指代事物 which，that
所属关系 whose，of which
指地点 where
指时间 when
指原因 why
二、关系代词that和which在很多情况下可以互换，但下列情况只用that。
All ______ can be done has been done.
Do you have anything ________ you don’t understand
There is little _______ can be believed about it .
The book doesn’t say much ________ amuses children.
that
that
that
that
先行词是all ,everything,nothing,anything,something,much,little,none等不定代词，引导定语从句用that 。
Hamburg is the most beautiful city _______I’ve ever seen.
This is the best TV _______ is made in China.
The first museum _______ he visited in China was the History Museum.
that
that
that
先行词被形容词最高级或序数词修饰时，引导定语从句用that 。
I’ve read all the books ________ you lent me.
No sample ________ we nave received is satisfactory.
Please send us any information ________ you have about the subject.
He is the only person _________ was present at the time.
that
that
that
that
先行词被any,some,no,much,few,little,every,all,very,only,last修饰时，引导定语从句用that 。
The famous writer and his works _________ the radio broadcast have aroused great interest among the students.
A victim is a person,animal or thing ________ suffers pain,death,harm,etc.
that
that
先行词中既有人又有事物时，引导定语从句用that .
Who _______ you have ever seen can do it better
Who _______ you are talking to is the young fellow
that
that
Who做先行词时，引导定语从句用that 。
Well done !
三、不用that，而用which，who，whom的情况
He made the same mistakes again ,_____ made his parents very angry.
Yesterday I bought a dictionary,_______ cost me more than 100 yuan .
Mr Smith,_______ gave a talk several months ago,will come again.
My uncle has come back from abroad,________ I haven’t met for along time.
which
which
who
whom
在非限制性定语从句中，指事物用which，指人用who或whom。
Her bag ,in ________ she put all her money,has been stolen.
This is the ring on ________ she spent 1000 dollars.
Xiao Wang ,with ________ I went to the concert, enjoy it very much.
which
which
which
在介词后面，指事物用which，指人用whom。
注意：如何判断介词
The girl _____ which he had fought all his life no longer seemed important to him.
He is the man _____ whom I think you can depend .
1、看定语从句中动词与介词的搭配
for
on
3、根据先行词判断，所用的介词与先行词 搭配
The rate ______ which wild animals are being destroyed has increased.
This is our classroom ,_______________ which there is a teacher’s desk.
at
in the front of
2、看定语从句中形容词与介词的搭配
He referred me to some reference books ______ which I am not very familiar.
Dolphins might be trained to cooperate with fishermen and help them by finding or even catching fish, ______ all of which activities dolphins are expert.
with
in
The committee consists of 20 members,5 of _______ are women.
The book contains 50 poems, most of ________ was written in 1930s.
There are two left, one of _______ is almost finished ,and the other of _______ is not quite.
I have a sentence , the meaning of _______ I don’t understand.
whom
which
which
which
which
名词/代词/数词+ of +which/whom
Where 引导的定语从句。
先行词是表示地点的名词或含有地点意义的抽象名词，用引导定语从句。从句做状语。
This is the town where (= in which ) I spent my childhood.
The table where (= at which ) she is sitting is a new one.
I’ll show you the paint where you failed.
注意 1
若定语从句缺主语或谓语，用which或that引导定语从句。
The library ________ students often study was on fire last night.
The library, _______ was built in the 1930s,needs repairing.
The library ________ you visited yesterday was built in 1990.
where
which
which
注意 2
区分where引导的定语从句和状语从句
Where前面有被修饰的地点名词时，是定语从句，否则是状语从句。
When you read books ,you had better make a mark at the spot where you have any questions.
When you read books , you had better make a mark where you have any questions.
When 引导的定语从句。
先行词是表示时间的名词，用when引导定语从句。从句作状语。
I’ll never forget the day when (= on which ) I met you.
This was the time when ( =at which ) he left for Beijing .
We will put off the outing until next week, when we won’t be busy.
注意：
若定语从句缺主语或宾语，用which或that引导定语从句。
I’ll never forget the day _________ we first met in the park.
I’ll never forget the time _________ I spent on campus.
I’ll never forget the time __________ was spent with you.
when
which\that
which\that
why引导的定语从句。
先行词是表示原因的名词，用why引导定语从句。Why在从句中作状语。
This is the reason why ( = for which ) I didn’t come here.
但是也要注意：不是每句都能这样。
The reason __________ she gave was not true.
which\that
whose 引导的定语从句。
表示所属关系。
The river _________ banks are covered with trees flows into the sea.
whose
There are 20 students in this class, ______ are different.
A.whose backgrounds
B.the backgrounds of whom
C.of whom the backgrounds
D.the backgrounds of whose
As 引导限制性定语从句时，先行词常有such 和 the same 修饰，as 在从句中不省略。as也常修饰整个句子，可放在句末，甚至句中或句首。
For example:
He has bought the same type of bike as I have .
Such teachers as know Tom think him bright
As we know,China is a developing country.
He,as we expected,came to the party on time.(共41张PPT)
名词的分类
可数名词变复数注意事项
不可数名词
名词的格
名词的分类
可数名词
不可数名词
集体名词
个体名词
物质名词
抽象名词
普通名词
专有名词
teacher, bus,…..
people, crew,….
rice, air,water,…
knowledge, friendship
名词
China, Bill Gates, the Great Wall,…
Proper Nouns:
指人名、地名及某些人和事物专有的名称
Eg:Diana; Beijing; Americans;English; May; New Year’s Day
注意：专有名词的第一个字母要大写
Common Nouns：
专有名词以外的名词都是普通名词
1。Individual Nouns: 指作为个体而存在的人或东西。
可以指具体的人或物。Eg: aunts; a panda; apartments
也可指抽象东西。Eg: a year; fairy tales; a dream
2. Collective Nouns: 表示由个体组成的集体。
Eg: army; audience; crew; family; team; police; government; public
集体名词有时作单数看待，有时作复数看。一般来说，视为整体时作单数看，突出它的成员时作复数看。
Eg: His family isn’t large.
Cf: His family are all music lovers.
在不少情况下，集体名词后单复数动词都可以用，没什么差别。
Eg: The audience was (were) excited by the show.
有少数集体名词通常用作单数。
Eg: The gang is being hunted by the police.
Our company is sending him to work in Berlin.
个别集体名词则多作复数看待。
Eg: The police are looking for him.
3. Material Nouns: 指无法分为个体的东西。
Eg: beer; cake; cloth; cotton; detergent(清洁剂); fur; ice; paint; paper; soil
一般来说，物质名词是不可数的，因而没有复数形式。但有一些特殊情况：
1)有些物质名词可用作可数名词，表示“一份”、“一杯”、“一种”
Eg: Two strong black coffees, please. ( 两份）
Three beers, please. (三杯）
It was a special tea. (一种）
2)个别物质名词的复数形式可以表示特别的意义。
Eg: rains （雨季）snows (积雪）waters(海域)…
4.Abstract Nouns: 表示一些抽象的概念。
Eg: education; love; policy; trust; nature; fashion; relief; silence; truth,etc.
多数情况下，这种名词常用于单数形式，不加任何冠词。
Eg: He’s learning French for fun.
I wish you good luck.
有时也可以加冠词。
He works hard for the welfare of the poor.
After a brief peace, war broke out again.
有些名词可以兼作可数名词和不可数名词。
glass ( 玻璃 )
copper ( 铜 )
tin ( 锡 )
paper ( 纸 )
iron (铁 )
wood ( 木头 )
gold (金子 )
youth (青春 )
power ( 力量 )
beauty ( 美 )
pleasure( 愉快 )
relation(关系）
a glass ( 玻璃杯 )
a copper ( 铜币／板 )
a tin ( 罐头，听头 )
a paper ( 报纸，证件，论文 )
an iron (熨斗 )
a wood ( 树林 )
a gold (金牌 )
a youth (年青人 )
a power ( 大国 )
a beauty ( 美人，美的东西 )
a pleasure( 使人感到愉快的事 )
a relation(亲戚）
　英语中有许多对词，一个可数，一个不可数。
a poem(一首诗 )
a machine(一台机器 )
a job(一件工作 )
a laugh(一个笑声 )
a permit(许可证 )
a garment (一件衣裳 )
a bag(case) (一件行李 )
a loaf (一只面包 )
a hair(一根头发 )
poetry(诗歌总称 )
machinery(机器总称 )
work(工作 )
laughter(笑声 )
permission(允许 )
clothing(衣裳总称 )
luggage, baggage(行李 )
bread(面包 )
hair( 头发)
可数名词变复数的规则变化
一般在词尾加-s
以-s,-x,-ch,-sh结尾的加-es
以辅音字母加y结尾时，把y变成i，再加-es
以f或fe结尾时，把f,fe改为v,再加es
变复数的几点注意项
以-o 结尾的名词加es在课本中出现的有Negro, hero, potato, tomato；其余以-o结尾的词加-s: (photo, piano, radio, bamboo,zoo, …)
有些以-f或fe结尾的词直接加-s (chief,cliff, belief, safe, gulf,roof, …)
以元音字母+y结尾的或专有名词以y结尾的直接加-s toys, Germanys, Henrys
在大写字母及大写字母的缩写形式的复数中，加-s,如：three UFOs,但A、I的复数应在其后加’s，如： There are two A’s in this word.
小写字母及数字的复数形式应加’s, 如： two 6’s three a’s
stomach----stomachs
不规则变化
变内部元音。如：foot-feet, tooth-teeth, goose-geese ,mouse-mice, man-men, woman-women,policeman-policemen
词尾加-en或ren。如：ox-oxen,child-children
单复数相同。如：sheep,deer,aircraft,fish, steelworks, means, Chinese, Swiss, Japanese,….
汉语音译词无复数形式。（表示度量衡，币制等单位的名词）如:five yuan,six jin, two jiao
“某国人”的复数形式：
单、复数相同 Chinese, Japanese, Swiss,…
词尾加-s Africans, Asians, Canadians, Australians, Italians,……
变man为men Englishman---Englishmen, Frenchman---Frenchmen
但：German---Germans
复合名词的复数
一般将主体名词变为复数。father-in-law → fathers-in-law, passer-by→passers-by, looker-on→lookers-on, editor-in-chief → editors-in-chief
无主体名词的在词尾加复数。如：grown-ups, good-for-nothings（无用的人），go-betweens （中间人），look-outs（守望者）
由man,woman,构成的复合名词应将前后两个词都变成复数。men-doctors, women-drivers, women-singers
boyfriends,girlfriends, boy students, girl students
常作复数的或复数形式表特别意义的名词：
glasses, trousers, gloves, shoes, scissors, socks, handcuffs(手铐), jeans(牛仔裤), earnings(薪水), savings（储蓄),findings（调查结果), clothes, surroundings（环境), greetings（致敬), goods, ruins, twins, resources, woods, forces(军队), arms(军火)， plastics（塑料制品）, manners(礼貌), greens(青菜), times(时代), sands(沙滩), works(工厂,作品）contents(内容), thanks, congratulations, tears, ashes, …..
一些物质名词有时以复数形式出现，表示不同的类别。
foods (各种食物), metals(各种金属),fruits(各种水果), fertilizers(各种化肥), silks(各种丝绸),teas(各种茶)
在短语中用复数形式的名词。如：do exercises, take turns, take notes, make repairs,in high spirits, as follows, hurt one’s feelings, in rags, in dozens，make friends with…, shake hands with…,
在有些短语中，名词用单复数均可。如：make faces / a face, play jokes/a joke on sb.,have talkes/a talk with…
在有的短语中名词用单复数，意思有差别。如：have a word with sb.（同某人说句话），have words with sb.（同某人吵架）
不可数名词的量的表达---“a(数词)+单位词+of ”
表个数：piece(张，片，块，份) article(件) item(条）block(大块) set(台，套）sheet(张， 块) 如：some articles of furniture, four items of news
以形状表个数： cake(块), bar(条),ear(穗), grain(粒),sheaf(捆),slice(薄片), pile(堆), loaf (块), flight(楼梯的一段), drop(滴) 如：a bar of chocolate, two ears of corn, a grain of rice
以容器表数量：cup,bowl, bucket,box,spoonful(匙)
以行为状态表数量：fit(一阵) flash(闪光，显露) ray(线) 如：a fit of anger(一阵怒火），a flash of lighting (一道闪电), a ray of hope(一线希望)
有些名词作不可数名词用时表抽象概念，与不定冠词连用或用作可数名词时表个体事物
beauty(美，美貌)---a beauty(一个美人或美物)
danger(危险)—a danger
failure(失败)—a failure
honour(光荣)—an honour(带来荣誉的人或事)
must( 必须)—a must(一件必要的事或物)
pity(遗憾)—a pity(一件可惜的事)
(一件失败的事或一个失败的人)
(一件危险的事或一个危险的人)
service(服务)—a service(一个服务机构)
success(成功)—a success
surprise(惊奇)—a surprise(一件令人吃惊的事)
pleasure(乐趣)—a pleasure(一件有趣的事)
worry(担心)—a worry
experience(经验)—an experience(一次经历)
(一件成功的事或一个成功的人)
(一件令人担心的事或一个令人担忧的人)
名词的格
英语中的名词（代词）有三个格：主格、宾格、所有格
所有格表示所有关系，修饰另一名词，作定语，它有两种形式：一种是由名词词尾加’s构成，另一种是由介词of加名词构成，前者多用来表示有生命的东西，后者多用来表示无生命的东西。
注意事项：
复合名词的所有格是在其词尾加“’s”。如： his mother-in-law’s photo the editor-in-chief’s opinion
2. 末尾以s结尾的复数名词，在词尾加“’”构成所有格。如：the teachers’ books 不以s结尾的复数名词，应在词尾加“’s”,如：the children’s balls 以s结尾的单数名词的所有格有两种，加“’”或“’s”,如：my boss’/boss’s computer
3.如果一样东西为两人共有，则只在最后一个名词后加“’s”,如果是分别所有，则两个名词后都要加“’s”。如：Tom and Marry’s father, Tom’s and Marry’s fathers
4.在表示“某人家”、“店铺”的所有格时，一般省略它所修饰的名词。
at the doctor’s, at the barber’s, at Mr. Green’s, to my uncle’s， at the tailor’s
5.有些表示时间、距离、国家、城市、团体、机构等无生命东西的名词，也可以加“’s”来构成所有格。today’s newspaper ten minutes’s walk China’s industry the station’s waiting-room
6. 在表示所属物的名词前有冠词、数词、不定代词或指示代词时，常使用双重所有格，即“of词组+所有格”结构。这种结构带有一定的感彩，表示赞美、厌恶等。
a friend of her mother’s
a few friends of Tom’s
that book of Tom’s
some daughter of Mr.Brown’s
7.名词原形直接作定语。（不表示所有关系） room number coffee cup shoe factory geography lesson colour film tooth brush power plant welcome party heart trouble food industry apple tree physics teacher
但：有的名词习惯于用复数作定语。 parents meeting(家长会) goods train(货车) sales department (销售部) sports meet(运动会)
名词所有格(The Possessive Case of Nouns)
some patterns:
I’ll take the risk for friendship’s sake.
She was at her wit’s end.
Now they could sing at their heart’s content.
We should get the children out of harm’s way.
We had best keep them at arm’s length.
For goodness’ sake,stop arguing.
Jane got the money’s worth out of the coat.
(为了友谊）
（黔驴技穷）
（很合算）
（尽情地）
（不受损害）
（保持距离）
（看在上帝的份上）
（很合算）
主谓一致
１。语法形式上的一致（主单谓单；主复谓复）
２。意义上的一致（主语形单意复，谓语用复数。Eg: people; police)（主语形复意单，谓语用单数。Eg: news;economics)
3.就近原则：　either…or; neither…nor; not only…but also
4. 单复数视情况而定。
１）集体名词作主语：强调整体，用单数；强调个体，用复数
２）单复数同形名词作主语，按意义一致原则。Eg: means, species
３）中心词是all, most, half, rest时，按意义一致原则。即主语单数意义，谓语用单数；主语复数意义，谓语用复数。
４）主语是and连接两个名词时，指一样东西，谓语单数；指两样东西，谓语复数。Eg: A knife and fork is on the table.
5)代词作主语，取决于它代替的是单数还是复数。意义一致原则。Eg: ours, yours; such, the same; who, that, which; any, either, neither,(单独作主语，谓语单数） none, all, some, more,
６）分数，量词，half of, part of　作主语，于中心词保持一致。
７）what 引导的主语从句。通常用单数；所指的具体内容为复数时，谓语用复数。
８）主谓倒装，谓语与其后主语一致。
５。　谓语用单数的情况。
１）名词所有格之后的名词被省略。（指商店，工场，住宅等）作主语。Eg: The doctor’s, my uncle’s, the baker’s
2) 中心词是时间、距离、金额、度量、书名等复数名词。Eg: three years; The selected poems of Li Bai;
3) each, every, no 所修饰名词，即使以and 或逗号连接。
Eg: each boy and each girl ; every man and woman
4) 主语有more than one…; many a
5) a kind of; a pair of; a series of…
6) This kind of…
7) The number of…
8) A great deal of…; a large amount of… +un
9) One and a half +可数名词复数
eg: One and a half bananas is left on the table.
10) The departed (死者）意义上指个体
11) the only one of +可数名词复数＋定语从句。从句中的谓语用单数。
６。谓语用复数的情况。
１）police,;people;cattle; militia(民兵）作主语。
２）有两个部分构成的名词。（表示衣物或工具）eg: glasses; chopsticks…
3)these kind of men（口语); men of this kind 作主语
４）　both…and…. 修饰主语
5) A number of; large quantities of; large amounts of修饰主语
６）　the+ 形容词作主语，一般情况下
７）　one of the+可数名词复数＋定语从句，从句中谓语动词用复数。
1. Try to learn these words by heart: (通常用于复数形式的词）
scissors剪刀; pants裤子; contents目录
compasses两脚规; cords灯心絨裤; arms武器
earphones耳机; pyjamas睡衣裤; ashes灰烬
scales天平; overalls工装裤; tropics热带
spectacles眼镜; braces背带; stairs楼梯
nail-clippers指甲刀；slacks便装裤; brains头脑
belongings所有物； savings积蓄； tidings消息
doings行为； writings作品； findings调查结果
五、名词的句法功能
1 在句中作主语 This book is very useful. 这本书很有用。 Mary is to meet you at the airport. 玛丽将在机场接你。 2 作表语 My brother is a worker.我弟弟是个工人
She is a writer.她是个作家。 3 作宾语或宾补 He finished his task on time. 他按时完成了他的任务。 We made Tom our monitor. 我们选汤姆为我们的班长（consider, elect, choose,think, find…)
4 作定语 He got three gold medals at 23rd Olympic Games. 他在第二十三届奥运会上取得了三块金牌。 rain drops 雨点 colour film 彩色电影 注：名词作定语修饰名词，通常表示事物的属性、本质特征、内容、材料、目的等。这些形容词化的名词与形容词作定语在语义上有一定的区别。 a golden medal 金色的奖牌（颜色，非材料） a gold medal 金牌（质地材料为金子） a colourful dress 色彩鲜艳的女装（仅指颜色） a colour film 彩色电影（属性为彩色的） a coffee cup a letter box
a vegetable field a car factory

5 作状语 The meeting lasted two hours. 会议持续了两个小时。 Wait a moment. 等一会儿。 He was late for class this morning. 今天早晨他上课迟到了。 6 作同位语 Mr. Smith, our leader, is speaking now. 史密斯先生，我们的领导，正在讲话。 We students should study hard. 我们学生应该努力学习。 7 作称呼语 Come here, Mary. 玛丽，到这儿来。 Good morning, ladies and gentlemen. 女士们，先生们，早上好。
例题
1. I wrote a letter to show my ___ of his thoughtfulness. A. achievement B. agreement
C. attention D. appreciation
2. We all know that ___ speak louder than words.
A. movements B. performances
C. operations D. action
3. The new law will come into___ on the day it is passed.
A. effect B. use C. service D. existence
4. You will find this map of great _____ in helping you get round London.
A. price B. cost C. value D. usefulness
D
D
C
A
5.My parents always let me have my ____ of living.
A. way B.method C. manner D. fashion
6.---- Who did you spend last weekend with
---- _______.
A. Palmer’s B. The Palmers’
C. The Palmers D. The Palmer’s
7. I’ll look into the matter as soon as possible.Just have a little _______.
A. wait B. time C. patience D. rest
A
C
C
8. ____ of Mrs White’s came back home yesterday. She had been in the United States for years.
A. A daughter B. The daughter
C. Her daughter D. daughter
9.He gained his ____ by printing____ of famous writers.
A. wealth; work B. wealths; works C. wealths; work D. wealth; works
10. It will be ____ to jump into the lake to have a swim on a hot summer day.
A. fun B. a fun C. funny D. the fun
_________________
_______________
______(共14张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
名词性从句
（第二次演练）
南莫中学高三英语备课组
English Grammar
名词性从句
名词性从句是由if, whether, that 和各种疑问词充当连接词所引导的从句，其功能同名词一样。
一．主语从句
主语从句是在复合句中充当主语的从句，通常放在主句谓语动词之前或由形式主语it代替，而本身放在句子末尾。
1. It 作形式主语和it引导强调句的比较
It 作形式主语代替主语从句，主要是为了平衡句子结构，主语从句的连接词没有变化。而it引导的强调句则是对句子某一部分进行强调，无论强调的是什么成分，都可用连词that。被强调部分指人是也可用who/whom。例如：
It is a pity that you didn’t go to see the film.
It doesn’t interest me whether you succeed or not.
It is in the morning that the murder took place.
It is John that broke the window.
2. 用it 作形式主语的结构
(1) It is ＋ 名词 ＋ 从句
It is a fact that … 事实是…
It is an honor that …非常荣幸
It is common knowledge that …是常识
(2) It is ＋ 形容词 ＋ 从句
It is natural that… 很自然…
It is strange that… 奇怪的是…
(3) It is ＋ 不及物动词 ＋ 从句
It seems that… 似乎…
It happened that… 碰巧…
It appears that… 似乎…
(4) It ＋ 过去分词 ＋ 从句
It is reported that… 据报道…
It has been proved that… 已证实…
It is said that… 据说…
3. 主语从句不可位于句首的五种情况：
（1）if 引导的主语从句不可居于复合句句首。
（2）It is said /reported…结构中的主语从句不可提前。例如：
It is said that President Jiang will visit our school next week.
That President Jiang will visit our school next week is said.
（3）It happens/occurs…结构中的主语从句不可提前。例如：
It occurred to him that he failed in the examination.
That he failed in the examination occurred to him.
（4）It doesn’t matter how/whether …结构中的主语从句不可提前。例如：
It doesn’t matter whether he is wrong or not.
Whether he is wrong or not doesn’t matter.
（5）含主语从句的复合句是疑问句时，主语从句不可提前。例如：
Is it likely that it will rain in the evening
Is that will rain in the evening likely
√
×
√
×
√
×
√
×
4. what 与that 在引导主语从句时的区别
what 引导主语从句时在句时在从句中充当句子成分，如主语．宾语．表语，而that 则不然。例如：
1) What you said yesterday is right.
2) That she is still alive is a consolation.
It is right what you said yesterday.
It is a consolation that she is still alive.
×
√
二．宾语从句
宾语从句就是在复合句中作宾语的名词性从句，通常放在主句谓语动词 (及物动词) 或介词之后。
1. 作动词的宾语
(1) 由that引导的宾语从句(that 通常可以省略), 例如：
I heard that be joined the army.
(2) 由what, whether (if) 引导的宾语从句，例如：
She did not know what had happened.
I wonder whether you can change this note for me.
(3) 动词＋间接宾语＋宾语从句。例如：
She told me that she would accept my invitation.
2. 作介词的宾语，例如：
Our success depends upon how well we can cooperate with one another.
3. 作形容词的宾语，例如：
I am afraid (that) I’ve made a mistake.
注意：that 引导的从句常跟在下列形容词后作宾语：
anxious, aware, certain, confident, convinced, determined, glad, proud, surprised, worried, sorry, thankful, ashamed, disappointed, annoyed, pleased, hurt, satisfied, content 等。也可以将此类词后的that 从句的看作原因状语从句。
4. it 可以作为形式宾语
it 不仅可以作为形式主语，还可以作为形式宾语而真正的宾语that 从句则放在句尾，特别是在带复合宾语的句子中。 例如：
We heard it that she would get married next month.
5. 后边不能直接跟that 从句的动词
这类动词有allow, refuse, let, like, cause, force, admire, condemn, celebrate, dislike, love, help, take, forgive等。这类词后可以用不定式或动名词作宾语，但不可以用that引导的宾语从句。如：
I admire their winning the match.
I admire that they won the match.
√
×
6. 不可用that从句作直接宾语的动词
有些动词不可用于“动词＋间接宾语＋that从句“结构中，常见的有envy, order, accuse, refuse, impress, forgive, blame, denounce, advise, congratulate等。例如：
He impressed the manager as an honest man.
He impressed the manager that he was an honest man.
√
×
7. 否定的转移
若主句谓语动词为think, consider, suppose, believe, expect, fancy, guess, imagine等，其后的宾语从句若含有否定意义，一般要把否定词转移到主句谓语上，从句谓语用肯定式。例如：
I don’t think this dress fits you well. 我认为这件衣服不适合你穿。
三．表语从句
表语从句在复合句中作表语的名词性从句，放在系动词之后，一般结构是“主语＋连系动词＋表语从句”。可以接表语从句的连系动词有be, look, remain, seem等。引导表语从句的that常可省略。另外，常用的还有the reason is that… 和It is because 等结构。例如：
1) The question is whether we can make good preparation in such a short time.
2) This is why we can’t get the support of the people.
3) But the fact remains that we are behind the other classes.
4) The reason he is late for school is that he missed the early bus.
四．同位语从句
1. 同位语从句的功能
同位语从句对于名词进一步解释，说明名词的具体内容，一般由that引导，例如：
1) The king’s decision that the prisoner would be set free surprised all the people.
2) The order that all the soldiers should stay still is given by the general.
同位语从句就是在复合句中作名词的同位语的名词性从句。
2. 同位语在句子中的位置
同位语从句有时可以不紧跟在它所说明的名词后面，而是被别的词隔开。例如：
He got the news from Mary that the sports meeting was put off.
3. 同位语从句与定语从句的区别
(1) 定语从句中的that既代替先行词，同时以在从句中作某个成分（主语或宾语），而同位语从句中的that是连词，只起连接主句与从句的作用，不充当句中任何成分。
(2) 定语从句是形容词性的，其功能是修饰先行词，对先行词加以限定，描述定的性质或特征；同位语从句是名词性的，其功能是对名词进行补充说明。例如：
1) The news that he told me is that Tom would go abroad next year.（他告诉我的消息是汤姆明年将出国。）（第一个that引导的从句是定语从句，that在从句中作宾语）
2)The news that Tom would go abroad is told by him.（汤姆将出国的消息是他讲的。）（同位语从句，that在句中不作任何成分）
1.It is important that ______ our education in all available ways.
A. we must develop B. we shall develop
C. we would develop D. we should develop
2.It is necessary that ______ by the end of the week.
A. we got everything ready B. we have got everything ready
C. We get everything ready D. we must get everything ready
3.It was natural that _______.
A. my pictures would surprise them
B. my pictures surprised them
C. my pictures should surprise them
D. my pictures would have surprised them
4.I wonder _______.
A. whether or not I’ll catch the last bus
B. if or not I’ll catch the last bus
C. that I’ll catch the last bus or not
D. that I’ll catch the last bus
5.We all thought ______ a pity that we had missed the lesson.
A. so B. such C. it D. that
6.I took ______ for granted that they were not coming.
A. that B. this C. it D. so
7.I heard ______ said that he had great concern for his classmates.
A. and B. that C. was D. it
8.I wish I ______ to the football match last night.
A. went B. go C. should go D. had gone(共19张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
被 动 语 态 详 解
南莫中学黄耀春
(一) 语 态 分 类
英语动词有两种语态，主动语态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者，被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者。如：
They will build a new bridge over the river. (主动)
A new bridge will be built over the river. (被动)
汉语中常用“被”、“给”、“由”、“受”等词用来表示被动，而英语用：助动词be + 及物动词的过去分词构成。
(二) 被动语态的时态、人称和数的变化
主要体现在be的变化上，其形式与系动词be的变化形式完全一样。以give 为例，列表如下：
一般现在时： am / is / are + given
一般过去时： was / were +given
一般将来时： shall / will +be+ given
现在进行时： am / is / are + being + given
现在完成时： have / has + been + given
过去完成时： had + been + given
过去进行时： was / were + being + given
过去将来时： should / would +be+ given
将来完成时： shall / will + have been + given
过去将来完成时： should / would + have been + given
［注］被动语态没有将来进行时和过去将来进行时。
(三)被动语态常用的八种时态
1. 一般现在时：
People grow rice in the south of the country.
Rice is grown in the south of the country.
The school doesn't allow us to enter the chemistry lab without a teacher.
We are not allowed to enter the chemistry lab without a teacher.
2. 一般过去时：
They agreed on the building of a new car factory last month.
The building of a new car factory was agreed on last month.
The students didn't forget his lessons easily.
His lessons were not easily forgotten.
3. 一般将来时：
They will send cars abroad by sea.
Cars will be sent abroad by sea.
They will give plenty of jobs to school-leavers.
Plenty of jobs will be given to school-leavers.
4. 过去将来时：
The manager said they would complete the project by the end of the year.
The manager said the project would be completed by the end of the year.
The workers told me they would mend the car as soon as possible.
The workers told me that the car would be mended as soon as possible.
5. 现在进行时：
The radio is broadcasting English lessons.
English lessons are being broadcasted on the radio.
We are painting the rooms.
The rooms are being painted.
6. 过去进行时：
— Why didn't they drive there on time
— Because the workers were mending the road.
Because the road was being mended.
This time last year we were planting trees here.
Trees were being planted here this time last year.
7. 现在完成时：
Someone has told me the sports meet might be put off.
I have been told the sports meet might be put off.
We have brought down the price.
The price has been brought down.
8. 过去完成时：
When I got to the theatre, I found they had already sold out the tickets.
When I got to the theatre, I found the tickets had already been sold out.
The whole country was very sad at the news of his death; People had considered him to be a great leader.
He had been considered to be a great leader.
9. 含有情态动词的被动语态：
含有情态动词的被动语态是由“情态动词+ be+ 及物动词的过去分词”构成。
You must hand in your compositions after class.
Your compositions must be handed in after class.
He can write a great many letters with the computer.
A great many letters can be written with the computer by him.
(四) 被 动 语 态 的 使 用
1.当不知道或没有必要指出动作的执行者时，常用被动语态，这时往往不用by 短语。
“Mr. White, the cup with mixture was broken after class. ”
(只是告诉老师杯子坏了，不知是谁弄坏的，或不想说出谁弄坏的)。
2.突出或强调动作的承受者，如果需要说出动作的执行者，用by 短语。
These records were made by John Denver.
The cup was broken by Paul.
3.当汉语句子的主语既不是动作的执行者，也不是动作的承受者时，这时常用in + 名词作状语，而代替 by 短语。
These cars were made in China.
15, 000 cars will be produced each year in the new factory.
(五)主动语态变被动语态的方法
（1） My aunt invited me to her dinner party.
主语 谓语 宾语
→ I was invited (by my aunt ) to her dinner party.
主语 谓语 宾语
（2） The school set up a special class to help poor readers.
→ A special class to help poor readers was set up in the school.
1.把主动语态的宾语变成被动语态的主语。
2.把主动语态的谓语变成被动语态的be + 过去分词，时态要与原句保持一致。
3.把主动语态的主语变为介词by 的宾语，放在被动语态里谓语动词之后，by 短语可以省略。如果原句主语是地点名词，在被动语态中用in + 地点名词作状语。
(六)语态转换时要注意的问题
1. 把主动语态变为被动语态时，其谓语动词的时态要与原句时态保持一致，其谓语动词的数要与新主语保持一致。
We have bought a new computer.
A new computer has been bought. (正确)
A new computer have been bought. (错误)
2. 含有双宾语的主动句变被动句时，可分别将其中的一个宾语变为主语，另一个不动，一般变间接宾语为主语时比较多。
My uncle gave me a present on my birthday.
I was given a present on my birthday.
如果把直接宾语(指物)改为主语，则在间接宾语(指人)前加适当的介词，如上句还可以说：
A present was given to me yesterday.
保留宾语
注意：一般在下列动词后，常在间接宾语前用介词 to，如：
bring, give, hand, lend, offer, pass, pay, promise, sell, show, take, teach, tell 等。
The cup with mixture was showed to the class.
My bike was lent to her.
一般在下列动词后，间接宾语前用介词 for, 如：
build, buy, cook, cut, choose, do, fetch, find, fix, get, keep, make, order, paint, play, sing 等。
Mother made me a new skirt. (A new skirt was made for me. )
The meat was cooked for us.
Some country music was played for us.
有些既不用to 也不用for, 根据动词与介词的搭配关系。
He asked me a question. (A question was asked of me. )
People all over the world know the Great Wall.
The Great Wall is known to people all over the world. (不用by短语)
3. 由动词+ 介词或副词构成的短语动词，要把它们作为整体看，即把它们看成一个及物动词，介词或副词不可拆开或漏掉。这类动词有：
不及物动词+ 介词，如: agree to, ask for, laugh at, operated on, listen to, look after, think of, talk about 等。
The patient is being operated on.
The problem is solved. It needn't be talked about.
及物动词+ 副词：如：bring about, carry out, find out, give up, hand in, make out, pass on, point out, put away, put off, think over, turn down, work out, turn out 等。
His request was turned down.
The sports meet will be put off because of the bad weather.
4. 带复合宾语(宾语+ 宾补)的动词改为被动语态时，一般把主动结构中的宾语改为主语，而宾语补足语保留在谓语动词后面。如：
We always keep the classroom clean.
→The classroom is always kept clean.
She told us to follow her instructions.
→We were told to follow her instructions.
注意：在see, watch, hear, notice, listen to, look at, make, feel等动词后作宾语补足语的动词不定式都不带 to，但改成被动语态后都带to，这时不定式为主语补足语，也就是说不定式作主语补足语不存在省略to 的问题。
We often hear him play the guitar.
→He is often heard to play the guitar.
注意：带有复合宾语的句子，如果宾语补足语是名词，变被动句时，应将宾语变为主语，不要误把宾语补足语的名词作主语。如：
Tomatoes were first taken back to Europe and people called them love apples.
误：Love apples were called them.
正：They were called love apples.
5. 还有一种短语动词由动词+ 名词+ 介词构成，变被动语态有两种形式，如下：
1) We take good care of the books.
The books are taken good care of.
Good care is taken of the book.
2) You must pay attention to your pronunciation.
Attention must be paid to your pronunciation.
Your pronunciation must be paid attention to.
用于这类结构的短语动词常见的有：catch sight of, make use of, pay attention to, set fire to, take care of, take hold of, take notice of, keep an eye on 等。
6. 当主动句的主语是nobody, no one等含有否定意义的不定代词时，被动句中将其变为anybody, 作by的宾语，并将谓语动词变为否定的被动语态。如：
Nobody can answer this question.
误：The question can be answered by nobody.
正：The question can not be answered by anybody.
7. 当否定句中的宾语是anything, anybody, anyone等不定代词时，在被动句中应将其分别变为nothing, nobody, no one作主语，并将谓语动词变为肯定的被动语态。如：
They haven't done anything to make the river clean.
误：Anything hasn't been done to make the river clean.
正：Nothing has been done to make the river clean.
8. 以who为主语开头的疑问句，变被动时，用by whom放在句首：
Who wrote the story
误：Who was the story written
正：By whom was the story written
9. 有些动词既是及物又是不及物，当它们和well, badly, easily等副词连用时，表示主语内在品质或性能，是不及物动词，用主动表示被动，这时不用被动语态，常见的有：write, read, clean, sell, wash, cook 等。如：
The cloth washes easily. 这布很好洗。
The new product sells well. 这新产品很畅销。
The pen writes smoothly. 这支笔写字很流畅。
对比：
The books sell well. (主动句)
The books were sold out. (被动句)
The meat didn’t cook well. (主动句)
The meat was cooked for a long time over low heat. (被动句)
10. 下列情况主动句不能改为被动句：
第一，感官系动词一般用主动形式表示被动意义，如：feel，look, seem, taste, sound, remain等。
— Do you like the material — Yes, it feels very soft.
误：It is felt very soft.
The food tastes delicious.
误：The food is tasted delicious.
The pop music sounds beautiful.
误：The pop music is sounded beautiful.
第二，谓语是及物动词leave, enter, reach, suit, have, benefit, lack, own等。如：
He entered the room and got his book.
误：The room was entered and his book was got.
She had her hand burned.
误：Her hand was had burned.
第三，一些不及物动词短语没有被动语态，如：take place, break out, belong to, lose heart, consist of, add up to等。如：
The fire broke out in the capital building.
误：The fire was broke out in the capital building.
第四，不及物动词没有被动语态，如：rise, happen, succeed, remain, lie等。
When we got to the top of the mountain, the sun had already risen.
误：The sun had already been risen.
After the earthquake, few houses remained.
误：After the earthquake, few houses were remained.
第五，宾语是反身代词，相互代词，同源宾语，不定式，v-ing形式及抽象名词等，不能变为被动句子的主语，如：
I taught myself English.
误：Myself was taught English.
We love each other.
误：Each other is loved.
11. 在汉语中，有一类句子不出现主语，在英语中一般可用被动结构来表示，例如：
据说…… It is said that …
据报导…… It is reported that …
据推测…… It is supposed that …
希望…… It is hoped that …
众所周知…… It is well known that …
普遍认为…… It is generally considered that …
有人建议…… It is suggested that …
1) It is reported that it is going to rain tomorrow.
2) It is well known that Thomas Edison invented the electric lamp.
在英语语言中，被动语态是极常见的语言现象，人们进行语言交际，离不开对被动语态的使用，熟练掌握被动语态也为下一步学习打下良好的基础，在动词-ing 形式，不定式等结构中，都有被动式，都需要运用被动语态的知识去理解。(共56张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法专项训练
名词性从句
I．语序问题
1.The photographs will show you ____ .（MET89）
A. what does our village look like
B. what our village looks like
C. how does our village look like
D. how our village looks like
2.He asked ____ for a violin．（MET92）
A. did I pay how much B. I paid how much
C. how much did I pay D. how much I paid
规律一：名词性从句在句中要用陈述语序
II．引导词的选择
1. ____ we can't get seems better than ____ we have.
A.What , what B. What , that
C. That , that D. That , what
2. It worried her a bit ____ her hair was turning grey.
A．while B．that C．if D．for
3.What the doctors really doubt is _______ my mother will recover from the serious disease soon．
A．when B．how
C．whether D．why
4． made the school proud was more than 90% of the students had been admitted to key universities.
A．What…because B．What…that
C．That…what D．That…because
规律二：1.从句是陈述句转化而来的，不含有疑问意义。由that 引导且that连词在从句中不作成分
2.从句是由一般疑问句转化而来，含有疑问意义的。由whether，if 引导
3.从句是由特殊疑问句转化而来，含有疑问意义的。由wh-连词引导且 wh-连词在从句中作成分。连接代词what / who/ which / whose / whatever / whoever / whomever / whichever，连接副词where / when / why / how / wherever / whenever。
找出下列句子中的错误，并总结出规律：
7. If we will have a meeting hasn't been decided yet.
8. It depends on if the weather is suitable for us to do it.
9. The question is if he himself will be present at the
meeting.
10. He asked me if I could go with him or not.
Whether we will have a meeting hasn’t been decided yet.
It depends on whether the weather is …...
The question is whether he himself will be present …...
He asked me whether I could go with him or not.
规律三： whether和if的区别：
①whether和if在宾语从句中可以互换，但是作介词宾语时连接词一般用whether。如：
It all depends on whether they will come back.
②后面直接跟or not 时用 whether。如：
I didn’t know whether or not he had arrived in Wuhan.
③主语从句和表语从句中只能用whether。如：
Whether the meeting will be put off has not been decided yet.
The question is whether they have so much money.
④whether可以引导同位语从句，用以说明前面的名词的内容，if不能。如：
We ought to discuss carefully the question whether we can do it or not.
⑤whether常与or连用表示一种选择，if不能这样用；whether也可与动词不定式连用但if不能。如：
The question of whether they are male or female is not important.
I have not decided whether to go or not.
⑥ whether可引导一个让步状语从句表示“不管”、“无论”，而if不能，但可以引导一个条件状语从句表示“如果”如：
Whether he comes or not, we will begin our party on time.
If I have time tomorrow, I’ll go to visit Tom.
找出下列句子中的错误，并总结出规律：
I think that worthwhile that we spent so much money on these books.
2. That is hard to decide when and where we will held our sports meeting.
3. Everybody considers it impossible which he wants to finish the job in such a short time.
4. It doesn’t matter that you will come or not.
it
it
that
whether
规律四：主语从句和宾语从句在适当的情况
下可以借助 “it” 而后置。
1.主语从句可以用it （作形式主语） 来替换成以下几种结构表达。
(A)It is clear/certain/likely
/true/surprising that…
（B）It is a pity/shame
/good idea/no wonder that ...
（C）It is said/reported/ believed/known/thought
/suggested that …
（D）It seems/happens that…
如：It is said that China will win in the World Cup.
2.宾语从句可以用it（作形式宾语） 来替换的句型为：
主语＋谓语＋it＋Adj/N＋从句如：
I think it necessary that we have the meeting．
1. Sarah hopes to become a friend of ____ shares her interests.
A. anyone B. whomever
C. whoever D. no matter who
2. ____ much advice I gave him, he did exactly what he wanted to do.
A. How B. Whatever
C. However D. No matter
3. It is generally considered unwise to give a child ____ he or she wants.
A. however B. whatever
C. whichever D. whenever
He will believe whatever others say.
（不能用no matter what代替whatever）
Whatever others say, he will believe it.
（可以用no matter what代替whatever）
规律四：whatever, whichever, whoever, whenever, wherever, however 等与 no matter what, no matter which, no matter who, no matter when, no matter where, no matter how 的区别:前者既可以引导名词性从句，也可以引导让步状语从句，而 no matter 加疑问词只能引导让步状语从句。
找出下列句子中的错误，并总结出规律：
4. We suggested that we would go to the cinema.
　
5. My idea is that we must do our homework first.
6. His proposal that we went there on foot is
acceptable.
　　
We suggested that we (should) go to the cinema.
My idea is that we (should) do our homework first.
His proposal that we (should) go there on foot…...
规律五：注意虚拟语气在名词性从句中的运用！
(1)虚拟语气在宾语从句中的运用。
①“wish + 宾语从句”表示不能实现的愿望，译为“要是……就好了”等。表示现在不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用一般过去时；表示将来不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“would/could + 动词原形”；表示过去不能实现的愿望，从句中的谓语动词用“had + 过去分词”
或“could(should) + have + 过去分词”。如：
I wish it were spring all the year round.
I wish I had known the answer.
I wish I could fly like a bird.
②在表示建议、要求、命令等的动词suggest、advise、propose、demand、require、insist request、command、order等动词后的宾语从句中，从句谓语动词用(should) + 动词原形或是动词原形。如：
She suggested we (should)leave here at once.
The doctor ordered she (should )be operated on.
（2）虚拟语气在同位语从句和表语从句中的运用。
作表示建议、要求、命令等的名词advise、idea、order、demand、plan、proposal、suggestion、request等的表语从句和同位语从句，从句中的谓语动词用“（should） + 动词原形”。如：
His suggestion that we (should)go to Shanghai is wonderful.
My idea is that they (should)pay 100 dollars.
（3）虚拟语气在主语从句中的运用。
在主语从句中，谓语动词的虚拟语气用“should + 动词原形”的结构，表示惊奇、不相信、理应如此等。如：
It is necessary(important, natural, strange, etc.)that we should clean the room every day.
It was a pity (a shame, no wonder, etc.)that you should be so careless.
It will be desired(suggested, decided, ordered, requested, proposed, etc.)that she should finish her homework this afternoon.
注意：这种从句表示的是事实。如果说人对这种事实表现出惊奇的情感，就可用虚拟语气。反之，如果不表示惊奇等情感，that从句也可用陈述句语气。如：
It is pity that you can’t swim.
名词从句与定语从句
的主要区别
成分上的区别：
名词性从句和定语从句分别在句中充当什么
样的成分？
1. How the prisoner escaped remains a mystery.
2. I wonder whether/if he is fit for the job.
3. The problem is who will be equal to the task.
4. He had no idea whether we could overcome the
present difficulties or not.
主语
宾语
表语
同位语
5. I visited the country which/that had been bombed by
the US-led NATO (美国为首的北约) a month before．
6. I shall never forget the years when I lived in the
countryside with the farmers, which has a great
effect on my life.
7. In the office I never seem to have time until after
5:30 pm., by which time many people have gone home.
8. I had never seen such a good film as I watched last
night.
结论：
名词性从句充当句子的主要成分
（作主语，宾语，表语，同位语），且无先行词，同位语除外。
定语从句充当句子的修饰成分
（作定语），前面有先行词
同位语从句和定语从句的区别：
that作为关系代词, 可以引导定语从句, 充当句子的主语或宾语成分, 在从句中作宾语时可以省略; that引导同位语从句时, 起连词的作用, 没有实际意义，不充当句子成分, 一般不能省略。
试比较下面两个例句:
The suggestion (that) he raised at the meeting is very good.
（that引导定语从句, 作宾语, 可以省略）
The suggestion that the students (should) have plenty of exercise is very good.（that引导同位语从句）
I had no idea that you were here.（that引导同位语从句, 不能省略）
Have you got the idea (that) this book gives you of life in ancient Greece
（that引导定语从句, 作宾语, 可以省略）
引导词的不同：
不会出现在名词从句中的关系词：
不会出现在定语从句中的关系词：
as, 且 when, where 等不能与 in/on/at which 互换。
whether, if, what, how
名词从句与定语从句的一些对应系：
1. He has done what he can to help me.
--He has done ____ ____ he can to help me.
What I want to say has nothing to do with it.
--____ ____ I want to say has nothing to do
with it.
all that
All that
3. Whoever breaks the law is to be punished.
______ ______ breaks the law is to be punished.
4. He will give the dictionary to whoever
needs if most.
He will give the dictionary to ______ ____
needs it most.
5. We’ll remember whomever we turned to
for help.
We’ll remember ______ ________ we turned
to for help.
Anyone who
anyone who
anyone (whom)
6. They will do whatever he wants them to do.
They will do ______ ______he wants them to do.
7. I’ll read whichever book you give me.
I’ll read ____ of the books _____ you give me.
anything that
any
that
其余问题：
1. 误：I don't know if he comes back this month.
2. 误：I have no idea what had happened when
I was away.
正：I don't know if he will come back this month.
正：I have no idea what happened when I was
away.
3.误：The reason is because he is ill.
4.误：Who leaves last turns off the light.
正：The reason is that he is ill.
正：Whoever leaves last turns off
the light.
名词性从句试题集锦
1.I ask her _______ come with me.
if she will B. if will she
C. whether will she D. will she
2._______ he said is true.
What B. That
C. Which D. Whether
5.To get the job started, _______ I
need is some money.
only what B. all what
C. all that D. only that
6.I have no idea _______ far the railway
station is from here.
A. what B. how C. it's D. that
3.Can you tell me ________
who is that gentleman
B. that gentleman is who
C. who that gentleman is
D. whom is that gentleman
4.He didn't know which room _______.
they lived B. they lived in
C. did they live D. did they live in
7.Can you tell me _______ the railway station
A. how I can get to B. what can I get to
C. where I can got to D. where can I get to
8.Do you know _______
A. what is his name B. how is his name
C. what his name is D. how his name is
9._______ you have done might do harm to other people.
A. That B. What C. Which D. This
10.They have no idea at all ________.
A. where he has gone B. where did he go
C. which place has he gone D. where has he gone
11.They want to know _________ do to help us.
A. what can they B. what they can
C. how they can D. how can they
12.These photographs will show you _______.
A. what our village looks like B. what does our village look like
C. how does our village look like D. how our village looks like
13.Can you make sure ________ the gold ring
A. where Alice had put B. where had Alice put
C. where Alice has put D. where has Alice put
14.No one can be sure ________ in a million years.
A. what man will look like B. what will man look like
C. man will look like D. what look man like
15.________ the 2008 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing is not known yet.
A. Whenever B. If C. Whether D. That
16.Go and get your coat. It's ________ you left it.
A. there B. where C. there where D. where there
17.It worried her a bit _______ her hair was turning gray.
A. while B. that C. if D. for
18._______ he said at the meeting astonished everybody present.
A. What B. That C. The fact D. The matter
19. — Do you remember ________ he came
— Yes, I do. He came by car.
A. how B. when C. that D. if
20._________ we can't get seems better than _________ we have.
A. What ; what B. What ; that C. That ; that D. That ; what
21.________ we'll go camping tomorrow depends on the weather.
A. If B. Whether C. That D. Where
22.It is generally considered unwise to give a child ________ he or she wants.
A. however B. whatever C. whichever D. whenever
23. — I drove to Zhuhai for the air show last week.
— Is that _________ you had a few days off
A. why B. when C. what D. where
24.These wild flowers are so special that I would do ________ I can to save them.
A. whatever B. that C. which D. whichever
25.________ you don't like him is none of my business.
A. What B. Who C. That D. Whether
26.You can't imagine ________ when they received these nice Christmas presents.
A. how they were excited B. how excited they were
C. how excited were they D. they were how excited
27.________ caused the accident is still a complete mystery.
A. What B. That C. How D. Where
28.I had neither a raincoat nor an umbrella. _________ I got wet through.
A. It's the reason B. That's why
C. There's why D. It's how
29.It was a matter of ________ would take the position.
A. who B. whoever C. whom D. whomever
30.________ has helped to save the drowning girl is worth praising.
A. Who B. The one C. Anyone D. Whoever
31.It was _______ he said _______ disappointed me.
A. what ; that B. that ; that
C. what ; what D. that ; what
32.Eat ________ cake you like and leave the others for ________ comes in late.
A. any ; who B. every ; whoever
C. whichever ; whoever D. either ; whoever
Good-bye!(共15张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
英语的时态
（3）
南莫中学高三英语备课组
九、将来进行时
（1）将来进行时概念：
表示将来某时进行的状态或动作，或按预测将来会发生的事情。
She'll be coming soon.
I'll be meeting him sometime in the future.
（2） 将来进行时的用法：
a) 表示在将来某一时刻或某段时间正在进行的动作。如：
This time tomorrow I shall be flying to Guangzhou.
明天这个时候我将在飞往广州的途中。
What will you be doing at eight tomorrow morning
明天上午八点钟你将做什么
I hope you won't be feeling too tired.
我希望你不要太累。
We'll be watching television all evening.
我们整个晚上都将看电视。
b) 表示将来被客观情况所决定的动作或者按照安排将要发生的动作。如：
We'll be having tea after dinner as usual.
像通常一样，我们晚饭后将要喝茶。
The leaves will be falling soon.
树叶很快就会脱落。
We shall be having a meeting tomorrow morning.
我们明天要开一个会。
I’ll be taking my holidays soon.
我不久即将度假。
注意：将来进行时不用于表示"意志"，不能说 I'll be having a talk with her.
（3）将来进行时常用的时间状语:
soon, tomorrow, this evening，on Sunday, by this time，tomorrow, in two days, tomorrow evening等。
By this time tomorrow, I'll be lying on the beach.
十、将来完成时
将来完成时用来表示在将来某一时间以前已经完成的动作或一直持续的动作。经常与before+将来时间或by+将来时间连用，也可与before或by the time引导的现在时的从句连用。
例如：
By the end of this week, I shall have finished the book.
到本周末，我将读完这本书。
By this time tomorrow they will have repaired the machine.
明天这时候，他们将修好这台机器。
The children will have gone to sleep by the time we get home.
到我们回家时，孩子们将已睡了。
When you come tonight at eight o'clock，I shall have written my paper.
你今晚八点钟来时，我将会写完文章了。
By next year our teacher will have taught English for twenty years.
到明年我们的老师将已教二十年英语了。
注意：
将来完成时表示在将来某一时间以前已经完成或一直持续的动作或状态。使用这种时态时，多会涉及两个动作或状态，一个在前，一个在后；叙述前面的动作或状态，动词要用将来完成时；叙述后面的动作或状态，动词要用一般现在时。
We will have completed the work before you come.
We will have played ball when you come.
（或 when you come, we will have played ball.）
He says that he will have graduated from a university before you return home.
By the end of this month, we surely ____ a satisfactory solution to the problem.
A. have found B. will be found
C. will have found D. are finding
The conference ____ a full week by the time it ends.
A. must have lasted 　　 B. will have lasted
C. would last 　　 D. has lasted
十一、现在完成进行时的用法
1)表示动作从过去某一时间开始一直延续到现在。现在这个动作可能已经终止，也可能仍然在进行着。如：
I have been waiting for you for two hours.
我等了你两个小时。(动作不再延续下去)
It has been raining for three hours.
雨已经下了三个小时了。(动作可能延续)
“How long have you been learning English ”
“I have been learning English for two years.”
你英语学多久了 ---- 我学了两年了。(动作可能延续)
“Why are you so dirty ” “I've been playing football.”
你身上怎么这样脏 ---- 我刚才踢足球了。(动作不再延续下去)
2)有些不能用现在进行时态的动词，如be，have like，love，know，see，hear等，同样也不能用现在完成进行时，而只能用现在完成时。如：
She has been ill for a long time. 她已经病了好久了。
I have not seen you for ages. 我好久没有见到你了。
怎样区别现在完成时和现在完成进行时
现在完成进行时是一兼有现在完成时和现在进行时二者基本特点的时态。由于它有现在完成时的特点，所以它可以表示某一动作对现在产生的结果或影响。由于它有现在进行时的特点，所以它也可以表示某一动作的延续性、临时性、重复性、生动性乃至感彩。
现在就现在完成进行时的这些特点和现在完成时作一简单的比较：
（1）现在完成进行时和现在完成时皆可表示动作对现在产生的结果，但前者所表示的结果是直接的，而后者所表示的则是最后的结果。如：
We have been cleaning the classroom．（a）
We have cleaned the classroom．（b）
（a）句可译为“我们打扫教室来着。”其直接结果可能是：我们身上都是灰。（b）句可以译为“我们把教室打扫过了。”其结果是：现在教室很清洁，可以用了。又，（a）句表示教室刚刚打扫过，（b）句则可能表示教室是昨天打扫的。
Be careful! John has been painting the door．（a）
John has painted the door．（b）
（a）句表示约翰刚刚把门油漆过，现在油漆还未干，所以你要小心。（b）句则无此含义，油漆可能已干了。
（2）现在完成进行时有时有延续性，现在完成时往往没有。如：
They have been widening the road．（a）
They have widened the road．（b）
（a）句的意思是他们在加宽马路，但尚未完工。（b）句的意思则是已完工了。
有时现在完成时有延续性（如一些属于持续体的动词），但无临时性质。如：
Mr. Smith has been living in London since 1978．（a）
Mr. Smith has lived in London since 1979．（b）
（a）句有“史密斯先生在伦敦久居”的含义，（b）句则没有。
（3）但现在完成进行时并不总是具有临时的性质，如：
My mother has been teaching English for twenty years．（a）
My mother has taught English for twenty years.（b）
（a）句在此并无临时性质，但较口语化。（b）句则较为正式。又，（a）句表示动作现在仍在继续．并将延续下去，（b）句的动作是否延续下去，须由上下文决定，但在一般情况下都是延续下去的。
（4）现在完成进行时往往表示动作在重复，现在完成时则常常不带重复性。如：
Have you been meeting her lately？（a）
Have you met her lately？（b）
（a）句有“经常相会”之意，（b）句则没有。（b）句如与often，every day等时间状语连用，当然也表示动作在重复。
（5）现在完成进行时比较生动，有时含有明显的感彩，而现在完成时往往只说明一个事实，一种影响或结果，平铺直叙，没有什么感彩可言。如：
What have you been doing？（a）
What have you done？（b）
（a）句表示惊异。（b）句只是一个问题。
I have been wanting to meet you for long．（a）
I have long wanted to meet you．（b）
（a）句比（b）句更亲切，更有礼貌。
Recently Mary has been doing her work regularly．（a）
Recently Mary has done her work regularly．（b）
（a）句显然是在表扬玛丽。（b）只说明一个事实。
下面还有一例，颇为有趣:
Who's been eating my apples？（a）
Who's eaten my apples？（b）
（a）句有强烈的感彩，表示愤怒不满，（b）句只是希望回答的一个问题。又，（a）句兼有进行时态，所以有“苹果未被全部吃光”的意思，（b）句是完成时态，说明“苹果一个不剩了”。
1.He stepped into the office, _____ down and began to fill in the forms.
A. sitting B. to sit C. sat D. having it
2.She said she would telephone but we _____from her so far.
A.haven’t heard B.didn’t hear C.hadn’t heard D.won’t hear
3.When I got to the cinema, the film____for ten minutes.
A.has begun B.had begun C.had been on D.was
4.I’ll go with you as soon as I____my homework.
A.will finish B.finish C.am finishing D.finished
5.If it_____tomorrow,I won’t go to the cinema.
A.will rain B.rains C.is raining D.rained
6.She is going to be a nurse when she_____up.
A.is going to grow B.grows C.growing D.grew
7.“这本书我已经买了三个月了。”，下列哪一句不对？
A.I have had this book for three months.
B.I have bought this book for three months.
C.I bought this book three months ago.
D.It is three months since I bought this book.
8.— Come in, Peter, I want to show you something.
— Oh, how nice of you! I _____ you _____ to bring me a gift.
A.never think; are going B.never thought; were going
C.didn’t think; were going D.had’t thought; were going
9.When I was at college I _____ three foreign languages,but I _____ all except for a few words of each.
A.spoke;had forgotten B.spoke;have forgotten
C.had spoken;had forgotten D.had spoken;have forgotten
10.The police found that the house _____ and a lot of things ____.
A.has broken into; has been stolen
B.had broken into; had been stolen
C.has been broken into; stolen
D.had been broken into; stolen
11.The volleyball match will be put off if it____.
A. will rain B. rains C. rained D. is raining
12.Mary _____ a dress when she cut her finger.
A. made B. is making C. was making D. makes
13.The students _____ busily when Miss Brown went to get a book she _____ in the office.
A. had written; left B. were writing; has left
C. had written; had left D. were writing; had left
14. — Have you moved into the new house
— No yet, the rooms _____,
A. are being painted B. are painting
C. are painted D. are being painting
15. — We haven’t heard from Jane for a long time.
— What do you suppose ____ to her
A. was happening B. to happen
C. has happened D. having happened
16. — Do you know our town at all
— No, this is the first time I _____ here.
A. was B. have been C. came D. am coming
17. — We could have walked to the station.It was so near.
— Yes, A taxi _____ at all necessary.
A. wasn’t B. hadn’t been C. wouldn’t be D. won’t be
18.If city noises _____ from increasing, people _____ shout to be heard even at the dinner table 20 years from now.
A. are not kept; will have to B. are not kept; have to
C. do not keep; will have to D. do not keep; have to
19.Tom _____ into the house when no one _____.
A. slipped; was looking B. had slipped; looked
C. slipped; had looked D. was slippping; looked
20.The last time I _____ Jane she ____ cotton in the fields.
A. had seen; was picking B. saw; picking
C. had seen; picked D. saw; was picking(共9张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
倒 装 结 构(Ⅱ)
南莫中学高三英语备课组
1、倒装句之全部倒装
全部倒装是只将句子中的谓语动词全部置于主语之前。此结构通常只用与一般现在时和一般过去时。常见的结构有：
1) here, there, now, then, thus等副词置于句首, 谓语动词常用be, come, go, lie, run等，例如：
There goes the bell.　/ Then came the chairman.　
Here is your letter.
2) 表示运动方向的副词或地点状语置于句首，谓语表示运动的动词，例如：
Out rushed a missile from under the bomber.　　
Ahead sat an old woman.
注意：
上述全部倒装的句型结构的主语必须是名词，如果主语是人称代词则不能完全倒装。例如：
Here he comes.　/ Away they went.
2、倒装句之部分倒装
部分倒装是指将谓语的一部分如助动词或情态倒装至主语之前。如果句中的谓语没有助动词或情态动词，则需添加助动词do, does或did，并将其置于主语之前。
1) 句首为否定或半否定的词语，如 no, not, never, seldom, little, hardly, at no time, in no way, not until … 等。
Never have I seen such a performance.
Nowhere will you find the answer to this question.
Not until the child fell asleep did the mother leave the room.
当Not until 引出主从复合句，主句倒装，从句不倒装。
注意： 如否定词不在句首不倒装，例如：
I have never seen such a performance.
The mother didn't leave the room until the child fell asleep.
典型例题　　
— Why can't I smoke here
— At no time _______ in the meeting-room.
A. is smoking permitted　　 B. smoking is permitted
C. smoking is it permitted　 D. does smoking permit
答案A. 这是一个倒装问题。当否定词语置于句首以表示强调时，其句中的主谓须用倒装结构。这些否定词包括no, little, hardly, seldom, never, not only, not until等。本题的正常语序是 Smoking is permitted in the meeting-room at no time.
Not until the early years of the 19th century _______ what heat is.
A. man did know　 B. man know　
C. didn't man know　 D. did man know
答案D. 看到Not until…的句型，我们知道为一倒装句，答案在C，D 中选一个。改写为正常语序为，Man did not know what heat is until the early years of the 19th. 现在将not提前，后面就不能再用否定了,否则意思就变了。
3、以否定词开头作部分倒装
如: Not only…but also, Hardly/Scarcely…when, No sooner… than
Not only did he refuse the gift, he also severely criticized the sender.
Hardly had she gone out when a student came to visit her.
No sooner had she gone out than a student came to visit her.
典型例题
No sooner _______ than it began to rain heavily.
A. the game began　　 　　　 B. has the game begun
C. did the game begin　 　　 D. had the game begun
答案D. 以具有否定意义的副词放在句首时，一般采用倒装句(谓语前置)。这类表示否定意义的词有never, seldom, scarcely, little, few, not, hardly, 以及not only…but (also), no sooner…than, hardly… when scarcely… when等等。
注意：只有当Not only… but also连接两个分句时，才在第一个分句用倒装结构。如果置于句首的Not only… but also仅连接两个并列词语，不可用倒装结构。
Not only you but also I am fond of music.
4、so, neither, nor 作部分倒装
表示“也”、“也不” 的句子要部分倒装，例如：
Tom can speak French. So can Jack.
If you won't go, neither will I.
典型例题
-- Do you know Jim quarrelled with his brother
-- I don't know, _____.
A. nor don't I care　 B. nor do I care　
C. I don't care neither　 D. I don't care also
答案B。nor为增补意思"也不关心"，因此句子应倒装。A.错在用 don't 再次否定，C. neither 用法不对且缺乏连词。D. 缺乏连词。
注意：当so引出的句子用以对上文内容加以证实或肯定时，不可用倒装结构。意为"的确如此"。
Tom asked me to go to play football and so I did.
“It's raining hard.” “So it is.”
5、as, though 引导的倒装句
as / though引导的让步从句必须将表语或状语提前（形容词, 副词, 分词, 实义动词提前），例如：
Old as my father is, he keeps up with his English study.
Child as he is, he knows something of electricity.
Tired as he was, he continued to work.
Young as she was, she was already director of a factory.
Try hard as he will, he never seems able to do the work satisfactorily.
注意：
1) 句首名词不能带任何冠词。句首是实义动词, 其他助动词放在主语后。如果实义动词有宾语和状语,　随实义动词一起放在主语之前。
2) 让步状语从句中，有though，although时，后面的主句不能有 but，但是 though 和yet可连用。
6、only在句首要倒装的情况
Only in this way, can you learn English well.
Only after being asked three times did he come to the meeting.
如果句子为主从复合句，则主句倒装，从句不倒装，例如：
Only when he is seriously ill, does he ever stay in bed.
7、其他部分倒装
1) so… that 句型中的so 位于句首时，需倒装。
So frightened was he that he did not dare to move an inch.
2) 在某些表示祝愿的句型中：
May you all be happy.
3) 在虚拟语气条件句中从句谓语动词有were, had, should等词，可将if 省略，把 were, had, should 移到主语之前，采取部分倒装。
Were I you, I would try it again.
典型例题：
1. Not until the early years of the 19th century ______ what heat is.
A. man did know　 B. man knew　
C. didn't man know　 D. did man know
2. Not until I began to work ______ how much time I had wasted.　
A. didn't I realize　 　 B. did I realize　　
C. I didn't realize　 D. I realize
3. — Do you know Tom bought a new car
— I don't know, _______.
A. nor don't I care　 B. nor do I care　　
C. I don't care neither　 D. I don't care also
答案为D。 Not until 引导的词组位于句首，后面的句子要倒装。
答案为B。 Not until 引导从句位于句首，后面的主句要倒装。
答案为B。句中的nor引出部分倒装结构，表示"也不"。由 so, neither, nor引导的倒装句，表示前一情况的重复出现。其中, so用于肯定句, 而 neither, nor 用在否定句中。(共38张PPT)
in Daily Expressions Communication
1.问候Greetings
2.介绍Introductions
3.告别Farewells
4.感谢和应答Thanks and responses
5.祝愿、祝贺和应答Good wishes,congratulations ＆ responses
6.道歉、遗憾和应答Apologies,regrets,sympathies ＆ responses
7.邀请和应答Invitations and responses
8.提供(帮助等)和应答Offers and responses
9.约会Making appointments
10.意愿和希望Intentions and wishes
11.请求、允许和应答Asking for permission and responses
a. Good morning/afternoon/evening.
Hello/Hi. How are you
Fine,thank you,and you
Very well,thank you.
b.Best wishes/regards to....
Please give my regards/best wishes
/love to....
Say hello to....
Please remember me to....
1.问候 Greetings
2.介绍 Introductions
a. This is Mr/Mrs/Miss/Ms/Comrade....
May I introduce you to...
I’d like you to meet....
b. How do you do
Nice/Glad/Pleased to see/meet you.
Nice meeting you,Mr/Mrs/Miss....
c. My name is....
I’m a(student/teacher,etc.).
d. I’m Chinese.
3.告别
Farewells
a. I’m afraid I must be leaving now.
I think it’s time for us to leave now.
b. Good-bye!(Bye-bye! Bye!)
See you later/tomorrow.(See you.)
Good night.
4.感谢和应答
Thanks and responses
a. Thank you (very much).
Thanks a lot. Many thanks.
Thanks for....
b. It’s very kind of you to....
Not at all. You’re welcome.
It’s/That’s all right.
5.祝愿、祝贺和应答
Good wishes,congratulations ＆ responses
a. Good luck! Best wishes to you!
I wish you good luck/success!
Good journey(to you)! Have a good trip.
Have a nice/good time. Congratulations.
I’d like to congratulate you on....
b. Thank you. The same to you.
c. Happy New Year! Merry Christmas!
Happy birthday to you.
6.道歉、遗憾和应答
Apologies,regrets,sympathies ＆ responses
a. Sorry/Pardon. I’m sorry.
I’m sorry for/about....
I’m sorry to hear....
I’m sorry to...have＋V－ed/that....
b. Excuse me(for...). I’m afraid of....
What a pity/shame! It’s a pity that....
c. That’s all right. It doesn’t matter.
That’s nothing.
7.邀请和应答
Invitations and responses
a. Will you come to...
Would you like to....
I’d like to invite you to....
b. Yes,I’d love to(...).
Yes,it’s very kind/nice of you.
c. I’d love to,but....
8.提供(帮助等)和应答Offers and responses
a. Can/Could/Shall I help you
Would you like me to...
Is there anything(else) I can do for you
Do you want me to... What can I do for you
Let me do/carry/help...(for you).
Would you like some...
b. Thanks. That would be nice/fine.
That’s very kind of you.
Thank you for your help.
Yes,please. Here,take this/my....
c.No,thanks/thank you.
No,thanks/thank you. I can manage it myself.
Thank you all the same. That’s very kind of you,but..
9.约会 Making appointments
a.Are you/Will you be free this afternoon/tomorrow
How about tomorrow morning/afternoon/evening
Shall we meet at 4:30 at...
b.Yes,that’s all right.
Yes,I’ll be free then.
c.No,I won’t be free then. But I’ll be free....
d.All right. See you then.
10.意愿和希望Intentions and wishes
a. I’m going to....
I intend/mean/plan to....
I will.... I’d like to... .
I feel like V-ing(going out for a walk).
I (do not) want/hope to....
I’m ready to....
I would rather not tell you.
b. I want/hope/wish to....
I wish that.... I would like to....
11.请求、允许和应答
Asking for permission and responses
a. May I... Can/Could I...
I wonder if I could....
Would/Do you mind if I open the window
b. Yes/Sure/Certainly. Yes,(do) please.
Of course(you may). Go ahead,please.
That’s OK/all right. Not at all.
c. I’m sorry you can’t.
I’m sorry,but.... You’d better not.
12.同意和不同意Agreement and disagreement
13.喜好和厌恶 Likes and dislikes
14.决断和坚持 Determination,decision and insistence
15.判断和意见Judgement and opinion
16.职责Obligation
17.能力Ability
18.偏爱Preference
19.责备和抱怨Blame and complaint
20.肯定和不肯定Certainty and uncertainty
22.禁止和警告 Prohibition and warnings
21.可能和不可能Possibility and impossibility
23.预见、猜测和相信 Prediction,conjecture and belief
24.请求Requests
25.劝告和建议 Advice and suggestions
26.许诺 Promises
27.提醒Reminding
12.同意和不同意
Agreement and disagreement
a. Certainly/Sure/Of course.
No problem. Yes,please.
Yes,I think so. That’s true.
All right/OK. That’s a good idea....
It’s a good idea to/that....
I/We agree(with you).
I agree to.../that clause
b. No,I don’t think so. I’m afraid not.
I’m afraid I(really) can’t agree with you.
13.喜好和厌恶 Likes and dislikes
a. I like/love...(very much).
I like/love to....
b. I don’t like(to).... I hate(to)....
14.决断和坚持
Determination,decision and insistence
a. I will....
I have decided to/that...
I have decided wh-clause/wh-words to....
b. I insist on/that....
15.判断和意见 Judgement and opinion
a. It certainly is.
It’s correct to do....
Well done/Good work!
b. In my opinion....
It seems....
So far as I know....
16.职责 Obligation
You must/have to/should/ought to....
It is necessary to/that....
17.能力 Ability
I can.... He is able to....
18.偏爱 Preference
I prefer...to... He’d prefer them not to....
He’d rather begin at once.
19.责备和抱怨 Blame and complaint
a. He is to blame. She blamed him for....
He shouldn’t have done it.
b. I’m sorry to have said that,but....
Why can’t you do something about it
20.肯定和不肯定 Certainty and uncertainty
a. I’m sure(of that). I’m sure(that)....
b. I’m not sure(of that). I doubt if....
I’m not sure whether/if....
c. Perhaps/Maybe.
21.可能和不可能 Possibility and impossibility
a. He can/may....
It is possible that....
b. He may not.... It is likely that....
He is not likely to....
22.禁止和警告
Prohibition and warnings
a. You can’t/mustn’t....
If you...,you’ll....
You’d better not do it.
Don’t smoke! Don’t be late!
b. Look out! Take care!
Be careful!
23.预见、猜测和相信
Prediction,conjecture and belief
a. He will....
b. I guess that....
He must have done....
It seems(that)....
It looks as if....
c. I believe that he is right.
24.请求 Requests
a. Can/Will/Could/Would you...for me
Will/Can/Could/Would you please...
May I have...
b. Please give/Pass me....
Please wait(here/a moment).
Please wait(for) your turn.
Please stand in line/line up.
Please hurry. Make sure that...please.
c. Don’t rush(hurry)/crowd. No noise,please.
No smoking,please.
25.劝告和建议
Advice and suggestions
a. You’d better(not)....
You should/ought to....
You need(to)....
b. Shall we....
Let’s....
What/How about...
Why not...
Why don’t you...
26.许诺 Promises
I promise....
You shall have...tomorrow.
I will give...to you.
27.提醒 Reminding
Don’t forget to....
Don’t you remember the days when...
Make sure that everything is OK now.
28.表示焦虑 Expressing anxiety
29.表示惊奇 Expressing surprise
30.表示喜悦Expressing pleasure
31.谈论天气 Talking about the weather
32.购物Shopping
33.问路和应答Asking the way and responses
34.问时间、日期和应答Asking the time,date and responses
35.就餐Taking meals
36.打电话 Making phone calls
37.传递信息 Passing on a message
38.求救 Calling for help
39.看病 Seeing the doctor
40.语言困难Language difficulties
41.常见的标志和说明 Some common signs and instructions
28.表示焦虑
Expressing anxiety
What’s wrong
What’s the matter(with you)
Is there anything the matter
I’m/He’s/She’s worried.
Oh,what shall I/we do
We were all anxious about....
29.表示惊奇 Expressing surprise
Really
Oh dear!
Is that so
Good heavens!
30.表示喜悦 Expressing pleasure
I’m glad/pleased/happy to....
That’s nice/wonderful/great.
Hopefully tomorrow will turn fine.
31.谈论天气
Talking about the weather
a. What’s the weather like today
How’s the weather in...
b. It’s fine/cloudy/windy/rainy....
It’s getting cold/warm....
It’s rather warm/cold/hot...today,isn’t it
It’s a beautiful day today.
32.购物 Shopping
a. What can I do for you
May/Can I help you
b. I want/I’d like....
How much is it
That’s too expensive,I’m afraid.
That’s fine. I’ll take it.
Let me have....
c. How many/much do you want
What colour/size/kind do you want
d. Do you have any other kind/size/colour,etc.
33.问路和应答
Asking the way and responses
a. Excuse me. Where’s the men’s/ladies’ room
Excuse me. Can you tell me the way to...
b. Go down this street.
Turn right/left at the first/second crossing.
It’s about...metres from here.
Go straight ahead till you see....
34.问时间、日期和应答
Asking the time,date and responses
a. What day is(it) today
What’s the date today
Excuse me. What time is it by your watch
What’s the time,please
b. It’s Monday/Tuesday....
It’s January 10th.
It’s five o’clock/five thirty(half past five)/
a quarter past (to) six.
It’s time for/to....
35.就餐 Taking meals
a. What would you like(to have)...
Would you like something(to eat/drink)
b. I’d like....
Cake/Two eggs...,please.
c. Would you like some more...
Help yourself to some....
d. Thank you. I’ve had enough.
I’m full,thank you.
Just a little,please.
36.打电话 Making phone calls
a. Hello! Is (Tom) in
May/Could I speak to...
Is that...(speaking)
b. Hold on,please.
Hello,who is it
He/She isn’t here right now.
Can I take a message for you
c. Hello,this is...speaking.
I called to tell/ask you....
37.传递信息 Passing on a message
a. Will you please give this note/message to...
b. ...asked me to give you this note.
c. Thanks for the message.
38.求救 Calling for help
a. Help!
Thief!
b. What’s the matter
39.看病 Seeing the doctor
a. There’s something wrong with....
I’ve got a headache and a cough.
I feel terrible(bad).
I don’t feel well.
I’ve got a pain here.
This place hurts.
b. Take this medicine three times a day.
Drink plenty of water and have a good rest.
It’s nothing serious.
You’ll be all right/well soon.
40.语言困难
Language difficulties
Pardon
Please say that again/more slowly.
Would you please say that again/more slowly
What do you mean by...
I’m sorry I can’t follow you.
I’m sorry I know only a little English.
41.常见的标志和说明
Some common signs and instructions
a. BUSINESS HOURS OFFICE HOURS MENU OPEN
CLOSED NO PARKING NO PHOTOS NO SMOKING
b. PULL PUSH EXIT ENTRANCE
c. INSTRUCTIONS
MADE IN CHINA/JAPAN/U.S.A.(USA)/U.K./HK(Hong Kong)
THIS SIDE UP ON OFF DANGER
d. PLAY STOP PAUSE
e. Insert here. Split here.(共14张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
基 本 句 型
南莫中学高三英语备课组
1．主语 + 系动词 + 表语：
A foreign language is a weapon in the struggle of life.
The plan sounds perfect.
This material feels soft.
This is where I work.
2．主语 + 谓语：
The telephone rang.
His father might have died.
We all breathe, drink and eat.
注：这种结构中的谓语动词是不及物动词，状语并非结构上不可缺少的成分。但在某种情况下，不加状语便不能表达完整的意思，这就引出了下列句型：
△ 主语 + 谓语 + 状语：
The meeting lasted for two hours.
We walked for five miles.
This box weighs five kilos.
He lives in Guangzhou.
They will be flying to London.
3．主语 + 谓语 + 宾语：
She is reading a novel.
You may have seen each other.
He is doing morning exercises.
This factory makes machine tools.
Mary has ordered a new dress.
I have had my lunch.
注：这种结构中的谓语动词是及物动词，后面只跟一个宾语，因此称单宾及物动词，一般不需状语即可表达完整的意思。但在某些情况下，状语必不可少，这就引出了下列句型：
△ 主语 + 谓语 + 宾语 + 状语：
He put the vase on the table.
Jim brought his suitcases upstairs.
I’ll take Mary to the station.
They treated him kindly.
4．主语 + 谓语 + 间接宾语 + 直接宾语：
She made herself a new dress.
My father bought me a novel.
Pass me the salt, please.
注①：这种结构中的谓语动词一般只限于某些双宾语及物动词，它们可以分为两类：
第一类：give, show, send, bring, offer, read, pass, lend, leave, tell, hand, return, write, pay, throw, allow, wish, teach, promise, owe, refuse等。
第二类：make, buy, do, fetch, get, paint, play, save, reserve, spare, order, cook, sing, find等。
注②：间接宾语有时可以改成一个由to或for引导的短语，这在意思上没有什么差别：
I’ll return you the book tomorrow. → I’ll return the book to you tomorrow.
She made a new dress for Mary. → She made Mary a new dress.
注③：第一类可以改为由 to 引导的短语；第二类可以改为由 for引导的短语。
注④：间接宾语用介词词组表示的场合：
a. 对间接宾语加以强调时：
I’ve bought it for you, not for myself.
I’ll hand this letter to the secretary and not to the director.
b. 当直接宾语是一个人称代词时：
I’ll send it to you tomorrow.
You’d better hand it directly to the headmaster.
c. 当直接宾语比间接宾语短时：
She showed the picture to the students sitting near her.
d. 当间接宾语置于句首时：
Who did you send it to
To him I told the story, not to his brother.
e. 当间接宾语和直接宾语都是代词时：
He gave it to me.
I’ll lend them to you.
5．主语 + 谓语 + 宾语 + 宾语补足语：
We have proved him wrong.
What make you think so
She found the child fast asleep.
I called him a fool.
注：这种结构中的谓语动词一般只限于某些复合宾语及物动词。
句 子 成 分
一、主语 主语可以用下面这些东西表示：
1. 名词；2. 代词； 3. 数词；4. 动名词；5. 不定式；6. 词组或复合结构；7. 从句；8. 名词化的其他词类，如：
A foreign language is a weapon in the struggle of life.
Who is speaking, please This is Jack speaking.
Two will be enough.
Living in that island country for three months was an unforgetable experience for me.
Early to bed and early to rise makes a man healthy, happy and wise.
Whether we’ll go depends on the weather.
“A” is an article.
二、表语 表语可以用下面这些东西表示：
1. 名词；2. 代词；3. 数词；4. 形容词；5. 分词；6. 动名词；7. 不定式；8. 副词；9. 介词短语；10. 词组；11. 从句，如：
The masses are the real heroes.
That’s something we have always to keep in mind.
She was the first to learn about it.
My idea is this.
Time is pressing. Let’s hurry up.
All I could do was send him a telegram.
We must be off now.
They are twice the size of chickens.
My idea is that we should stick to our original plan.
三、宾语 宾语可以用下面这些东西表示：
1. 名词；2. 代词；3. 数词；4. 动名词；5. 不定式；6. 复合结构；
7. 从句；8. 名词化的形容词及其他词类，如：
She died a heroic death.
They didn’t promise him anything definite.
How many do you want We need two.
Pay attention to uniting and working with comrades who differ with you.
Learn to play the piano.
I’ll get it stamped.
Did you write down what she said
四、定语 定语可以用下面这些东西表示：
1. 形容词；2. 代词；3. 数词；4. 名词或名词所有格；5. 分词；
6. 不定式；7. 介词短语；8. 副词；9. 词组或合成词；10. 从句，如：
His words moved everyone present.
We belong to the third world.
We must live up to the Party’s expectations.
This is indeed a most pressing problem.
There are two things to be discussed today.
the interests of the people / a man of good temper / a child of five
五、状语 状语可以用下面这些东西表示：
1. 副词；2. 介词短语；3. 不定式；4. 分词；5. 形容词；6. 词组；
7. 复合结构；8. 从句，如：
They were greatly touched to hear the old man’s story. (副词)
They did everything they could to save the boy’s life. (不定式)
I said it in fun. (介词短语)
They all rushed over, eager to help. (形容词)
They returned tired and hungry. (形容词)
We are working day and night … . (词组)
He came up shouldering a spade. (分词)
We completed the work five days ahead of time. (词组)
Seeing this, some students became very worried. (分词)
He entered the room, his nose red with cold. (复合结构)
句 子 的 种 类
一、 陈述句：
She arrived quite early. (事实) / She may have arrived now. (看法)
二、疑问句：
1．一般疑问句：
Has the factory gone into production
Shall I turn on the TV
2．特殊疑问句：
Which colour do you prefer
How much is this table-cloth
3．选择疑问句：
① 一般疑问句 + or + 第二个选择:
Are you an Englishman or an American
② 特殊疑问句 + 选择部分:
Which do you prefer, red wine or white
4．反意（或附加）疑问句：
You are not going out today, are you Yes, I am. / No, I’m not.
三、祈使句：
Be sure to get here before nine.
You do it right now.
四、感叹句：
① what + 感叹句：
What a noble-hearted man he was!
What good news it is!
② how + 感叹句：
How well she dances!
How fast they are working!
句 子 的 结 构 层 次
一、简单句
二、并列句：
We love peace but we are not afraid of war.
Hurry up, it’s getting late.
三、复合句：
There is something in what he said.
That’s exactly what I am planning to do.
四、并列复合句(共36张PPT)
定语从句
在复合句中，修饰某一名词或代词的从句叫定语从句，它的作用相当于一个形容词。
定语从句通常位于它所修饰的名词或代词之后，这种名词或代词叫做先行词，引导定语从句的词为关系代词或关系副词。
关系代词在定语从句中可作主语、宾语和定语；关系副词在定语从句中只作状语。
1、先行词 注意被定语从句所修饰的先行词的特点，即是人还是物，以及将要在定语从句中所充当的成分。
如： The student who answered the question was my friend. (先行词是student在定语从句中充当主语) The girl you met just now is my sister. (先行词是girl在定语从句中作宾语)
2.关系代词、关系副词
引导定语从句的关系代词、关系副词,代替先行词在定语从句中充当成分。
在定语从句中能作主语的关系代词有who,that,which其中who用于指人，which用于指物，that既可指人也可指物。
如:
An architect is a person who /that design houses and buildings. The supermarket which/that was opened last week is a very modern one.
在定语从句中能作宾语的关系代词有who,whom,which,that其中who, whom用于指人which用于指物that既可指人也可指物。
如: The suit which/that the tailor made for me doesn’t fit me. The man whom/that I beat in the tennis game was my father.
n
在定语从句中能作定语的关系代词有whose或the +名词+of+which
如: He lives in the room whose door is green. =He lives in the room the door of which is green. The girl whose father is a teacher studies very well. =The girl the father of whom is a teacher studies very well.
在定语从句中作方式状语的关系副词常被省略如:
This is the way (how) he worked out the problem.
n 介词如果在定语从句的句首时,作宾语的关系代词只能用whom, which且不可省略
如: The man with whom you shook hands just now is the head of our department. =The man whom you shook hands with just now is the head of our department. This is the book to which I referred in my talk. =This is the book (which) I referred to in my talk.
n 非限制性定语从句和先行词关系不紧密用逗号和主句分开,另译作一句,作为一种补充说明即使去掉从句，主句的意思仍然清楚而限制性定语从句和先行词关系紧密从句不能去掉,如果去掉意思就不清楚且主句和从句之间无逗号一般译在先行词前面。
n 除that不可以引导非限制性定语从句外其他关系代词和关系副词均可引导非限制性定语从句。
All the books，which have pictures have been sent to them. He has a brother who is a doctor.他有一个当医生的兄弟。（也许不止一个兄弟） He has a brother ,who is a doctor.他有个兄弟，他是一个医生。
n which在所引导的非限制性定语从句，有时可以修饰整个主句即代替主句的意义。
The examination has been put off，which is what we want.考试被推迟了，这正是我们希望的。
Mary was late again ,which made her teacher angry.玛丽又迟到了，这使她的老师非常生气。
n 只用which不用that的情况：
（1）引导非限制性定语从句时 Bamboo is hollow，which makes it very light （2）当关系代词前有介词时 The room in which my family live used to be a garage （3）当先行词本身为that时 ：That which you told him about is what we want to know你告诉他的正是我们想知道的
n 只用that不用which的情况： （1）先行词有序数词或形容词最高级修饰时如:The first place that we visited was the Great Wall. This is the best film that has ever been made. （2）先行词前有only,few,little,right,any,all, one等修饰时 The only furniture (that) he had in the room was a chair and a small desk. There is little time that we can use. (3) 先行词是不定代词some, all, anything,little,much,something,everything,nothing,none等时 That is all (that) I want to say. Is there anything (that) I can do for you
(4) 先行词为人和物的名词词组 They talked about persons and things that they remembered in the school. (5) 主句前who, whom有时 Who is the man that is reading the newspaper over there (6) 在there be 或there live结构中先行词指物 There is a book on the desk that I am very interested in.
(7)先行词指物在主句中作表语
Is this the book that you borrowed in the library
(8)在 way(指方法)后面常用that代替how或 in which结构
That was the way (that) he did it.
(9) time(表示次数)前有序数词修饰That was the last time that I met her.
.
(10)习惯用法中that 可以用作关系副词代替(in, on, for) which及 when where, why, 而且that可省略 The way that (in which) you look at problem is wrong. I never forget the day (when, that, on which) I went to school 20years ago. Do you know anywhere (that, where) I can get a drink I ‘d like to know the reason (that, why, for which) you won’t come.
(11)当先行词前有the same修饰时或当先行词和关系代词指同一人或物时 This is the same man that /who I told you about.
This is the book that I bought yesterday.
只用who的情况。 (1)先行词为those指人 Those who want to go there raise your hands. (2)there be (live)结构中先行词指人 There is a young man outside who asks for you. There lived a king who was kind to his people. (3)先行词为指人的不定代词one,anyone,no one, all, nobody, any body, none等 Anyone who broke the window would be punished. We should learn from the one who benefits us.
n 选用关系副词不能光看先行词是否是表示时间，地点和原因的名词，而必须分析从句谓语动词与先行词之间的逻辑关系。如果关系词在从句中作主语或宾语则他仍须用关系代词which或that
如： We will never forget the day, which we spent together. I like to take my vacation in the mountain, which is quiet and beautiful. That is the reason, which he gave us for his action.
n as 引导限制性定语从句时,先行词常用such和same修饰,as在从句中不省略如:
He used such expressions as he could find n the tests. They stayed for the night in the same room as they had once rented.
As 引导非限制性定语从句时,as代表整个主句的意义,定语从句在主句中的位置比较灵活。
如： He is a teacher，as is clear from his manner. Taiwan, as is known to everyone, is a part of China.
n 定语从句修饰of前面的词还是of后面的词, 要看of前面的词是否有定冠词修饰。
如: Tom is one of the boys who were late this morning. (汤姆是所有早上迟到的男孩中的一员) Tom is the only one of the boys who was late this morning. ( 汤姆是所有男孩中早上迟到的唯一个)
Exercises:
1. There are 102 elements(化学元素) found in nature,_________are metals 2. The house ______roof was damaged has now been repaired. 3. I have never been to Rome but that’s the city I’d most like to visit.
4.The reason _______I have not done my homework is there are too many difficult points.
5. “Gone are the days ________I was young,” the seventy-year-old man said. 6. This is the place ______he lived in his childhood.
7. The pen_________he writes id Hero 60. 8. Mrs. Lee will move into her new house next Monday, _______it will be completely furnished.
9. This is the very bus__we’ll go to the theater. 10.The best play _______Shakespeare wrote is probably King Lear, but some people don’t think so. 11. He is the only one of the teachers______Spanish in our school. 12. King Henry received a letter from Mr. Lirpa; _______announced (宣布)______he had finally solved the secret of light.
13. I bout a new book, ______is very beautiful. 14. I have a book, ______very interesting. 15. Only a twenty-minute walk from his village is a little valley set among he hills, ______is one of the quietest places in the world. 16. Those ______are willing to attend the party, sign here.
17. There are many places ______we can visit in China. 18.He was looking pleasantly at the children and parcels _______filled his bus. 19.Which are the books _______you bought for me
20. The village is no longer the one _______was 5 years ago. 21. Who is that girl _____is standing by the window 22. Do you know Mr. Smith ______story is very moving 23. There is a room, _______window faces the river. 24.There is a room, the window_______faces the river. 25.Such books _______you bought are useful. 26.The school is just the same _______it was 10 years ago.
27. I want to use the same tool _____you used just now. 28. He didn’t pass the exam, _______we had expected. 29.There is lots of air in loose snow, ______can keep the cold out. 30._______is known, the earth is round, not flat. 31.I don’t like the way ______he talks. 32. This is the first time I have given you a lesson in French.
33.It is the museum _______we visited last year. 34.We expressed to them our wish _____the same as theirs. 35.He is the only one of the students_____has got very good marks in the match. 36. He is one of the students ______have got good marks in the match. 37. Is this the place______we visited last year 38. Is this place __________we visited last year
39. He stood at the window; __________he could see what was happening. 40. _______Is known to everybody, the noon travels around the earth once every month. 41.After living in Paris for fifty years he returned to the small town_______he grew up as a child. 42.He made another wonderful discovery, ______ I think is of great importance to science. 43. In the office I never seem to have time until after 5:30 p.m., _______many people have gone home.
44.She has bought the same sort of washing machine_______you have. 45.There is nothing in the world______can frighten her. 46.He paid the boy 10 dollars for washing 10 windows, most of ____hadn’t been cleaned for at least a year. 47.Alice received an invitation from her boss, _____came as a surprise. 48.She likes to use words______is clear to him. 49. I shall never forget those days______I lives in the country with the farmers_____ has a great effect in my life.
50. Mr. Smith is one of the foreign experts who ___ working in our city. 51. _______________, Computer are widely used. 52. He has two sons, -________have turned engineers. 53.When people talk about the cities of Britain, the first______comes to my mind is London. 54.His head soon appeared out of a window, _______he could see an elephant in the distance.
55.We had a tiring meeting _______I kept talking asleep. 56Take care of the boy and the dog -_______are crossing the road. 57. How lovely the baby is _____is sleeping in its mother’s arms. 58.He arrives in Washington in 1946, ________some time later, he become a writer. 59.By using both ears one can tell the direction _______a sound comes. 60. On the bus I saw a student_____I thought was my brother. 61. He told us ______he had done.
62.She spent the whole evening talking about the things and persons_______none of us have heard of. 63.He makes good use of the time_____he can spare. 64. The factory ______his mother works is in the east of the city. 2006年广东省江门一中高考英语语法系列冠词复习[整理]
一、考点聚焦
1.不用冠词的情况
（1）专有名词、物质名词、抽象名词、人名、地名等名词前，一般不加冠词。
China , America, Smith
Air is matter.
（2）可数名词前有物主代词、指示代词、名词所有格等限制时，不加冠词。
This dictionary is mine.
（3）季节、月份、星期、节日、假日、一日三餐名称前一般不加冠词。
March, May Day, National Day, Children’s Day, Women’s Day
Have you had supper
Spring is the best season of the year.
（4）称呼语或指家用雇用的nurse、cook等名词前及表示头衔职务的名词作宾语、补语及同位语时，一般不加冠词。
What’s this, Father We made him our chairman.
Ask nurse to put the child to bed. Professor Li.
（5）学科名称、球类、棋类名称前不加冠词。
Do you study physics
He likes playing football/chess.
（6）复数名词表示泛指一类人或事物时前不用冠词。
They are peasants/ workers.
（7）在与by连用的交通工具名称前不加冠词。
by car, by bus,by bike, by train, by air/ water/ land
但：take a bus, come in a boat, on the train/ bus需注意。
（8）某些固定词组中不用冠词。
①名词词组中：
husband and wife, brother and sister, body and soul, day and night, knife and fork
②介词词组中：
to(at, from) school, in (to)class, in (to,at, from)university（college）,to（in, into, from）church, to(in,into, out of)prison(hospital, bed), to(at, from, out of)work, to(in, from) town,at (from)home, to(at)sea, at night(noon, midnight), by car (bus, bicycle, plane), on foot
注意：在有些词组中，有无冠词含义不同。
in hospital 住院（因病）
in the hospital在医院（工作、参观等）
in front of在前面，指某物体之外
in the front of在前部，指某物之内
in charge负责，主管 out of question没问题
in the charge由……负责 out of the question不可能
（9）as引导的让步状语从句中，作表语的名词不带冠词。
Child as she is, she knows a lot of French.
（10）系动词turn（作“变成”解）后作表语的单数可数名词前习惯不用冠词。
The young girl has turned writer.
= The young girl has become a writer.
（11）在单数名词 + after + 同一单数名词（表示“一个接一个”）结构中，单数可数名词前不加冠词。
She did experiment after experiment.
类似的还有：shop after shop, mistake after mistake
（12）形容词的最高级前、序数词前也有不用定冠词的情况。
①“most + 形容词原级”作“十分、非常、极”解时，前面不用定冠词。
Oh, it’s most beautiful.
②当两个形容词最高级并列修饰同一个名词时，第二个形容词前通常不用定冠词。
She is the tallest and fattest girl in our school.
③当形容词最高级作表语，不表示与其他人或物相比时，其前不用定冠词。
The market in the country is busiest in winter.
④形容词最高级前有名词所有格或物主代词时，不能用定冠词。
A wolf in a sheep’s skin is our most dangerous enemy.
⑤序数词前面一般加定冠词表示“第……”之意，但在second、third等词前加不定冠词表示“又一，再一”之意。
…why you took a second arrow
注意：下句中“a first”表示“第一名、冠军”。
He is a top student in our class, he often gets a first in maths.
（13）no与such连用时应放在such之前，such后面的名词不用冠词。
No such thing has ever happened in this village.
（14）never、ever置于作主语的名词前，这些名词前不用冠词。
Never did student study so hard.这个学生从未学得这么认真。
（15）有时为了节省空间、时间、金钱和精力，或为了引起注意力，省去a(n)或the,这主要用于新闻标题、工商业文件、广告、电报、公告、提纲、书名等。
Conference opens.会议召开了。
2.定冠词的使用情况
（1）使用定冠词的一般情况。
①特指或第二次提到。 ②序数词前、最高级前、独一无二的东西前。
③用于表示发明物的单数名词前或某些专有名词前。
（2）定冠词使用特殊的场合。
① He hit him in the face.
beat sb. on the nose, take sb. by the arm, pat sb. on the head② the rich, the poor, the wounded 富人，穷人，伤员
③ the elder of the two, he more beautiful of the two两者中较年长的一位，较漂亮的一个
④ The sooner, the better.越快越好。
⑤ He got paid by the hour.他是按小时付工钱的。
by the yard/the dozen/the month/the year…
但：by weight按重量
⑥ in the 50s /in the 1870s（表示年代）
⑦ the Smiths/the Whites（表示一家人或夫妇俩）
⑧ in the water/field/light/shade/distance/middle/country/rain
⑨ tell the truth/on the other hand/on the way home
⑩ 当抽象名词表示某一特定内容，特别是当它有一限定性修饰语时，它与定冠词连用：
She is fond of music.
He is playing the music written by Beethoven.
Good advice is beyond price.
I’m sorry not to have taken the advice he gave.
3.不定冠词常用的几种情况
（1）表示“一”相当于“one”。I’ll return in a day or two.
（2）表示“每”相当于“per”。We have three meals a day.
（3）表示“同一性”相当于“the same”。The children are of an age.
（4）表示类指，表示“某类”。He wants to he a doctor.
（5）表示泛指，相当于“any”。A horse is a useful animal.
（6）表示某一个，相当于“a certain”。A Mr. Smith is asking to see you.
（7）与抽象名词连用，可以表示“一场、一次、一件”，如：a pleasure一件乐事，a surprise一件令人惊讶的事，a joy一件高兴的事，a pity一件遗憾的事，an honour一个（件）经以为荣的人(事)。
（8）与物质名词连用，表示“一种，一阵、一份”。
What a heavy rain!
What a good supper!
Please give me a black coffee!
4.冠词表类别的常见方式
（1）定冠词 + 单数可数名词，表示一个，代表一类。
The computer was invented in 1945.
The TV set was invented by Joan Baird.
The horse is a useful animal.
（2）不定冠词 + 单数可数名词（表示任意一个，某一个）。
A pen is a tool for writing.
A square has four sides.
A horse is a useful animal.
注意：man, woman表示泛指时，不用冠词，且常用单数。如：
Man is fighting a battle against pollution.
Man tries to be the protector of woman.
（3）可数名词或不可数名词，指类别（考虑到同类中的各个情况）。
Horses are useful animals.
Rice is a kind of food.
5.冠词位置问题
（1）不定冠词 + 副词 + 形容词 + 名词。
This is a very interesting story.
（2）such、what、both、all、quite、rather +不定冠词+形容词+名词。
I’ve never seen such a film!
Half a pound of pork,please!
What a good idea it is!
（3）as、so、too、how、however、enough+形容词+不定冠词+名词。
It is as pleasant a day as I have ever spent.
I can’t finish the task in so short a time.
This seems not too long a distance.
We wonder how difficult a problem he worked out.
However low te price you paid,you waste your money.
He is brave enough a hunter to kill the bear.
（4）定冠词位置。
①half、twice、three times + the + 名词
He paid twice the price for it.
Their house is three times the size of yours.
②all、both、double + the + 名词
Both the blind men were mistaken.
All the students in our class are eager to know the secret.
I offered him double the amount, but he still refused.
二、精典名题导解
选择填空
1.The warmth of ____________sweater will of course be determined by the sort of ___________wool used.（NMET 2001）
A．The ; the B．the ; / C．/; the D．/; /
解析：答案为B。第一空格为特指，交待the warmth的内容，第二空格为泛指，the sort of wool used所用羊毛的种类。此题有三点需注意：①正确理解sweater 这一句词在句中的类别。②掌握determine在句中作“决定”、“取决于”这个意思。③掌握定冠词表特指的基本用法。
2.Most animals have little connection with _________animals of___________ different kind unless they kill them for food.（NMET 2000）
A．the … a B．/ … a C．the … the D．/ … the
解析：答案为B。名词复数表类别，其前不用冠词，故第一个空格不填冠词，表不定概念的“一种”，“某种”要用不定冠词a。要准确掌握冠词表类别的三种表达方式和不定冠词常用的几种情况，见前面要点考点聚
焦内容。
3.Paper money was in ___________use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in __________thirteenth century.（NMET1999）
A．the … / B．the … the C．/ … the D．/ … /
解析：答案为C。题中in use是固定搭配，意为“在使用”，use为抽象名词，其前不用冠词。后者是序数词前用定冠词the。要牢记一些固定搭配如in use、under construction（在建设中）、in debt（欠债）、come to power（执政）、on fire（着火）、at table（用餐）、out of work（失业）等。
用心 爱心 专心 116号为您服务 - 1 -(共16张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
英语的时态
（2）
南莫中学高三英语备课组
六、现在完成时
1．现在完成时的构成：助动词have (has) + 动词的过去分词
注：has 用于第三人称单数，have 用于其他所有人称。
2．现在完成时的用法：
（1）现在完成时表示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。通常与表示包括现在在内的时间副词just，already, before, yet, never, ever等状语连用。例如：
① I have never heard of that before.
② Have you ever ridden a horse
③ She has already finished the work.
④ Have you milked the cow yet Yes, I have done that already.
⑤ I’ve just lost my science book.
有时没有时间状语；多是一般疑问句。
（2）现在完成时表示过去已经开始，持续到现在,也许还会持续下去的动作或状态。可以和表示从过去某一时刻延续到现在（包括现在在内）的一段时间的状语连用。 如：for和since，以及 so far, now, today, this week(month, year) 等。
① I haven’t seen her these days.
② She has learnt English for 3 years.
③ They have lived here since 1990.
④ What has happened to the USA in the last 350 years
注意：表示短暂时间动作的词，如come, go, die, marry, buy等的完成时不能与for, since等表示一段时间的短语连用。
（3）现在完成时还可以用在时间和条件状语从句中,表示将来某时完成的动作，例如：
I’ll go to your home when I have finished my homework.
If it has stopped snowing in the morning, we’ll go to the park.
（4） have been (to)和have gone (to)的区别：
★have / has been (to) 表示“曾经去过”某地，说话时此人很可能不在那里，已经回来。侧重指经历。
★have / has gone (to) 表示某人“已经去了”某地，说话时此人在那里，或可能在路上，反正不在这里。
试比较：
He has been to Beijing. 他曾去过北京。
（人已回来，可能在这儿）
He has gone to Beijing. 他已经去了北京。
（人已走，不在这儿）。
一般过去时与现在完成时之比较
1）过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情，强调动作；现在完成时为过去发生的，强调过去的事情对现在的影响，强调的是影响。
2）过去时常与具体的时间状语连用，而现在完成时通常与模糊的时间状语连用，或无时间状语。
◎ 一般过去时的时间状语有：yesterday, last week，…ago, in1980, in October, just now, 具体的时间状语。
◎ 共同的时间状语有：this morning, tonight, this April, now, once，before, already, recently，lately等。　
◎ 现在完成时的时间状语有：for, since, so far, ever, never, just, yet, till / until, up to now, in past years, always, 等不确定的时间状语。
请大家认真分析比较下列各例句：
I saw this film yesterday.
（强调看的动作发生过了。）
I have seen this film.
（强调对现在的影响，电影的内容已经知道了。）　
She has returned from Paris.　
（她已从巴黎回来了。）
She returned yesterday.
（她是昨天回来了。）
He has been in the League for three years.
(在团内的状态可延续)
He joined the League three years ago.　
( 三年前入团，joined为短暂行为。)
注意：句子中如有过去时的时间副词（如 yesterday, last week, in 1960）时，不能使用现在完成时，要用过去时。例如：
（错）Tom has written a letter to his parents last night.
（对）Tom wrote a letter to his parents last night.
延续动词与瞬间动词
1) 用于完成时的区别：
　　延续动词表示经验、经历； 瞬间动词表示行为的结果，不能与表示段的时间状语连用。
　　 He has completed the work.　　
他已完成了那项工作。 (表结果)
　　 I've known him since then.　　
我从那时起就认识他了。(表经历)
2) 用于till / until 从句的差异：
　　 延续动词用于肯定句，表示“做……直到……” ；瞬间动词用于否定句，表示“到……，才……”。
　　 He didn't come back until ten o'clock.
　　他到10 点才回来。
　　 He slept until ten o'clock.　　　　　
　　他一直睡到10点。
典型例题：
1. You don't need to describe her. I ___ her several times.　
A. had met　 B. have met　 C. met　 D. meet
答案B ；首先本题后句强调对现在的影响，我知道她的模样，你不用描述。再次，several times告知为反复发生的动作，因此用现在完成时。
2. --- I'm sorry to keep you waiting.
　--- Oh, not at all. I ___ here only a few minutes.
A. have been　 B. had been　 C. was　 D. will be
答案A ； 等待的动作由过去开始，持续到现在，应用现在完成时。
七、过去完成时的用法
1、概念：表示过去的过去。
-----------|----------------|--------------------|---->
那时以前　 那时　 现在
其结构是：had + 过去分词
2、过去完成时的用法：
（1）过去完成时表示过去某一时刻或者某一动作之前完成的动作或状态；句中常用by, before, until, when等词引导的时间状语。
By the end of last year we had built five new houses.
I had learnt 5000 words before I entered the university.
（2）过去完成时的动词还可以表示过去某一时刻之前发生的动作或者状态持续到过去某个时间或者持续下去。
Before he slept, he had worked for 12 hours.　
（3）在told, said, knew, heard, thought等动词后的宾语从句。
She said (that) she had never been to Paris.
（4）在过去不同时间发生的两个动作中，发生在先，用过去完成时；发生在后，用一般过去时。
When the police arrived, the thieves had run away.
（5）表示意向的动词，如hope, wish, expect, think, intend, mean, suppose等，用过去完成时表示"原本…，未能…"
We had hoped that you would come, but you didn't.
（6）过去完成时的时间状语before, by, until , when, after, once, as soon as。
　 He said that he had learned some English before.
　 By the time he was twelve, Edison had began to make a living by himself.
　Tom was disappointed that most of the guests had left when he arrived at the party.
用一般过去时代替完成时
1) 两个动作如按顺序发生，又不强调先后，或用then，and，but 等连词时，多用一般过去时。
　When she saw the mouse，she screamed.
　My aunt gave me a hat and I lost it.
2) 两个动作相继发生，可用一般过去时；如第一个动作需要若干时间完成，用过去完成时。
　When I heard the news, I was very excited.
3) 叙述历史事实，可不用过去完成时，而只用一般过去时。
　Our teacher told us that Columbus discovered America in 1492.
时间
现在
过去
那时所预见的情况
八、过去将来时
一、基本概念：
过去将来时表示从过去的某一时间看将要发生的动作或存在的状态。它是一个相对的时态，即立足于过去某时，从过去的某一时间看即将发生的事情就要用这一时态。
1) He said his mother would buy a bike for him
2) My brother told me he wouldn’t believe Jack any more.
3) Would it be all right if he knew his illness
二、基本形式：
would／should＋动词原形
（其中 would 用于各种人称， should 常用于第一人称）。
例如：
They were sure they would win the final victory．
他们坚信会赢得最后胜利。
He didn't expect that we should（would）all be there．
他没想到我们都在那里。
上述两个例句中的宾语从句谓语 would win 和 should（would）be 分别与其主句谓语 were sure 和 didn't expect 相对应。
三、过去将来时的一些其它表达形式：
1．was／were＋going to＋动词原形
He said he was going to try．
他说他准备试试。
2．was／were＋to＋动词原形
They said the railway was to be opened to traffic on May Day．
他们说这条铁路将在五一节通车。
3．was／were about＋动词原形
We were about to go out when it began to rain．
我们正要出去天（突然）下起雨来。
4．过去进行时（一般多为动作概念较强的动词，如 go，come， leave，start， open，begin 等）也可用于表示将来。
I didn't know when they were coming again．
我不知道他们什么时候再来。
四、用法注意点：
1．在时间和条件状语从句中，常用一般过去时来表示过去将来时。例如：
He said he would come to see you when he had time．
他说他有时间就来看望你。
2．“would＋动词原形”可表示过去习惯性的动作。此时，不管什么人称，都可用would。
When he was a child he would get up early．
他年幼时，总是很早起床。
考例精练：
1．We were all surprised when he made it clear that he ____ office soon．（MET93）
A．leaves B．would leave C．left D．had left
2．— Alice, why didn't you come yesterday？
— I ____ ，but I had an unexpected visitor．（NMET97）
A．had B．would C．was going to D．did
1. The old man _____ two days after he had been sent to hospital.
A. died B. would die C. had died D. has died
2. Old McDonald gave up smoking for a while, but soon ______ to his old ways.
A. returned B. returns C. was returning D. had returned
3. I _____ my son _____ a doctor, but he wasn’t good enough at science.
A. hoped; would become B. had hoped; would become
C. had hoped; will become D. hope; will become
4. I _____ to take a good holiday this year, but I wasn’t able to get away.
A. hope B. have hoped C. had hoped D. hoped
5. Helen _____ her key in the office so she had to wait until her husband _____ home.
A. has left; comes B. left; had come
C. had left; came D. had left; would come (共26张PPT)
高三英语冠词总复习
一.基础知识记忆.
1.单数可数名词绝不能单独使用,其前不是加冠词a/an/the或one’s,就必须将名词的单数形式改为复数形式.
2.表泛指意义的复数名词或不可数名词(即物质名词或抽象名词)前面千万不要添加任何冠词.
3. 固定短语中有无冠词,要分得清清楚楚,明明白白.
二.定冠词的使用.
1.世界上独一无二的天体、河流、海洋、湖泊、山川等与地理知识有关的名词前.
e.g. the Changjiang River
the East Lake / the Pacific Ocean
the Urals.
2.形容词same前.
3.序数词最高级前面.
4.by far前置修饰比较级时.
e.g. This book is by far the better than that one.
c.f. This book is better by far than that one.
This book is even better than that one.
5.强调两者之间的比较且作主语、定语时.
e.g. The older of the two brothers is my desk-mate.
Which is the bigger country, Canada or Australia
Which is bigger, Canada or Australia
6. 表示“越…越…”意义时.
e.g. The sooner, the better.
7.句型“动作动词+ sb.+介词+the+具体身体部位名词”结构中.
e.g. Bob hit John on the head.
The gentle light struck the baby in the face.
The little boy took the elephant by the nose across the street.
8.发明的事物名称前(即invent之后的名词)或濒临灭绝的动物单数名词前.
e.g. Bell is generally considered to have invented the telephone.
As we all know, the tiger is in danger of dying out.
9.介词by后表示“按…计算”与度量衡单位有关的具体表时间、长度、体积、面积等名词前.
e.g. Cleaning women in big cities usually get paid by the hour.
Cleaning women in big cities usually get paid by time.
In England, cloth is sold by the yard instead of by the meter.
In England, cloth is sold by length.
10.与某些形容词连用表示一类人.
e.g. the rich
11.乐器名词前.
e.g. I like playing the guitar and my sister likes playing the piano.
12.由普通名词构成的专有名词前.
e.g. The people’s Republic of China and the United States are two great countries.
13.方位、方向名词前.
e.g. China is in the east of Asia, the largest continent on the earth, and on the west of the Pacific Ocean, the largest ocean in the world.
14. 再次指代上文中已提过的名词前.
e.g. I bought a pen yesterday. The pen writes well.
15.双方心中都知晓、明白的名词前.
e.g. Pass me the book, please.
16.与表示国家或民族的形容词连用,指代该全国全体人民.
e.g. The Chinese love peace.
17.用在姓氏复数之前表示全家人或夫妇俩.
18. 其后有某种修饰语(如介词短语、定语从句、分词短语或不定式等)的名词前,表示特定的人或物时.
e.g. The book on the desk is mine.
19.与单数可数名词连用,表类别.
e.g. The horse is a useful animal.
20.表同位关系的时间、地点、语言名词前.
e.g. I began to learn the French language in the University of Wuhan in the month of November of 1999.
21.与农历有关的节日名词前(即与festival连用时).
e.g. Children are always looking forward to the Spring Festival.
22.用在整十的复数形式前表年代.
e.g. In the 1870s, when Marx was over fifty, he began to learn Russian.
23. 习惯用语中.(高考词汇)
e.g. at the age of, at the beginning of, all over the world, all the best, go to the cinema, make the bed, the day after tomorrow, the day before yesterday, the other day, in the end, the moment, take the place of, on the radio, all the same, by the side of, by the way, on the way, in the habit of, in the charge of
三. a /an的使用.
表泛指意义的单数可数名词前或“一类”或“其中的一个”意义时.
e.g. A good book can enrich a person.
2.表频率,表示“每……” 、“每一……”意义时.
e.g. People have three meals a day.
3.某些抽象名词表具体意义或被某一形容词修饰了的时候.
e.g. It gave me a surprise to meet you here again.
As a teacher, he was a failure. However, as a leader, he was a success.
Comrade Lei Feng led a miserable life during his childhood.
4.有比喻意味或不确切的人名之前表达“一个叫……”意义时.
e.g. Li Hao is a living Lei Feng in our class.
A Mr. Smith wants to see you.
5.当某一动作或情况并未到此结束仍有继续下去的可能性的时候,必须用“a /an+序数词”结构.
e.g. Although he has failed six times, he would like to have a try a seventh time.
6. 与形容词最高级连用表示“很、非常”.
e.g. Yesterday was a happiest day for me, for I’d just won the first prize.
7.否定比较级表达最高级意义时,常用借助于不定冠词a/ an. a/ an+比较级
e.g. ____ What do you think of the film
____ Oh, I’ve never seen a worse one.
____ How do you like Tom
____ I’m afraid that no one in my class has a cleverer brain than he.
8.有时表示一次性行为,特别是用在名词化了的动词前.
e.g. have / take a look at ; go for a walk; come to an end; come to a stop
9.当一日三餐名词(breakfast, lunch, supper, dinner)或其他一些名词如time, life, help, pleasure, world, part等被某一(些)形容词修饰了的时候.
e.g. a delicious breakfast / a wonderful dinner/ a great help
10.固定短语结构中:
have a cold / stomachache, have a match, a great number of, in a word, have a word with, make a promise, in a minute, as a matter of fact, take a seat.
【特别注意】
英语中,有些名词永远都不会与不定冠词连用.
它们是advice, equipment, fun, furniture, information, news, luck, clothing, wealth.
四.零冠词.
1.表泛指意义的复数名词物质名词,以及介词后的抽象名词前.
e.g. Children are often compared to flowers.
Books are stairs that help people make progress.
2. 复数名词表类别、属性时,不用冠词.
e.g. Horses are useful animals.
Most animals have little connection with animals of a different kind unless they kill them for food.
3.由Day构成的与公历有关的节日名词前．
e.g. Children’s Day / Teachers’ Day / National Day / May Day
4. 表泛指意义的月份、季节、星期、学科、语言、材料等名词前．
e.g. on Sunday / in spring / in ink
5.球类、棋类名词前.
e.g. play football / chess / basketball
6. 介词by后接表交通、通讯方式等名词前.
e.g. by train /by telephone / by machine
7.泛指一日三餐名词前.
e.g. After breakfast, we are to visit Mountain Tai and have lunch there.
8. 官衔职务名词作表语补语或同位语时.
e.g. He is monitor of our class.
Lincoln was elected president of the U.S.
Dong Li, capital of Dongfanghong II, is a strong-minded man.
9.方位副词前.
e.g. Japan lies east of China.
10. “from…to”结构中重复使用的单数名词,以及“名词+介词+(同样)名词”结构中的名词前都不使用任何冠词.
e.g. from area to area / arm in arm / day by day
11.man作“人类”讲时.
e.g. Man can conquer nature.
12. as引导的让步状语从句句型中的单数名词前.
e.g. Hero as he is, he is still modest.
Child as she is, she knows a lot.
13. turn后的单数名词作表语.
e.g. She has turned doctor.
13.介词by后接表度量衡单位的时间、长度、重量、面积、价钱等总称名词前.
e.g. by time / by weight / by area / by length
14. 由地名构成的专有名词前.
e.g. Wuhan University is in Wuhan.
15. 单数可数名词已被物主代词数词指示代词或名词所有格修饰.
16.当两个或两个以上的名词用and连接且含有对比的含义或习惯上总是一起使用时.
e.g. Father and son attended the meeting together.
The two were like teacher and student, though they were the same age.
Husband and wife sat together in their home.
17.固定短语结构中.
come into use / put… into practice / out of question / out of the question/ at present
The sign reads“ In case of___ fire, break the glass and push________ red button. (NMET2003)
A. ×; a B. ×; the C. the ; the D. a ; a
2. Jumping out of _____ airplane at ten thousand feet is quite_____ exciting experience. (NMET2002)
A. ×; the B. ×; an C. an ; an D. the ; the
3.Boris has brains. In fact, I doubt whether anyone in the class has _____IQ.(2002)
A. a high B. a higher C. the higher D. the highest
B
C
B
4.The warmth of ____ sweater will of course be determined by the sort of ____ wool used.
( NMET2001)
A. × ; × B. the ; the C. the ; × D. ×; the
5. Most animals have little connection with___ animals of ___ different kind unless they kill them for food.(NMET2000)
the ; a B. ×; a C. × ; the D. the ; the
6.Paper money was in___ use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in ____ thirteen century.(NMET1999)
C
B
the; B. the ; the C. ×; the D. × ; ×
7. ---- Have you seen ___ pen I left it here this morning.
---- Is it ______ black one I think I saw it somewhere.
a ; the B. the ; the C. the; a D. a; a
8. Many people agree that _____ knowledge of English is a must in ______ international trade today. (NMET1996)
A. a;× B. the ;an C. the ; the D. × ; the
C
D
A
9.______ news conference does not always offer______ truthful information.
A. / ; / B. The ; / C. A ; the D. A ; /
10. Though they are_____ people of different sorts, they always buy dresses of _____ style.
A. / ; the B. the ; a C. / ; a D. the ; the
11. Dolly ______ sheep, the world’s first cloned animal, was given ____ shot to end her life on Feb.14 because she was suffering from a lung disease common in much older sheep.
A. / ; a B. the ; a C. a ; the D. / ;the
D
C
B(共29张PPT)
高三第二轮语法复习
动 词 的 时 态
时态和语态的主要考点
1、考查在语境中判断动词时态的运用能力。常考的时
态为：一般现在、一般过去、一般将来、现在进
行、过去进行、现在完成、过去完成、现在完成进
行、过去将来等。
2、时间、条件、让步等状语从句中动词的时态；主从
句时态呼应问题。
3、持续性动词和终止性动词的用法区别。
4、及物动词的被动语态。
5、系动词的用法特点。
6、某些以主动形式表被动意义的动词的用法。
最常用的几种时态与时间状语的搭配
一般现在 every …, sometimes,　at …, on Sunday
现在进行 now,
现在完成 for, since, so far, ever, never, just, yet, till/until, up to now, in the past years, always, recently
一般过去 yesterday, last week, an hour ago, the other day, in 1982, just now
过去进行 this morning, the whole morning, all day, yesterday, from nine to ten last evening… when, while
过去完成 …before, by, until, when, after, once, as soon as
一般将来 next…, tomorrow, in…
过去将来 多用在间接引语中表示发生在谓语动作以后的动作
1、现在时态
高考题点击：
1. --- Can I help you, sir
--- Yes, I bought this radio here yesterday, but it _____. (96 N)
A. didn’t work B. won’t work
C. can’t work D. doesn’t work
2. I _____ ping-pong quite well, but I haven’t had time to play
since the new year. (2001 N)
A. will play B. have played C. played D. play
D
D
说明：本题的干扰源为 bought … yesterday，虽然是昨天买的，但强调的是现在不响了，所以要用现在时。选项B为次选项。
说明：常识告诉我们，一个人一旦获得某种技能，一般是不会在短期内失去的，所以需用一般现在时。
3. E-mail, as well as telephone, _____ an important part in daily communication. (99 上海)
A. is playing B. have played C. are playing D. play
4. Selecting a mobile phone for personal use is no easy task because technology _____ so rapidly. (2001 N)
A. is changing B. has changed
C. will have changed D. will change
说明：E-mail 正在日常通讯中起着重要的作用，故需用现在进行时；而 E-mail 是主语，动词应该用单数。
说明：选择移动电话难的原因是由于科技正在飞速发展，所以要用现在进行时；况且进行时态常给人一种情感上的描述，表示说话者的一种“感慨、赞赏、愤怒、斥责”等。
A
A
5. --- I’m sorry to keep you waiting. (94 N)
--- Oh, not at all. I _____ here only a few minutes.
A. have been B. had been C. was D. will be
6. --- You haven’t been to Beijing, have you
--- _____. How I wish to go there! (98 N)
A. Yes, I have B. Yes, I haven’t
C. No, I have D. No, I haven’t
说明：现在完成时用来表示过去发生的动作对现在产生的结果和影响。我是几分钟前到的，可现在仍在这儿。一般过去时仅表示过去曾到过这儿，不表示现在还在这儿，所以与本句意思无关。
说明：从补充的句子 “How I wish to go there!”可知“我”没到过北京。
A
D
7. --- Hi, Tracy, you look tired.
--- I am tired. I _____ the living room all day. (98 N)
A. painted B. had painted
C. have been painting D. have painted
8. I wonder why Jenny ______ us recently. We should have heard from her by now.(N2002)
A. hasn’t written B. doesn’t write
C. won’t write D. hadn’t write
说明：这句话的意思是“我一整天都在刷起居室”，现在完成进行时表示从过去开始的一个动作一直持续到现在，而且还在进行当中。强调的是“一直在做”。
说明：recently 一般都与现在完成时连用；从后句“我们本该收到她的信了”可知，她最近没来过信。
C
A
用于现在完成时的句型
1）It is the first / second time…. that…结构中的从句部分，用现在完成时。 　 It is the first time that I have visited the city. 　 It was the third time that the boy had been late.
注意比较 It’s time that … 结构：
It is high time that we went to school.
2）This is the… that…结构，that 从句要用现在完成时. 　 This is the best film that I’ve (ever) seen. 　　 这是我看过的最好的电影。 　 This is the first time (that) I’ve heard him sing.　
这是我第一次听他唱歌。
典型例题 (1) --- Do you know our town at all 　 　 --- No, this is the first time I ___ here. A. was　 B. have been　 C. came　 D. am coming
(2) --- Have you ____ been to our town before 　 --- No, it’s the first time I ___ here. A. even, come　 B. even, have come　　
C. ever, come　 D. ever, have come 　 　 注意：非延续性动词的否定形式可以与表示延续时间的状语连用。即动作不发生的状态是可以持续的。 （错）I have received his letter for a month. （对）I haven't received his letter for almost a month.
B
D
2、过去时
高考题点击：
1. --- Nancy is not coming tonight.
--- But she _____! (98 N)
A. promises B. promised C. will promise D. had promised
2. My uncle _____ until he was forty-five. (2000 上海)
A. married B. didn’t marry
C. was not marrying D. would marry
说明：Nancy 答应要来这个动作应该发生在过去，是过去作出的承诺。
说明：until 用在肯定句中时，主句的动词必须是延续性动词，表示该动作一直持续到 until 后的时间为止；短暂性动词只能用在否定句中，表示直到此时该动作才开始。本题中 marry 是短暂性动词，所以只能用在否定句中。
B
B
3. --- You haven’t said a word about my new coat, Brenda. Do
you like it (N2002)
--- I’m sorry I _______ anything about it sooner. I certainly
think it’s pretty on you.
A. wasn’t saying B. don’t say C. won’t say D. didn’t say
说明：本题的干扰源来自上下文中的时态，上文用的是现在完成时，下文用的是一般现在时，所以有些人就误以为此处该用现在时态了。但根据说话人的意思不难发现，没有说出自己的评价是在这段对话以前的事了，所以要用一般过去时。
D
4. As she ____ the newspaper, Granny ____ asleep. (95 N)
A. read … was falling B. was reading … fell
C. was reading … was falling D. read … fell
5. --- Alice, why didn’t you come yesterday
--- I _____, but I had an unexpected visitor. (97 N)
A. had B. would C. was going to D. did
说明：一般来说在复合句中的两个动作，延续性的动作大都用进行时，短暂性的动词用一般时，表示在某个动作进行的过程当中另一个动作发生了。
说明：was going to do sth. 表示过去打算做某事；would do 表示过去愿意做某事。从后句可看出家里来了不速之客，所以没有来，故不可能选D。
B
C
6. --- Hey, look where you are going!
--- Oh, I’m terribly sorry. _____. (99 N)
A. I’m not noticing B. I wasn’t noticing
C. I haven’t noticed D. I don’t notice
7. --- Excuse me, Sir. Would you do me a favor
--- Of course. What is it (02 北京)
--- I ____ if you could tell me how to fill out this form.
A. had wondered B. was wondering
C. would wonder D. did wonder
说明：该题的干扰源来自 where you are going，不少人误以为是现在时了。其实很明显该动作是讲话前的事。
说明：本句所表达的意思很明显，要问的问题是在此之前一直在思考的事情，故该用过去进行时。
B
B
8. The little girl ____ her heart out because she ____ her toy
bear and believed she wasn’t ever going to find it. (02 北京)
A. had cried, lost B. cried, had lost
C. has cried, has lost D. cries, has lost
9. Helen _____ her key in the office so she had to wait until
her husband _____ home. (96 N)
A. has left … comes B. left … had come
C. had left … came D. had left … would come
说明：哭得伤心发生在过去，而丢玩具熊发生在哭之前。两个发生在过去的动作，之前发生的用过去完成时，之后发生的用一般过去时。
说明：丢钥匙发生在前，等人发生在后；until 引导的是时间状语从句，不能用将来时，所以只有C项可用。
B
C
10. He _____ to the lab than he set out to do the experiment.
(99 上海)
A. has no sooner got B. no sooner got
C. will no sooner get D. had no sooner got
11. John and I _______ friends for eight years. We first got to
know each other at a Christmas party. But we ____ each
other a couple of times before that. (2002 北京)
A. had been, have seen B. have seen, have seen
C. had been, had seen D. have been, had seen
说明：本题的关键词是 than，与 than 搭配的结构只有
sb. had no sooner done than … 。
说明：第一句表示到现在为止认识有八年了，后一句表示在认识之前见过几次面。
D
D
3、将来时
高考题点击：
1. If a man _____ succeed, he must work as hard as he can.
(95 上海)
A. will B. is to C. is going to D. should
2. --- You’ve left the light on.
--- Oh, so I have. _____ and turn it off. (2000 N)
A. I’ll go B. I’ve gone C. I go D. I’m going
说明：此句的意思为“如果一个人想要成功，就必须尽力而为”。If 引导的是条件状语从句，不能用将来时。而 be to 结构虽然表示将来的动作，但它不属于将来时。
说明：本句的重点是“并行结构”，关键是看后面的 turn，所以B、C、D、都不符合。
B
A
3. I’ve won a holiday for two weeks to Florida. I _____ my
mum. (2001 北京春季)
A. am taking B. have taken C. take D. will have taken
4. We were all surprised when he made it clear that he _____
office soon. (93 N)
A. leaves B. would leave C. left D. had left
说明：本句的意思为“我赢得了到 Florida 度假两周的奖励，我打算带我妈妈去。”所以应该考虑用将来时。而现在进行时常可用来表示将来发生的动作，尤其是趋向性的动词。
说明：that 引导的宾语从句中的动作“离职”应该发生在“were surprised” 之后，故需用过去将来时。
A
B
4、状语从句中的时态问题
高考题点击：
1. --- Can I join the club, Dad
--- You can when you _____ a bit older. (94 N)
A. get B. will get C. are getting D. will have got
2. In such dry weather, the flowers will have to be watered if
they _____. (2001上海)
A. have survived B. are to survive
C. would survive D. will survive
说明：时间状语从句中没有将来时，需用一般现在时替代一般将来时。
说明：条件状语从句中不用将来时，但 be to 结构不属于将来时态形式。
A
B
3. He will have learned English for eight years by the time he
_____ from the university next year. (2002上海)
A. will graduate B. will have graduated
C. graduates D. is to graduate
4. It ____ long before we ____ the result of the experiment.
(2002上海春季)
A. will not be, will know B. is, will know
C. will not be, know D. is, know
说明：by the time 引导的是时间状语从句，故不能使用将来时。D选项虽可考虑，但 be to 结构大多用来表示“义务、决定、职责、约定”等，与句意不合。
说明：before 引导的是时间状语从句，无将来时，而主句应该用将来时。
C
C
5、祈使句中的动词问题
高考题点击：
1. _____ it with me and I’ll see what I can do. (98 N)
A. When left B. Leaving C. If you leave D. Leave
2. _____ some of this juice --- perhaps you’ll like it.
(2000 北京春季)
A. Trying B. Try C. To try D. Have tried
3. _____ at the door before entering, please. (01 北京春季)
A. knocked B. To knock C. Knocking D. Knock
4. _____ blood if you can and many lives will be saved.
(2001上海)
A. Giving B. Give C. Given D. To give
D
B
D
B
6、几种时态的替代问题
A：一般现在时代替将来时 ：
除了在时间、条件、让步状语从句中用一般现在时代替将来时外，表示现在已安排好的未来事项，行程等活动也用一般现在时来代替将来时。如： 　 The museum opens at ten tomorrow.　博物馆明天10点开门。(实际上每天如此。)
B：一般现在时代替完成时：
句型 “It is … since…”代替“It has been … since …” It is (= has been) five years since we last met
C：一般现在时代替进行时：
在全部倒装句中都用一般现在时代替现在进行时。如：
Look, here comes Mr. Li.
2005年高三第二轮语法复习
被 动 语 态
高考题点击：
1. I need one more stamp before my collection _____. (94 N)
A. has completed B. completes
C. has been completed D. is completed
2. Cleaning women in big cities usually get _____ by the hour.
(98 N)
A. pay B. paying C. paid D. to pay
说明：集邮册只能被完成，且在 before 从句中没有将来时，故只能选D。
说明：该句的意思为“在大城市中清洁女工的工资通常是按小时支付的。”很明显该用被动语态。
D
C
3. Books of this kind _____ well. (99 上海)
A. sell B. sells C. are sold D. is sold
4. Hundreds of jobs _____ if the factory closes. (01 北京春)
A. lose B. will be lost C. are lost D. will lose
说明：sell 既可作及物动词又可作不及物动词，当用作“销售情况如何”时，sell 为不及物动词，故没有被动语态。
类似的词还有：wash, translate, write 等。
说明：lose job 为“失业”，job 只能被失去，且动作应该发生在将来。
A
B
5. A new cinema _____ here. They hope to finish it next
month. (2001 北京春季)
A. will be built B. is built
C. has been built D. is being built
6. The new suspension bridge _____ by the end of last month.
(2001上海)
A. has been designed B. had been designed
C. was designed D. would be designed
说明：从后句可知电影院应该正在修建。需要注意的是现在进行时态的被动语态的动词形式。
说明：by the end of 短语一般都与过去完成时或将来完成时连用。
D
B
7. This is Ted’s photo. We miss him a lot. He _____ trying to
save a child in the earthquake. (2002 北京春季)
A. killed B. is killed C. was killed D. was killing
8. I feel it is your husband who ______ for the spoiled child.
(2002上海)
A. is to blame B. is going to blame
C. is to be blamed D. should blame
说明：不要被前面使用的现在时所蒙蔽，在地震中抢救小孩并献身的动作只能在过去。
说明：be to blame 是固定结构，不能用被动语态。该句是一个强调句型。
C
A
9. Rainforests _____ and burned at such a speed that they will
disappear from the earth in the near future. (2002上海春季)
A. cut B. are cut C. are being cut D. had been cut
说明：该句的意思为“雨林正在以如此快的速度被砍伐和烧毁以至于在不久的将来它们就会消失。”从语境中可以看出应该使用现在进行时。况且进行时可以表达出说话人的一种特殊的情感。说话人是想呼吁人们停止乱砍乱烧雨林，给人们提出的一种警告。
C(共36张PPT)
定 语 从 句
By
Huang Yaochun
Hello!boys and girls!welcome to come here.Today we will go to a new and strange world to study Attributive clause!
Would you like to go
Let’s go!
定语从句
1、定语从句的基本特征
一）被定语从句修饰的先行词的特征：是人还是物，以及将要在定语从句中所充当的成份。
二）引导定语从句的关系代词或关系副词，代替先行词在定语从句中充当成份。选好哪种关系代词或关系副词非常重要。
2、在定语从句中能做主语的关系代词
who which that
Can you give us an example about who
No problem!
For example
The number of people who lost homes reached as many as 250,000.
This is the man who helped me yesterday.
Can you give me an example about which
For example
A wide and busy road which was built like a bridge over another road fell onto the one below.
The building which stands near the river is our school.
What about “that”
Can you give me an example
For example
He asked to do things in a way that did not do harm to others.
Who is the man that is reading the newspaper over there
You can take any seat that is free.
3、在定语从句中能做宾语的关系代词
Who (whom)
For example
This is the man whom we talked about.
The man whom you met in the school-
yard is not my father.
The old lady who you talked to is Jane’s grandmother.
Anything else
There are some other words besides the words
who and whom, such as which and that.
For example
This is the book which you want.
The letter that I received was from my father.
All that we have to do is to practise every day.
Note :在定语从句中可以做宾语的关系代词
除了who 和 whom 之外，which 和 that 也
可以做宾语。
3、在定语从句中能做定语的关系代词
whose
the +noun +of +which/whom
For example
He lives in the room whose door is green.
The girl whose father is a doctor studies very well.
Can you do it by yourself
The +noun+of+which/whom
He lives in the room the door of which is green.
The girl the father of whom is a doctor studies very well.
4、在定语从句中做时间状语的关系
副词
when
Oct 1,1949 was the day when the new China was founded.
I will never forget the day when I met
Mr Liu.
For example
5、在定语从句中做地点状语的关系副词
where
For example
This is the place where we lived for 5 years.
This is the house where he lived last year.
6、在定语从句中做原因状语的关系副词
why
For example
I know the reason why he came late.
Can you tell me the reason why you are late for school.
In my opinion,they are very simple.
Do you think so
Any questions
What about “as”
Can you give me its explanations
As 引导限制性定语从句时，先行词常有such 和 the same 修饰，as 在从句中不省略,as也常修饰整个句子，可放在句末，甚至句中或句首。 For example:
Instruction
For example
He has bought the same type of bike as I have .
Such teachers as know Tom think him bright.
As we know,China is a developing country.
He,as we expected,came to the party on time.
practice
1.The boy who we saw yesterday was John’s brother.
2.It sounded like a train which was going under my house.
3.The car which my uncle had just bought was destroyed in the earthquake.
4.The earthquake that /which shook the city in 1906 was the biggest in America history.
5. W e don’t know the number of people who
lost their homes in the 1906 earthquake.
6.The house which /that they built in 1987 stayed up in the earthquake.
7.The house which/that is built on sand may fall down in the earthquake.
8.Luckily none of the people who/whom I know were killed in the earthquake.
9.People who study the earthquakes think that there will be another big one soon.(共10张PPT)
高三英语总复习语法系列训练
南莫中学高三英语备课组
名词性从句
一、引导名词性从句的连接词
在句子中起名词作用的句子叫名词从句 (Noun Clauses）。 名词从句的功能相当于名词词组, 它在复合句中能担任主语、宾语、表语、同位语、介词宾语等，因此根据它在句中不同的语法功能，名词从句又可分别称为主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句。
引导名词性从句的连接词可分为三类：　　
连接词：that, whether, if (不充当从句的任何成分）
连接代词：what, whatever, who, whoever, whom, whose, which.
连接副词：when, where, how, why
不可省略的连词：
1. 介词后的连词
2. 引导主语从句和同位语从句的连词不可省略。
That she was chosen made us very happy.
We heard the news that our team had won.
whether 与 if 均为 “是否” 的意思。但在下列情况下，whether 不能被 if 所取代：
1.whether 引导主语从句（包括从句在句首的位置）应当用whether，不用if，如：
Whether it is true remains a problem.
Whether he will come, I am not sure.
2. 引导表语从句用whether，不用if，如：
The question is whether you should accept it.
3. whether可以引导从句作介词的宾语，而if 则不能，如：
I’m not interested in whether they’ll go or not.
It depends on whether we have got enough money.
4. whether可以直接跟动词不定式连用，而if 则不能，如：
I didn’t know whether to laugh or to cry.
She hasn’t decided whether to go or not.
5.引导同位语从句用whether，不用if，如：
The question whether he’ll attend the meeting is essential.
★大部分连接词引导的主语从句都可置于句末，用it充当形式主语。
It is not important who will go.
二、 名词性that-从句
1）由从属连词that引导的从句叫做名词性that-从句。that只起连接主句和从句的作用，在从句中不担任任何成分，本身也没有词义。
名词性that-从句在句中能充当主语、宾语、表语、同位语和形容词宾语，例如：
主语：That he is still alive is sheer luck.
宾语：John said that he was leaving for London on Wednesday.
表语：The fact is that he has not been seen recently.
同位语：The fact that he has not been seen recently disturbs everyone in his office.
形容词宾语：I am glad that you are satisfied with your job.
2）that-从句作主语通常用it作先行词，而将that-从句置于句末，例如：
It is quite clear that the whole project is doomed to failure.　
It's a pity that you should have to leave.　
a. It + be +形容词+ that-从句
　It is necessary that…　　　 有必要……
　It is important that…　　　 重要的是……
　It is obvious that…　　　　 很明显……
b. It + be + -ed 分词+ that-从句
　It is believed that…　　　　　 人们相信……
　It is known to all that…　　　 从所周知……
　It has been decided that…　　 已决定……
c. It + be +名词+ that-从句
　It is common knowledge that…　 ……是常识
　It is a surprise that…　　 令人惊奇的是……
　It is a fact that…　　　　 事实是……
d. It +不及物动词+ that-分句
　It appears that…　　　　　　 似乎……
　It happens that…　　　　　　 碰巧……
　It occurred to me that…　　 我突然想起……
用 it 作形式主语的that- 从句有以下四种不同
四、if, whether引导的名词从句
1）yes-no型疑问从句
从属连词if, whether引导的名词从句是由一般疑问句或选择疑问转化而来的，因此也分别被称为yes-no型疑问句从句和选择型疑问从句，其功能和wh-从句的功能相同， 例如：
主语：Whether the plan is feasible remains to be proved.
宾语：Let us know whether/if you can finish the article before Friday.
表语：The point is whether we should lend him the money.
同位语：They are investigating the question whether the man is trustworthy.
形容词宾语： She's doubtful whether we shall be able to come.　
介词宾语： I worry about whether he can pass the exams.　　
2）选择性疑问从句
选择性疑问从句由关联词if/whether…or或whethe…or not构成,如：
Please tell me whether / if they are Swedish or Danish.
I don't care whether you like the plan or not.
五、否 定 转 移
1) 将think, believe, suppose, expect, imagine等动词后面宾语从句的否定词转移到主句中，即主句的谓语动词用否定式，而从句的谓语动词用肯定式。
　I don't think I know you.　我想我并不认识你。
　I don' t believe he will come.　我相信他不回来。
注意：若谓语动词为hope, 宾语从句中的否定词不能转移。
　I hope you weren't ill. 我想你没有生病吧。
2) 将seem, appear 等后的从句的否定转移到前面。
　It doesn't seem that they know where to go.
　It doesn't appear that we'll have a sunny day tomorrow.
3) 有时将动名词，介词短语或整个从句的否定转变为对谓语动词的否定。
I don't remember having ever seen such a man.　
我记得从未见过这样一个人。 (not否定动名词短语 having…)
4) 有时状语或状语从句中否定可以转移到谓语动词前。
The ant is not gathering this for itself alone.　(否定状语)　
1.It now appears ______ they are in need of help.
A. that B. which C. what D. how
2.It is good news ______ they will arrive in a few days.
A. which B. what C. that D. how
3.It ______ Joe drives badly.
A. thought that B. thinks that
C. is thought that D. is thought that
4.It ______ he is late for class.
A. may that B. might that
C. may be that D. might be what
5.This is ______ she was born.
A. where B. which C. that D. what
6.The question is ______ we can’t go there today.
A. that B. what C. which D. when
7.The question is ______ it is worth doing.
A. if B. whether C. which D. what
8.The reason he has made such great progress is _______ he has never wasted his time.
A. because B. why C. that D. what
9.My suggestion is ______ we should turn the land into rice fields.
A. what B. that C. which D. where
10.His proposal is that the dam ______ at the foot of the mountain.
A. build B. will build C. be built D. will be built
11.My advice is that he ______ regular house.
A. keep B. would keep C. keeps D. kept
12.______ knows the truth will tell you about it.
A. Who that B. Whoever C. Whom that D. That who
13.We all know the truth _____ the earth goes round the sun.
A. that B. which C. what D. whether
14.We heard the news ______ our team had won.
A. which B. that C. what D. where
15.The problem ______ it is right or wrong has not yet been decided.
A. which B. that C. whether D. if
16.You must do well ______ the teacher asks you to do.
A. which B. what C. that D. where
Good-bye!(共32张PPT)
06年高考语法复习系列十
冠 词
冠词考点及复习要点
冠词的考查是当前各地高考考卷中的热点，是我们复习中的重点之一。冠词的考查以固定结构和习惯用语为主，结合考查一些基本规则。所以我们在复习中要注重教材中的语言点的整理，同时对下面的冠词规则也要引起重视。
1、不定冠词的用法比较；
2、定冠词的习惯用法；
3、零冠词的用法；
4、在习惯用语中冠词的用法；
不定冠词的用法
考题点击1
The Wilsons live in _____ A-shaped house near the coast. It is _____ 17th century cottage.
（04浙江）
A. the , / B. an, the C. /, the D. an, a
D
该句意为“威尔逊先生一家住在海边的一幢A型房子里，那是一幢十七世纪的屋子。”两处都表示“一幢“，A-shaped 是元音开头，该用 an；而 seventeenth是辅音开头，所以该用 a。
考题点击2
Mrs. Taylor has _____ 8-year-old daughter who has _____ gift for painting—she has won two national prizes. （05浙江卷）
A．a; a B．an; the C．an; a D．the; a
C
“Taylor 夫人有一个在绘画方面极有天赋的八岁的女儿，她已经两次获得全国大奖了。” eight 是元音开头，所以该用 an；而后面的 have a gift for为一短语，表示“在 … 方面有天赋”，故答案为C。
　　冠词是虚词，本身不能单独使用，也没有词义，它用在名词的前面，帮助指明名词的含义。英语中的冠词有三种，一种是定冠词（the Definite Article），另一种是不定冠词（the Indefinite Article），还有一种是零冠词（Zero Article）。 　　不定冠词a (an)与数词one 同源，是“一个”的意思。a用于辅音音素前，而an则用于元音音素前。
1) 表示"一个"，意为one；指某人或某物，意为a
certain。 A Mr. Ling is waiting for you.
2) 代表一类人或物。 　　 A knife is a tool for cutting with. 　　 Mr. Smith is an engineer. 3) 词组或成语。 　　 a little / a few / a lot / a type of / a pile / a great many / many a / as a rule / in a hurry / in a minute / in a word / in a short while / after a while / have a cold / have a try / keep an eye on / all of a sudden
定冠词的用法
考题点击1
As a rule, domestic servants doing odd jobs are
paid _______. （04上海春季）
A. by the hour B. by hour
C. by an hour D. by hours
A
“按小时付费”，以及其它用来表示“按…计算”都需用介词 by 加 the 加单位名词来表示，如：by the day; by the jin; by the pound; by the dozen …。但需注意：size; weight; time; length … 等名词并不表示单位，所以不需加 the。
考题点击2
On May 5, 2005, at ________World Table Tennis
Championship, Kong Linghui and Wang Hao won
the gold medal in men's doubles with ________
score of 4: 1. (05江苏卷)
A. a; a B. 不填; the C. a; 不填 D. the; a
D
“the World Table Tennis Championship”是由普通名词构成的专有名词，用来表示一个机构名称。这类名词前都要加 the。 “with a score of 4:1” 表示“以4:1的比分”，是一个介词短语结构。
考题点击3
This book tells ________ life story of John Smith,
who left ______ school and worked for a newspaper
at the age of 16. （05辽宁卷）
A．the; the B．a; the C．the; 不填 D．a; 不填
C
“这本书讲的是 John Smith 的人生故事”，是特指的，所以必须用 the。 “leave school” 表示“毕业”，不用冠词。类似的用法还有：finish school; in class; at church; go to school …等。
定冠词the与指示代词this，that同源，有“那（这）个”的意思，但较弱，可以和一个名词连用，来表示某个或某些特定的人或东西。 　1）特指双方都明白的人或物： 　　 Take the medicine.　把药吃了。 　2）上文提到过的人或事： 　　 He bought a house.　I‘ve been to the house. 　　 他买了幢房子。我去过那幢房子。 　3）指世上独一物二的事物： 　 the sun， the sky， the moon， the earth
4）与单数名词连用表示一类事物，如：the dollar 美元;
the fox 狐狸；或与形容词或分词连用，表示一类
人：the rich 富人; the living 生者。 5）用在序数词和形容词最高级，及形容词only，
very， same等前面： Where do you live 　I live on the second floor.　
你住在哪？我住在二层。 That‘s the very thing I’ve been looking for.　
那正是我要找的东西。 6）与复数名词连用，指整个群体： 　 They are the teachers of this school.指全体教师) 　 They are teachers of this school.　 (指部分教师)
7）表示所有，相当于物主代词，用在表示身体部位
的名词前： 　She caught me by the arm..　她抓住了我的手臂。 8）用在某些由普通名词构成的国家名称、机关团
体、阶级、等专有名词前： 　 the People‘s Republic of China　 中华人民共和国 　 the United States　 美国 9）用在表示乐器的名词之前：　
She plays the piano.　她会弹钢琴。 10) 用在姓氏的复数名词之前，表示一家人： 　 the Greens　 格林一家人 (或格林夫妇)
11) 用在表示“度量衡”之类的名词前：
Apples are sold by the pound.
但要注意在 time, weight, length 等名词前不加 the。
12) 用在惯用语中： in the day, in the morning (afternoon，evening)；　
the day after tomorrow；　 the day before yesterday；　the next morning；　 in the sky (water，field，country)；　 in the dark；　in the rain；　in the distance；　 in the middle (of)；　in the end； on the whole；
by the way；　go to the theatre
零冠词的用法
考题点击1
If you go by ______ train, you can have quite a comfortable journey, but make sure you get ______ fast one. （05全国卷3）
A．the; the B．不填；a
C．the; a D．不填；不填
B
在由介词 by 加表示交通方式的名词短语中，不用冠词。但如果 by 不表示交通方式，而表示地理位置，就需要加冠词了。如：by sea 乘船；by the sea 在海边
考题点击2
It is often said that _____ teachers have _____
very easy life. ( 05北京卷)
A. 不填；不填 B. 不填；a
C. the, 不填 D. the, a
B
teachers 是复数名词，用来表示类属，不加冠词。只有在特定范围内的复数名词前才加冠词。“have a … life”是一个习惯短语，表示“过着…的生活”。
考题点击3
The warmth of _______ sweater will of course
be determined by the sort of ______wool used.
（01全国）
A. the; the B. the;/ C. /; the D. /; /
B
sweater 的保暖性能取决于使用哪一种类型的羊毛。the 加单数名词 sweater 表示一种类型；而羊毛是物质名词，表示类属的物质名词不加冠词。
1）国名，人名前通常不用定冠词：England，Mary；
2）泛指的复数名词，表示一类人或事物时，可不用定
冠词； They are teachers. 他们是教师。
3）抽象名词表示一般概念时，通常不加冠词； Failure is the mother of success.　失败乃成功之母
4）物质名词表示一般概念时，通常不加冠词，当表示特定的意思时，需要加定冠词；
　Man cannot live without water.　
人离开水就无法生存。
5）在季节、月份、节日、 假日、日期、星期等表示
时间的名词之前，不加冠词； 　 We go to school from Monday to Friday.　
我们从星期一到星期五都上课。 6）在称呼或表示官衔，职位的名词前不加冠词； 　 The guards took the American to General Lee. 　 士兵们把这个美国人送到李将军那里。 7）在三餐饭、球类运动和娱乐运动的名称前，不加
冠词 如：have breakfast，play chess
但如果三餐饭的名词前有形容词修饰，则需要加
冠词。如：have a big breakfast
8）当两个或两个以上名词并用时，常省去冠词； 　I can‘t write without pen or pencil.　　
没有钢笔和铅笔，我就写不了字。 9）当by 与火车等交通工具连用，表示一种方式时，
中间无冠词；by bus，by train； 10）有些个体名词不用冠词；如： school，college，prison，market，hospital，bed，
table，class，town，church，court 等个体名词，直
接置于介词后，表示该名词的深层含义； 　 go to hospital　　去医院看病 　 go to the hospital　 去医院 (并不一定去看病)
11)不用冠词的序数词； 　a. 序数词前有物主代词 　b. 序数词作副词　 He came first in the race. 　c. 在固定词组中　 at (the) first, first of all,　
from first to last
12）在复习过程中注意不带冠词的短语和习惯用语。
13）特别注意加冠词和不加冠词的意义区别。如：
go to hospital --- go to the hospital
at table --- at the table
in charge of --- in the charge of
out of question --- out of the question
不定冠词的位置
考题点击1
______ role she played in the film! No wonder she
has won an Oscar. (2002上海春)
A. How interesting B. How an interesting
C. What interesting D. What an interesting
D
不定冠词常位于名词或名词修饰语前。但位于下列形容词之后： such，what，many，half，如： 　　 I have never seen such an animal. 　　 Many a man is fit for the job.
考题点击2
We were in ________ when we left that we forgot the airline tickets. (2003上海)
A. a rush so anxious B. a such anxious rush
C. so an anxious rush D. such an anxious rush
D
当名词前的形容词被副词 as, so, too, how, however, enough修饰时，不定冠词应放在形容词之后： 　　 It is as pleasant a day as I have ever spent. 　　 So short a time. 　　 Too long a distance.
还需注意下面三个问题：
1、quite，rather与单数名词连用，冠词放在其后。 但当rather，quite 前仍有形容词，不定冠词放其前后均可。如：quite a lot 2、 在as，though 引导的让步状语从句中，当标语为形容词修饰的名词时，不定冠词放形容词后： Brave a man though he is，he trembles at the sight of
snakes. 他尽管勇敢，可见到蛇还是发抖。 3、当名词被比较级形容词修饰时，不定冠词通常置于比较级形容词之后。
定冠词的位置
考题点击1
He did it ____ it took me. (2003北京)
A. one-third a time B. one-third time
C. the one-third time D. one-third the time
D
定冠词通常位于名词或名词修饰语前，但放在all， both，double，half，twice，three times等词之后，名词之前。 　 All the students in the class went out.　
班里的所有学生都出去了。
06年高考语法复习系列十
数 词
数词考点及复习要点
虽然数词并不是近几年的考查重点，但我们在复习时还是需要搞清楚以下几个概念：
1、数词的基本用法及比较；
2、数词的位置；
3、倍数词的表达习惯；
4、在习惯用语中数词的用法；
数词的基本用法
考题点击1
It is not rare in _____ that people in ____ fifties are going to university for further education.
(99上海)
A. 90s, the B. the 90s, /
C. 90s, their D. the 90s, their
D
表示“几十岁”；用 in one’s + 数词复数，如：
He began to work in his teens.
表示"年代"，用 in +the +数词复数；
数词的基本用法
考题点击2
____ of the land in that district _____ covered with trees and grass. ( 2000上海)
A. Two fifth, is B. Two fifth, are
C. Two fifths, is D. Two fifths, are
C
分数和百分数作主语时，关键是看其后的名词来决定其谓语动词的数。该题中的是不可数名词，所以动词需用单数。
数词的基本用法
考题点击3
Americans eat ______ vegetables per person today as they did in 1910. (2002上海春)
A. more than twice B. as twice as many
C. twice as many as D. more than twice as many
D
倍数表示法： 主+谓+倍数(或分数)+ as + adj. (+ n.) + as 　I have three times as many as you.　
其他用来表示倍数的方法：
主+谓+倍数(分数)+ the size (weight，length…) of… The earth is 49 times the size of the moon.　
地球是月球的49倍。
2. 主+谓+倍数(分数)+ 形容词(副词)比较级+ than… The grain output is 8 percent higher this year than that of last year. 　　 今年比去年粮食产量增加8%。
3. 主+谓+ junior (senior)+ to　
He is five years senior to his younger brother.